GOVERNMENT OF UTTARAKHAND

TENDER NO: GMVN- ENGG-BHANKOLI-1

DATE OF PUBLISHING: 6 JUNE 2019

TENDER DOCUMENT
for
BEAUTIFICATION OF ANCIENT MAHSU DEVTA TEMPLE
AT BHANKOLI VILLAGE DISTT UTTARKASHI
UTTARAKHAND
BID DOCUMENT

GARHWAL MANDAL VIKAS NIGAM LTD

Office: 74/1, RAJPUR ROAD, DEHRADUN – 248001
(UTTARAKHAND)
Tele: 0135-2742171, Fax: 0135-2748479,
email: [email protected]

1 of 194
 INDEX

S.NO SECTION CONTENTS PAGE NO.

A I INVITATION FOR TENDERS 3
B II INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERER/BIDDER 7
C III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 14
D IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 17
E V CHECK LIST 178
F VI PERFORMA 194
1 Bidder Details
2 Letter of Submission of Tender
3 Format towards Performance Bank Guarantee

*********

2 of 194
 SECTION – I
INVITATION FOR TENDERS

3 of 194
 SECTION – I
INVITATION FOR TENDERS
(E- Procurement)
Tenders are invited by General Manager (C), Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited (GMVNL), 74/1
Rajpur Road, Dehradun (Uttrakhand), from eligible bidders by themselves or through their authorized
agents, supply, delivery, and commissioning for “BEAUTIFICATION OF ANCIENT MAHSU DEVTA TEMPLE AT
BHANKOLI VILLAGE DISTT UTTARKASHI UTTARAKHAND” as per the detailed specifications. The tender
particulars are given under:

Tender No. Brief Completion EMD/ Bid Cost of Catagery

description of Period Security Tender Doc. of
item Contractor
GMVN- ENGG Beautification of 9 Months Rs. 0.80 LAC Rs 2500.00 “D” or above
BHANKOLI-1 Ancient mahsu Class
+ Rs. 450.00
devta Temple at registered
Bhankoli Village
(GST) contractor in
Distt Uttarkashi as Total Cost Building
per design, Rs. 2,950.00 works
drawings and (Rupees (Government
specification Two or Semi
attached. government
thousand department)
nine
hundred fifty
only)

1.0 Interested bidders may obtain further information and inspect the bid documents at the office
of The General Manager (C) at the address given below:
The General Manager (Construction),
Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited,
74/1 Rajpur Road,
Dehradun (Uttrakhand)
(Tel. No: + 91-135-2742171, Fax No: + 91-135-2748479)

2.0 a) The submission and down loading of bid is through e-tendering system of Govt of
Uttarakhand. For submission of tender the bidder is required to have digital signature
certificate (DSC) from the authorized Authorities. The bidder may visit the site
www.uktenders.gov.in for detailed procedure of e-tendering system regarding submission of
tender, EMD and cost of tender.

b)
Tender publishing date through E- 06.06.2019 1500 Hrs
tender
Start date of downloading the tender 06.06.2019 1700 Hrs
Pre bid Meeting 11.06.2019 1100 Hrs
Start Date of bid Submission 14.06.2019 1500 Hrs.
Last Date for receipt of Bids 26.06.2019 1500 Hrs
Date of Opening the Bids- After 26.06.2019 1530 Hrs.

4 of 194
3.0 Tender Fee (non refundable )
a) As per section I

b) Bidders are required to make an offline payment for the cost of bidding document. Online
bids must be accompanied by the electronic scanned copy of the demand draft of the
amount as mentioned above in favour of General Manager (Construction), Garhwal
Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd., Dehradun.

c) The Original copy of demand draft of the fee of the bidding document must be submitted
to the General Manager (Construction), Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd., Dehradun on
or before the date mentioned in the tender schedule.

4.0 The last date of submission of bid on 26.06.2019 upto 1500 hours. The relevant documents
must be submitted in GMVN office on or before deadline accompanied with Earnest Money
Deposit/ Bid Security, cost of tender etc. as indicated in the Bid document.

5.0 Bids will be opened in presence of the Bidders‟ representatives who chose to attend at 15.30
hours on 26.06.2019 at the office mentioned above. In case of unscheduled holiday on the
closing/opening day of the tender, the next working day will be treated as scheduled
prescribed day for closing and opening of the tender, the time notified remaining the same.

6.0 Bids submitted by the bidders who do not meet the qualification requirements as required or
whose bids are not valid and open for acceptance for a period mentioned in the bid
document from the date of opening of tender, will be rejected.

7.0 The submission of tender document by bidder will not automatically mean that the bidder is
qualified for the Award of contract. The bidders will be required to fulfill the qualification
criteria given in the tender document before being considered eligible for award of contract.
No condition/ Deviation which is either additional or in modifications the tender conditions
shall be included in the bid submitted by the bidder. If the bid contains any such conditions or
deviations from the tender conditions, the bid shall be rejected.

8.0 The bidder must enclose income tax return for the last three years along with affidavit of no
dues towards Government taxes on Rs. 10.00 stamp paper.

9.0 Income tax, GST and all other taxes/ Labour CESS shall be deducted from each bill of the
contractor as per prevailing Government Rules.

10.0 The bidder have to quote the item rates including GST and labour CESS etc levied by the
State/ Central Govt time to time.

11.0 In case of any discrepancies, the provisions of this Invitation for Tenders shall take
precedence over all the bidding documents.

12.0 The tender document is not transferable.

13.0 Bidders are required to submit the tender through e tendering system. The relevant
documents shall be received by post/ courier/through representative provided that the bid is
received before the stipulated date and time, in the Engineering Section of Garhwal Mandal

5 of 194
 Vikas Nigam Limited, 74/1 Rajpur Road, Dehradun (Uttrakhand). Garhwal Mandal Vikas
Nigam Limited shall not be held responsible for the delay/ non-receipt of the document.

14.0 The Tender No., name of the work and the bidders address shall be super scribed on the
sealed envelopes.

15.0 Work shall be executed as per prevailing Government rules.

16.0 Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited does not bind themselves to accept the lowest or any
offer or to give reasons for their decision. Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited also
reserves the right to reject or accept without assigning any reason.

17.0 The period of completion of work in all respects is 09 months from the date of execution of
contract.

18.0 The bidder shall submit the experience certificate of Building/ similar nature of single work
costing not less than Rs. 10.00 lakh and above each regarding satisfactorily completion of
equivalent works in the last five years in hill areas.

General Manager (Construction),

Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited.

********

6 of 194
 SECTION – II
INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERER

7 of 194
 SECTION – II
INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERER
A. INTRODUCTION

1.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.1 General Manager (Construction), Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited (GMVNL), 74/1
Rajpur Road, Dehradun (Uttrakhand), (hereinafter referred as Client), invites sealed
tenders/bids from eligible bidders for construction work as per the specification enclosed at
Section –IV of the bid document.

1.2 All information in the offer must be in English.

1.3 This tender have number of two cover system, first is Technical Bid and other is Financial
Bid. After qualifying the technical bid , financial bid will be opened.
1.4 Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid for a work. In case a bidder who submits more than
one bid for a work or if a Joint Venture partner is found to have participated in more than
one JVs for the same work, it will cause the bids of all JVs/ Bidder disqualified.
1.5 The laboratories test of the Construction Material must be done through NABL /
Government lab by the contractor at own cost.
1.6 All related Tools and Plants shall be arranged by the contractor.
1.7 Experienced Civil Engineer must be posted at site by the contractor during the construction
work.

2.0 COST OF BIDDING

The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his bid,
and Client will be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or
outcome of the bidding process.

3.0 SITE VISIT

The Bidder must visit and examine the Site of works and its surroundings before bidding
under intimation and approval from the office and obtain/ascertain for himself on his own
responsibility and cost, all information that may be necessary for preparing the bid and
entering into a contract execution.

B. THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

4.0 CONTENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

4.1 The Scope of work, bidding procedures and contract terms are stipulated in the Bid form
and Price Schedules, Bidding Documents and shall include along with its enclosed
Annexure:-
i) Invitation for Tenders
ii) Instructions to Tenderer
iii) General Conditions of Contract
iv) Technical Specifications & drawings
V) Proforma & annexure.

8 of 194
4.2 The bidder should examine all instructions, terms and specifications in the Bidding
documents. Failure to furnish all information required as per Bidding Documents or
submission of a bid not substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents in every respect
will be at the Bidder's risk and may result in rejection of his bid.

C. PREPARATION OF BIDS

5.0 BIDDER REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 The bidder should have registered in “A” class category in any Government, Semi
Government Department and submit the photocopy of registration certificate along with the
technical bid.

5.2 The bidder should have achieved minimum annual financial average turnover during the last
three years, ending 31st March of the previous financial year, should be at least 20.00 Lakhs.

5.3 Experience of having successfully completed similar nature of single work costing not less
than Rs.10.00 Lac and above each during last five years .

5.4 The Bidder should have Employment Provident Fund (EPF) number and submit the photocopy
of EPF registration along with the technical bid.

5.5 The bidder should have PAN and GST number and submit the photocopy of PAN and GST
registration along with the technical bid.

6.0 DOCUMENTS FOR SUBMISSION

Following documents needs to be submitted along with the Bid:

i) Original Tender document and the photocopy of the attached document duly signed
on each page by the Authorized representative of the firm as taken of acceptance of
the terms and conditions therein.
ii) Bid security / Earnest Money Deposit, Tender cost.
iii) Bidder Details- Proforma 1
iv) Check list as per Section V.
iv) All formats and statements duly filled in.
v) Affidavit of the bidder on Rs. 100.00 Stamp paper regarding validity of tender and
certification of the documents.

7.0 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) / BID SECURITY

7.1 The Bidder shall provide Earnest Money Deposit / Bid Security for the amount indicated in
Section-I: Invitation for Tenders in the form of F.D.R. / C.D.R. in favour of General
Manager (Construction), G.M.V.N. Ltd., Dehradun from a Nationalized/ Scheduled Bank
in India.

9 of 194
7.2 If the Bidder withdraws / amends his bid for any reason during its validity, the Earnest
Money Deposit / Bid Security shall be forfeited. Failure to submit original copy of bid
security would lead to rejection of offer.

7.3 No interest will be payable by the Client on the Bid Security/ EMD submitted by the Bidder.

7.4 The EMD of unsuccessful Bidder shall be returned by the Client within one month of award
of contract.

7.5 The Earnest Money/Bid Security shall remain deposited with the Client for the period of 90
days from the date of opening of Tenders. If the validity of the offer is extended, the Earnest
Money Deposit/Bid Security duly extended shall also be furnished, failing which the offer
after the expiry of the aforesaid period shall not be considered by the Client.

7.6 Any tender not accompanied by Earnest Money Deposit / Bid Security in one of the `
approved forms is liable to be summarily rejected.

8.00 CURRENCY

Prices shall be quoted in the Indian currency.

9.00 PRICES
9.1 Prices quoted shall be CIP (Village -Bhankoli, Block- Naugaon, Distt-Uttarkashi
Uttarakhand, India) including all handling, loading & unloading, sea & inland transportation,
Custom Clearances, transit insurance, foundation, installation, and commissioning.
9.2 Prices shall be inclusive of temporary permit, freight, insurance and all such costs. Prices
shall remain firm and no escalation shall be permissible. All statutory taxes and duties, any
other charges as applicable, shall be included in the offered price.
9.3 Prices shall be quoted in the BOQ format in both figure and words.

10.0 VALIDITY OF OFFER

The offer shall be kept valid for acceptance for a minimum period of Ninety (90) Calendar
days from the date set for opening of tenders.

11.0 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BIDS

11.1 The documents that are to be sent to the office physically other than those submitted
through e-tendering are Cost of Tender document and Bid Security.

D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS

12.0 BID SUBMISSION

Through e-tendering system on the website uktenders.gov.in

DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS

12.1 Bids must be uploaded on time and all document that are to be sent physically should be

10 of 194
 received by the Client at the address mentioned above, within the date and time of bid
submission indicated in the Section-I: Invitation for Tenders.

12.2 Any bid received after the deadline for submission of bids, will be rejected and returned
unopened.

12.3 Bids submitted through E-mail or facsimile will be summarily rejected.

12.4 Bids will be submitted through e-tendering on the web site www.uktenders.gov.in
only

13 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

13.1 The bidder may modify or withdraw its bid after the bid‟s submission, provided that written
notice of the modification or withdrawal is received prior to the deadline prescribed for
submission of bids. A withdrawal notice may also be sent by fax but followed by a signed
confirmation copy by post, not later than the deadlines for submission of bids
13.2 See the bidders manual from the website uktenders.gov.in for rules related to e-tendering
for withdrawal or change in bid.
13.3 No bid may be modified subsequent to the deadline for submission of bids.
13.4 No bid may be withdrawn in the interval between the deadline for submission of bids and
the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by the Bidder. Withdrawal of a bid during
this interval shall result in forfeiture of its Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security.

14 OPENING OF BIDS BY CLIENT

14.1 The tenders will be opened by the tender committee on the website only, in the presence of
Bidders‟ representatives who choose to attend, at the place, date and time specified in the
Section-I: Invitation for Tenders. The Bidders‟ representatives who are present shall sign a
register evidencing their attendance.
14.2 The envelope containing the Bid document Fee and envelop containing the Technical Bid
and Earnest Money Deposit and all the Documents required

E. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS

15 PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION

15.2 The Client will examine the bids to determine whether they are complete in all respects,
having any computational errors, documents have been properly signed, and bids are
generally in order.

15.3 The Client may waive any minor informality, non-conformity, or irregularity in a bid which
does not constitute a material deviation, provided such waiver does not prejudice or affect
the relative ranking of any bidder.

15.4 Prior to the detailed evaluation, the Client will determine the substantial responsiveness of
each bid to the bidding documents. The Client‟s determination of bid‟s responsiveness is to
be based on the contents of the bid itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.

15.5 If a bid is not substantially responsive it will be rejected by the Client and may not
subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by corrections of non-conformity.

11 of 194
15.6 Price bid of only those bidders who have qualified in the technical bid shall be opened

16 CORRECTION OF ERRORS IN PRICE BID

16.2 PRICE BID will be checked and corrected for any arithmetical errors in computation and
summation as follows:

16.2.1.1 Where there is a discrepancy between amounts in figures and in words, the amount in
words will govern;

16.2.1.2 Where there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the total amount derived from
the multiplication of the unit price and the quantity, the unit price as quoted will
govern.

16.2.1.3 If a bidder does not accept the correction of errors as outlined above, his tender will be
rejected.

17 EVALUATION OF THE OFFERS

17.1 The tenders received will be evaluated to ascertain the best and lowest acceptable tender
in the interest of the Client, as specified in the specifications and tender documents.

17.2 The COMMERCIAL EVALUATION will take into consideration the following:
i) Ex-works cost of basic equipment plus ED, VAT, Freight Insurance, GST etc.

18 ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER AND SIGNING OF CONTRACT

18.1 The Client may accept a tender for a part or whole of the quantity offered, reject any tender
without assigning any reason and may not accept the lowest tender or any tender.
18.2 Acceptance of tender will be communicated by Fax and Postal Letter for formal acceptance
of tender. In case where acceptance is indicated by Fax or Postal Letter, the formal
acceptance of tender will be forwarded to the Contractor as soon as possible, but the Fax
or Postal Letter should be deemed to conclude the contract.
18.3 Within Seven (07) days of receipt of Acceptance advice, the successful bidder shall sign
and date the contract as per and return it to the Client.

19 EFFECT AND VALIDITY OF OFFER

19.1 The submission of any offer connected with these specifications and documents shall
constitute an agreement that the Bidder shall have no cause of action or claim, against the
Client for rejection of his offer. The Client shall always be at liberty to reject or accept any
offer or offers at his sole discretion and any such action will not be called into question and
the Bidder shall have no claim in that regard against the Client.
19.2 Offers shall be deemed to be under consideration immediately after they are opened and
until such time the official intimation of award is made by the Client to the Bidder. While the
offers are under consideration, Bidders and/or their representatives or other interested
parties are advised to refrain from contacting the Client by any means. If necessary, the
Client will obtain clarifications on the offers by requesting for such information from any or
all the Bidders, either in writing or through personal contact, as may be considered
necessary. Bidders will not be permitted to change the substance of their offers after the
offers have been opened.

12 of 194
20 GENERAL

The Bidders must ensure that the conditions laid down for submission of offers detailed in
the preceding paras, are completely and correctly fulfilled. Tenders, which are not complete
in all respects as stipulated above, may be summarily rejected.

21 CHECK LIST

A check list has been included in Section – V of the bid document. This has been designed
to help the Tenderers in submitting their offer in completeness. An incomplete offer is liable
to be rejected. The Tenderers must fill this Check List and submit along with their offer in
their own interest.

*********

13 of 194
 SECTION – III
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

14 of 194
 SECTION III
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1.0 DEFINITIONS

1.1 „Client’ means Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Limited, acting through the General Manager
(C) and shall include their legal representatives, successors and permitted assignees.
1.2 „Contractor’ shall mean the Bidder/ Tenderer whose bid has been accepted by the Client
for the “BEAUTIFICATION OF ANCIENT MAHSU DEVTA TEMPLE AT BHANKOLI VILLAGE DISTT
UTTARKASHI UTTARAKHAND” and award of work is placed and shall include his legal
representatives, successors and permitted assigns unless excluded by the terms of the
contract.
1.3 „Contract’ means Contract entered into between the Client & the Contractor/Supplier
through Letter of Award, together with the contract documents referred to therein, they shall
include Letter of Award, Bid Invitation, Instructions to Tenderers, Conditions of Contract,
Technical Specification, and the other conditions specified in the Advance Acceptance &
Letter of Intent (LOI) and a formal agreement, if executed.
1.4 The ‘Site’ shall mean the land and/or other places on, into or through which work is to be
executed under the contract or any adjacent land, path or street which may be allotted or
used for the purpose of carrying out contract.
.

2.0 Bidder should submit Scheduled Bar Chart and Work Plan at the time of agreement

3.0 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

1) Water & Electricity should be arranged by contractor during the construction of work.
2) Quantities given in the schedule 'B' may be deleted or varied widely without entitling the
contractor for any compensation in this respect.
3) All works shall be carried out strictly as per detailed drawings, design and specification.
4) Tax shall be deducted from gross amount of the bill as per Government of Uttarakhand
norms.
5) Security shall be deducted as per GPW form 9
6) All the Terms & Conditions governed by as per GPW form 9 & Modified clause no. 32
7) If any store provided to contractor by the department should be deducted from
contractor bill.
8) If any recovery to be proposed by Technical committee of department / Uttarakhand
government due to poor quality, should be deducted from contractor bill and such
damages during enquiry in the construction work should be rectified by contractor.

15 of 194
4.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES : As per GPW form 9

5.00 JURISDICTION
The contract shall in all respects construe and operative in conformity with Indian Law and
subject to the Jurisdiction of Courts at Dehradun (Uttarakhand) in India.

6.00 REMOVAL OF REJECTED STORES/ SITE CLEARANCE

6.1 On rejection of any stores submitted for inspection at a place other than the premises of the
Contractor, such stores shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost subject as herein
after stipulated, within 15 days of the date of intimation of such rejection.
6.2 All rejected stores shall in any event and circumstances remain and always are at the risk of the
Contractor immediately on such rejection. If such stores are not removed by the Contractor
within the period aforementioned, the Inspector/Inspecting Agency may remove the rejected
stores and either return the same to the Contractor at his risk and cost by such mode of
transport as the Client or Inspector may decide, or dispose of such stores at the Contractor‟s
risk and on his account and retain such portion of the proceeds, if any, from such disposal as
may be necessary to recover any expense incurred in connection with such disposals (or any
price refundable as a consequence of such rejection). The Client shall, in addition, be entitled to
recover from the Contractor handling and storage charges on the rejected stores after the
expiry of the time-limit.

7.00 QUANTITY VARIATION

The Client reserves the right to increase or decrease the quantity offered by the successful
Bidders at the rates & other terms and conditions offered by them. The Bidders are bound to
accept the increase or decrease in the quantity under this clause at the time of placement of
contract or during the currency of the contract. While operating this clause the quantity shall be
rounded off to the nearest whole number.

*********

16 of 194
 SECTION – IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

17 of 194
 SECTION IV

SPECIFICATION FOR BEAUTIFICATION OF ANCIENT MAHSU DEVTA TEMPLE AT

BHANKOLI VILLAGE DISTT UTTARKASHI UTTARAKHAND

All the works shall be carried out as per CPWD and Uttarakhand PWD detailed
Specifications or as per given in Bill of quantity.

A. General
1. Reference mentioned herein shall be applicable to all sub-sections of this Section on
Specifications to the extent the context permits and are intended to supplement the
provisions in the particular sub-section. In case of any discrepancy/deviation, the
provisions in the particular sub-section shall take precedence.
2. The rates for all items of work unless clearly specified otherwise shall include cost of
all labor, materials and other inputs involved, complete and as required to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge as applicable in the execution of the items.
3. The Engineer-In-Charge when delegated, shall be the sole deciding authority as to
the meaning, interpretation and implications for various provisions of the
specifications.

Wherever any reference is made to any Indian Standard [e.g. Codes / Standards /
Manuals of Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS/Indian Standard-IS Code), Indian Roads
Congress (IRC), Ministry of Road Transport & Highways (MOR&TH), etc.] it shall be
taken as reference to the latest edition with all amendments issued thereto or
revisions thereof if any, up to the date of submission of bid. In the event of any
variation between the Specifications the DSR- 2016 shall prevail.

4. Reference to the CPWD Specifications (2009 or latest applicable currently, and

as amended from time to time) and the Indian Standard Codes (latest and as
amended from time to time), the former shall take precedence over the latter. For
any item variation, as felt required, and not covered under the provisions CPWD
Specifications, then the variations if to be executed would be estimated for analysis of
rate at the market rates as per its product specifications and execution requirements,
and finalized under the technical guidance and directions of the Engineer-In-Charge
with due approval of the concerned approving authority, prior to execution of such an
item variation.
5. The Work shall be carried out in accordance with architectural drawings and
structural drawings, to be issued by the Engineer-In-Charge as applicable. The
structural and architectural drawings shall have to be properly co-related before
executing the Work, and in case of any difference noticed between architectural and
structural drawings, final decision, in writing of the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
obtained by the Contractor. The Work shall include the sequence of work activities
from clearing the site/leveling/grading/slope stabilization if any, as required to
complete the site development prior to start of construction activities, and correctly
laying out the structural footprint, all construction activities thereafter, commissioning
and handover of the completed Work to the Employer. For items where so required,
samples shall be prepared before starting the particular items of Work for the prior
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge and nothing extra shall be payable on this
account.
6. Site:

18 of 194
 The „Site‟ shall mean the land/or other places on, in, into or through which the Work is
to be executed under the Contract or any adjacent land, path/trek trail or street
through which the Work is to be executed under the Contract, or any adjacent land,
path/trek trail or street which may be allotted or used for the purpose of carrying out
the Contract.
7. Store:
The „Store‟ shall mean the place of issue of materials included in the appropriate
schedule of a contract for issue by the GMVN as applicable. In all other cases „Store‟
shall mean any GMVN store as applicable in the district as applicable.
8. Best:
The word „best‟ when used shall mean that in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge
as applicable, there is no superior material/ article and workmanship obtainable in the
market and trade respectively. As far as possible the standard required shall be
specified in preference to the word „best.‟
9. Department:
The „Department‟ shall mean GMVN, as applicable.
10. Floors and Levels:
a. Building:
(i) Floor 1 is the lowest floor above the ground level in the building unless otherwise
specified in a particular case. The floors above floor 1 shall be numbered in sequence
as floor 2 level. The number shall increase upwards.
(ii) Floor level: For floor 1, top level of finished floor shall be the floor level and for all
other floors above floor 1, top level of the structural slabs shall be the floor level.
(ii) Plinth level: Floor 1 level or 1.2 m above the ground level whichever is lower shall be
the plinth level.
b. Special Structures:
i. For structures like fencing, retaining walls, wing walls, chimneys, overhead reservoirs/
tanks and other elevated structures, where elevations / heights above a defined
datum level have not been specified and identification of floors cannot be done as in
case of building. Level, at 1.2 m above the ground level shall be the floor 1 level as
well as plinth level. Level at a height of 3.5 m above floor 1 level will be reckoned as
floor 2 levels and level at a height of 3.5 m above the floor 2 level. Where the total
height above floor 1 level is not a whole number multiple of 3.5 meters. Top most
floor level shall be the next in sequence to the floor level below even if the difference
in height between the two upper most floor levels is less than 3.5 meters.
11. Foundation and Plinth:
The work in foundation and plinth shall include:
For buildings: All works upto 1.2 meters above ground level or upto floor 1 level
whichever is lower.
For abutments, piers and well staining: all works upto 1.2 m above the bed level.
(a) For retaining wall, wing walls, compound walls, chimneys, overhead reservoirs/ tanks
and other elevated structures: All works upto 1.2 meter above the ground level.
For reservoirs / tanks (other than overhead reservoirs/ tanks): All works upto 1.2
meters above the ground level.

19 of 194
(b) For basements: All works upto 1.2 m above ground level or upto floor 1 level
whichever is lower.
Note: Specific provision shall be made in the estimate for such situations where the
foundation level is more than 3 (three) meters depth from the plinth for all types of
structures mentioned above.
12. Measurements:
a. In booking dimensions, the order shall be consistent and in the sequence of length,
width and height or depth or thickness. The Work shall be executed, measured, and
quantity arrived at as per the metric dimension given in the Schedule / Bill of
Quantities (BOQ), Drawings etc.
b. Rounding off: Rounding off where required shall be done in accordance with IS: 2-
1960. The number of significant places rounded in the rounded off value should be as
specified.
13. Materials:
a. Samples of all materials to be used on the Work shall be got approved by the
Contractor from the Engineer-In-Charge as applicable well in time. The approved
samples duly authenticated and sealed shall be kept in the custody of the Engineer-
In-Charge till the completion of the Work. All materials to be provided by the
Contractor shall be brand new and as per the samples approved by the Engineer-In-
Charge Materials obtained by the Contractor from the sources approved by the
Department shall be subjected to the Mandatory tests. Where such materials do not
conform to the relevant specifications, the matter shall be taken up by the Engineer-
In-Charge as applicable for appropriate action against the defaulters. In all such
cases, necessary documents in original and proof of payment relating to the
procurement of materials shall be made available by the Contractor to the Engineer-
In-Charge.
b. Samples, whether submitted for approval to govern bulk supplies or required for
testing before use and also the sample of materials bearing „Standard Mark,‟ if
required for testing, shall be provided free of cost by the Contractor. All other
incidental expenditure to be incurred for testing of samples e.g. packaging, sealing,
transportation, loading, unloading etc. to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge shall
be borne by the Contractor.
c. The materials, supplied by the Department, if any shall be deemed to be complying
with the specifications.
d. Materials stored at site, depending upon the individual characteristics, shall be
protected from atmospheric effects due to rain, sun, wind and moisture to avoid
deterioration.
e. Materials like timber, paints etc. shall be stored in such a way that there may not be
any possibility of fire hazards. Inflammable materials and explosives shall be stored in
accordance with the relevant rules and regulations or as approved by Engineer-In-
Charge as applicable in writing so as to ensure desired safety during storage.
14. Safety in Construction:
a. The Contractor shall employ only such methods of construction, tools and plant as
are appropriate for the type of work or as approved by Engineer-In-Charge as
applicable in writing.
b. The Contractor shall take all precautions and measures to ensure safety of works and
workman and shall be fully responsible for the same. Safety pertaining to construction
works such as excavation, centring and shuttering, trenching, blasting if any,
demolition, electric connections, scaffolds, ladders, working platforms, gangway,

20 of 194
 mixing of bituminous materials, electric and gas welding, use of hoisting and
construction machinery shall be governed by UTTARAKHAND PWD Safety Code,
relevant other safety codes/safety provisions of Government like CPWD and/or,
Indian Standard Safety Code and/or National Building Code, and the direction of
Engineer-In-Charge as applicable.
15. Time is essence of the Contract, more so as for the construction activities
in this mountainous region the construction window/period is limited due to climate,
and the required benefits for the stakeholders involved, of such construction have to
be achieved in time.
16. An Indicative List of Codes
An indicative list of IS Codes published by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), and IRC
codes to be followed are as under, unless otherwise specified in the work item in
technical specifications.

S.
Material / Work Type IS/IRC Code IS/IRC Code Name
No.
1 Anti-termite Measures IS: 6313-1981 Code of practice for anti-termite measures in
(Part 1) buildings: Part 1 Constructional measures
Code of Practice for Anti-Termite Measures in
IS: 6313-2013
Buildings - Part 2 : Pre-constructional Chemical
(Part 2)
Treatment Measures
Code of Practice for Anti-termite Measures in
IS: 6313-2013
Buildings - Part 3 Treatment for Existing
(Part 3)
Buildings
2 Earth Work IS: 1498-1970 Classification and identification of soils for
general engineering purposes
IS: 3764-1992 Safety code for excavation work
3 Form Work IS: 1730-1989 Dimensions for steel plates, sheets strips and
flats for general engineering purposes
IS: 808-1989 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam,
Column, Channel and Angle Sections
IS: 723-1972 Specification for Steel Countersunk Head Wire
Nails
4 Aggregates IS: 383-1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates
from natural sources for concrete
5 Concrete Works IS: 456-2000 Plain and Reinforced Concrete - Code of
Practice
IS: 516-1959 Method of tests for strength of concrete
IS: 1199-1959 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS: 2386-1963 Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete -
(Part 1) Part 1: Particle Size and Shape
IS: 2386-1963 Methods of test for Aggregates for Concrete -
(Part 2) Part 2: Estimation of deleterious materials and
organic impurities
IS: 2386-1963 Methods of test for Aggregates for Concrete -
(Part 3) Part 3: Specific gravity, density, voids,
absorption and bulking
IS: 2386-1963 Methods of test for Aggregates for Concrete -
(Part 4) Part 4: Mechanical properties
IS: 2645-2003 Integral Waterproofing Compounds for Cement
Mortar and Concrete – Specification

21 of 194
S.
Material / Work Type IS/IRC Code IS/IRC Code Name
No.
IS: 3812-2003 Pulverized Fuel Ash - Specification - Part 1:
(Part 1) For Use as Pozzolana in Cement, Cement
Mortar and Concrete
IS: 3812-2003 Pulverized Fuel Ash - Specification - Part 2:
(Part 2) For Use as Admixture in Cement Mortar and
Concrete
6 Ordinary Portland IS: 269-1989 Specification for 33 grade Ordinary Portland
Cement (OPC) for Cement
Masonry and PCC works IS: 455-1989 Specification for Portland Slag Cement
IS: 8112-1989 Specification for 43 grade Ordinary Portland
Cement
7 Ordinary Portland IS: 12269-1987 Specification for 53 grade Ordinary Portland
Cement (OPC) for RCC Cement
works
8 Portland Pozzolana IS: 1489-1991 Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement
Cement (PPC) for other (relevant parts)
concrete work
9 MS bars and wires IS: 280-2006 Mild Steel Wire for General Engineering
Purposes
IS: 432-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile
(Part 1) steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement–Mild steel and
medium tensile steel bars
IS: 432-1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile
(Part 2) steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for
concrete reinforcement–Hard-drawn steel wire
10 Reinforcement Steel – IS: 1786-2008 High strength deformed steel bars and wires
Tor Steel (cold twisted for concrete reinforcement – Specification
deformed bars)
11 Stone Work IS: 1121-1974 Methods of test for determination of strength
(Part 1 to 4) properties of natural building stones: Part 1 -
Compressive strength, Part 2 - Transverse
Strength, Part 3 - Tensile Strength, Part 4 -
Shear strength
IS: 1122-1974 Method of test for determination of true specific
gravity of natural building stones
IS: 1123-1975 Method of identification of natural building
stones
IS: 1124-1974 Method of test for determination of water
absorption, apparent specific gravity and
porosity of natural building stones
IS: 1125-1974 Method of test for determination of weathering
of natural building stones
IS: 1126-1974 Method of test for determination of durability of
natural building stones
IS: 1127-1970 Recommendations for dimensions and
workmanship of natural building stones for
masonry work
IS: 1129-1972 Recommendation for dressing of natural
building stones

22 of 194
S.
Material / Work Type IS/IRC Code IS/IRC Code Name
No.
IS: 1597-1992 Construction of Stone Masonry - Code of
(Part 1 to 2) Practice: Part 1 - Rubble Stone Masonry, Part
2 - Ashlar masonry
IS: 1805-1973 Glossary of terms relating to stones, quarrying
and dressing
IS: 4101-1967 Code of practice for External Facings and
(Part 1) Veneers: Part 1 - Stone facing
IS: 4101-1967 Code of Practice for External Cladding: Part 3
(Part 3) - Wall Tiling and Mosaics
12 Brick Work IS: 1077-1992 Common burnt clay building bricks –
Specification
IS: 2212-1991 Code of practice for brickworks
IS: 3495-1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks:
(Part 1 to 4) Part 1 - Determination of compressive strength,
Part 2 - Determination of water absorption, Part
3 - Determination of efflorescence, Part 4 -
Determination of warpage
IS: 5454-1978 Methods of sampling of clay building bricks
13 Structural Steel IS: 226-1975 Structural steel (Standard quality)
14 Welding Steel Work IS: 814-2004 Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc
Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese
Steel – Specification
IS: 822-1970 Code of Procedure for inspect of welds
15 PVC Door Work IS: 4020-1998 Door Shutters - Methods of Tests
(relevant parts)
IS: 10151-1982 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and
its Copolymers for its Safe Use in Contact with
Foodstuffs, Pharmaceuticals and Drinking
Water
IS: 14182-1994 Solvent cement for use with unplasticized
polyvinylchloride plastic pipe and fittings
16 Flooring, Skirting & Dado IS: 777-1988 Glazed earthenware wall tiles
Work IS: 2571-1970 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement
concrete flooring
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic tiles – Methods of Test Part 1
(Part 1) Determination of Dimensions and Surface
Quality
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 2
(Part 2) Determination of Water Absorption (see IS
13630: Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 3
(Part 3) Determination of moisture expansion using
boiling water - Unglazed tiles (see IS 13630 :
Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 4
(Part 4) Determination of linear thermal expansion (see
IS 13630 : Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 5
(Part 5) Determination of resistance to thermal shock

23 of 194
S.
Material / Work Type IS/IRC Code IS/IRC Code Name
No.
(see IS 13630 : Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 6
(Part 6) Determination of modulus of rupture (see IS
13630 : Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 8
(Part 8) Determination of chemical resistance - Glazed
tiles (see IS 13630 : Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 9
(Part 9) Determination of crazing resistance - Glazed
tiles (see IS 13630 : Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of test Part 10
(Part 10) Determination of frost resistance (see IS
13630: Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – methods of test Part 11
(Part 11) Determination of resistance to surface abrasion
- Glazed tiles (see IS 13630: Parts 1 to 15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 13
(Part 13) Determination of scratch hardness of surface
according to Mohs (see IS 13630: Parts 1 to
15)
IS: 13630-2006 Ceramic Tiles – Methods of Test Part 14
(Part 14) Impact Resistance
IS: 15622-2006 Pressed ceramic tiles
17 Plastering and IS: 1630-1984 Specification for mason's tools for plaster work
Distempering Work and pointing work
IS: 1635-1992 Code of practice for field slaking of building
lime and preparation of putty
IS: 2402-1963 Code of Practice for External Rendered
Finishes
IS: 428-2000 Washable Distemper - Specification
18 Door Fittings IS: 1341-1992 Steel butt hinges - Specification
IS: 208-1996 Door handles - Specification
IS: 281-2009 Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts for use with
Padlocks - Specification
IS: 1823-1980 Specification for floor door stoppers
IS: 2681-1993 Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops)
for with padlocks - Specification
IS: 3400-2004 Methods of Test for Vulcanized Rubber - Part 2
(Part 2) : Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic -
Determination of Hardness (Hardness Between
10 IRHD and 100 IRHD)
IS: 3400-2004 Methods of Test for Vulcanized Rubber - Part 9
(Part 9) : Rubber, Vulcanized - Determination of
Density
IS: 4905-1968 Methods for random sampling
IS: 733-1983 Specification for Wrought Aluminium and
Aluminium Alloy Bars, Rods and Sections (for
General Engineering Purposes)
IS: 1868-1996 Anodic Coatings on Aluminium and its Alloys –

24 of 194
S.
Material / Work Type IS/IRC Code IS/IRC Code Name
No.
Specification
19 Painting Work IS: 57-1989 Red Lead for Paints and Other Purposes –
Specification
IS: 75-1973 Specification for Linseed Oil, Raw and Refined
IS: 77-1976 Specification for Linseed Oil, Boiled, for Paints
IS: 110-1983 Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for
enamels for use over primers
IS: 290-1961 Coal tar black paint
IS: 324-1959 Specification for Ordinary Denatured Spirit
IS: 384-2002 Brushes, Paints and Varnishes, Flat –
Specification
IS: 426-1961 Paste filler for colour coats
IS: 486-1983 Specification for Brushes, Sash Tool, for Paints
and Varnishes
IS: 487-1997 Brushes, Paint and Varnish - (i) Oval, Ferrule
Bound; and (ii) Round, Ferrule Bound
IS: 533-2007 Gum spirit of turpentine (oil of turpentine) –
Specification
IS: 1459-1974 Specification for kerosene
IS: 2333-1992 Plaster of Paris for ceramic industry
IS: 2395-1994 Painting of Concrete, Masonry and Plaster
(Part 1) Surfaces - Code of Practice: Part 1 -
Operations and Workmanship
IS: 2395-1994 Painting of Concrete, Masonry and Plaster
(Part 2) Surfaces - Code of Practice: Part 2 –
Schedules
IS: 2932-2003 Enamel, Synthetic, Exterior : (a) Undercoating
(b) Finishing - Specification
IS: 2933-1975 Enamel exterior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing
IS: 5410-1992 Cement paint
20 Building measurement IS: 2-1960 Rules for Rounding off Numerical Values
methods IS: 1200 Measure of method of building and civil
(relevant parts) engineering works
SP: 27-1987 Handbook on method of measurement of
building works

B. Technical Specifications for Civil Works

Note: Whenever required during the execution, the amendments issued for respective of CPWD
Specifications, 2009-based DELHI SCHEDULE OF RATES (DSR) for Building Works as
amended from time to time, as applicable shall supersede the current specifications given in
the bid document. For Civil Works specifications adopted of specifications from CPWD
Specifications, 2009 (Vol. 1 or 2 as applicable as amended from time to time) or specifications
from market for the non-schedule items in the said sequence of preference for specifications
shall be followed.

25 of 194
1. EXCAVATION
1.1 General
All excavations shall be carried out in conformity with directions laid herein under and in a
manner approved by the Engineer. The work shall be done that the suitable materials
available from excavation are satisfactorily utilized as decided upon beforehand.
While planning or executing excavations, the Contractor shall take all adequate precautions
against soil erosion, water pollution etc.
The excavations shall conform to the lines, grades, side slopes and levels shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not excavate outside the
slopes or below the established grades or loosen any material outside the limits of
excavation. Subject to the permitted tolerances, any excess depth excavated below the
specified levels on the roadway shall be made good at the cost of the Contractor with
suitable material of similar characteristics to that removed and compacted to the
requirements of ISI Specifications.
All debris and loose material on the slopes of cuttings shall be removed. No backfilling shall
be allowed to obtain required slopes excepting that when boulders or soft materials are
encountered in cut slopes these shall be excavated to approved depth on instructions of the
Engineer and the resulting cavities filled with suitable material and thoroughly compacted in
an approved manner.
Roadway and drain excavation shall consist of excavation, removal and satisfactory
disposal of all materials necessary for the construction of road-way, side ditches and
waterways, in accordance with the requirements of these specification and the lines, grades
and cross-sections shown in the drawings or indicated by the Engineer. This work shall
include the hauling and stacking of or hauling to sites of embankment construction, of
suitable cut materials as required, as also the disposal of unsuitable cut materials in
specified manner and the trimming and finishing of the roadway.
The classification of earth work shall be done by the Engineer and the intermediate
classification like Pick work-Jumper Work (P.J) ./ Jumper Work-Blasting Work (J.B.) / Pick
Work-Jumper Work-Blasting Work (P.J.B.) etc. shall be paid proportionately.
All excavation shall be done as per the profile indicated by the Engineer.
Excavation shall be carried out to the required lines and levels, widths and depths, so that
dimensions of the permanent work shall not be less than what is indicated.
The whole of the excavated material shall be brought to the surface and disposed-off as
directed.
Selected and approved excavated stuff required for filling etc. shall be kept separated for
reuse as directed.
The phasing and method of excavations for all foundation and earthwork shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.
No permanent construction shall be started over the excavated surface until and unless
approved by the Engineer.
Excavations taken wider or deeper than required to contain the permanent work shall be
filled in at the Contractor's expense. (However, exceptions may be specially permitted in
certain situations as indicated here-in-after).
Excavations taken wider than required shall be filled back with selected material thoroughly
compacted in layers of 150 mm thickness.
Back filling of wrongly excavated trenches shall be done with lean cement concrete or other
material if so indicated under the respective situations, described in subsequent paragraphs
of this specification, so as to bring it back to the appropriate section.
1.2 Classification of Excavated Material
All materials used in excavation shall be classified by the Engineer in the following groups.

1.2.1 Ordinary Soil

This shall comprise vegetable or organic soil, turf, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat, black
cotton soil, soft shale or loose moorum, a mixture of these and similar materials which yields
to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, rake phawrahs or other ordinary digging
implement. Removal of gravel or any other nodular material having diameter in anyone
direction not exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata shall be deemed to be covered
under this category. Generally this type of soil has dry bulk density less than 1.6 gm/cc.

26 of 194
1.2.2 Hard Soil
Any soil which generally requires the close application of picks or jumpers or scarifiers to
loosen it. Stiff Clay, Gravel and Cobble Stone etc. fall under this category. This shall include:
i) Stiff heavy clay, hard shale, or compact moorum requiring grafting tool or pick or both
and shovel, closely applied;
ii) Gravel and cobble stone having 'maximum diameter in any one direction between 75
and 300 mm;
iii) Soling of roads, paths etc., and hard core;
iv) Macadam surfaces such as water bound, and bitumen/tar bound;
v) Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime mortar and brick work in lime/cement mortar,
below ground level;
vi) Soft conglomerate, where the stones may be detached from the matrix with picks;
and
vii) generally any material which requires the close application of picks, or scarifiers to
loosen and not affording resistance to digging greater than the hardest of any soil
mentioned in (i) to (vi) above.
Generally such type of soil has bulk density 1.6 gm/cc and above except Sandy soils.
1.2.3 Ordinary Rock (not requiring blasting)
This shall include:
i) Limestone, sandstone, laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock
which may be quarried or split with crowbars;
ii) Unreinforced cement concrete which may be broken up with crowbars or picks and
stone masonry in cement mortar below ground level;
iii) Boulders which do not require blasting. having maximum diameter in any direction of
more than 300 mm, found lying loose on the surface or embedded in river bed soil,
talus, slope wash and terrace material of dissimilar origin; and
iv) Any rock which in dry state may be hard. Requiring blasting, but which when wet
becomes soft and manageable by means other than blasting.
1.2.4 Hard Rock (requiring blasting)
This shall comprise:
i) any rock or cement concrete for the excavation of, which the use of mechanical plant
or blasting is required;
ii) reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement cut through but not separated from the
concrete) below ground level; and
iii) Boulders requiring blasting.
1.2.5 Hard Rock (blasting prohibited)
Hard Rock requiring blasting as described under Clause 2.2.1 (d) below but where blasting
is prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiselling, wedging or
any other agreed method.
1.2.6 Marshy Soil
This shall include soils excavated below the original ground level of marshes and swamps
and soils excavated from other areas requiring continuous pumping or bailing out of water.
1.3 Authority for Classification
The classification of excavation shall be decided by the Engineer and his decision shall be
final and binding on the Contractor. Merely the use of explosives in excavation will not be
considered as a reason for higher classification unless blasting is clearly necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer.
1.3.1 Spade Work
In case of Spade Work the application of spade/phawrah, rake etc., is required. Blasting is
not required under this work.
1.3.2 Pick Work
In case of Pick Work the application of pick axes, shovels, etc. is required. Blasting is not
required for this work.

1.3.3 Jumper Work

In case of Jumper Work application of crowbars, pick axes etc. is required. The Jumper
Work also requires mild blasting work. The rates for the explosives such as Special Gelatin
80%, Detonators, Safety fuse coil and labour such as Driller, Blaster and Beldars have been

27 of 194
 included in the rate of Jumper Work. The rates for the drilling equipment have also been
included.
1.3.4 Chiselling/Wedging out of Rock
Where the blasting is prohibited and soft or hard rock is to be removed the chiselling has to
be resorted to. Chiselling may be done in soft rock or hard for which different rates are
applicable. The excavation has to be done by Chiselling/Wedging or by any other suitable
method. The rates for Chiseller/Breaker, Black Smith and Beldars have been included in the
case of the Chiselling of Soft Rock as well as that of Hard Rock.
1.4 Construction Operations
1.4.1 Setting out
After the site has been cleared, the limits of excavation shall be set out true to lines, curves,
slopes, grades and sections as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall provide all labour, survey instruments and materials such as strings, pegs,
nails bamboos, stones, lime, mortar, concrete, etc., required in connection with the setting
out of works and the establishment of bench marks. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the maintenance of bench marks and other marks and stakes as long as in the opinion of
the Engineer they are required for the work.
1.4.2 Stripping and Storing top Soil
When so directed by the Engineer, the top soil existing over the sites of excavation shall be
stripped to specified depths and stored at designated locations for reuse in covering
embankment slopes, cut slopes, berms and other disturbed areas where re-vegetation is
desired.
1.4.3 Rock Excavation
Rock, when encountered in roadway excavation, shall be removed upto the sub grade level
or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. Where, however, unstable shales or other similar
materials are intersected at the subgrade level, these shall be excavated to the extent of
500 mm below the subgrade level or as otherwise specified. In all cases, the excavation
operations shall be carried out that at no point on cut formation the rock protrudes above the
specified levels, provided, however, that a negative tolerance of 150 mm shall be
permissible.
Where excavation is done to levels lower than those specified, the excess excavation shall
be made good by hand packing with rubble and chips to the designated level and
compacting to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Slopes in the rock cutting shall be finished to uniform lines corresponding to slope lines
shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. Notwithstanding the foregoing all
loose pieces of rock on excavated slope surface which move when prised by a crowbar shall
be removed.
1.4.4 Marsh Excavation
The excavation of marches/swamps shall be carried out as per programme laid down by the
Engineer.
Excavation of marshes shall begin at one end and proceed in one direction across the entire
marsh immediately ahead of back-filling. The method and sequence of excavating and back
filling shall be such as to assure, to the extent practicable, the complete removal or
displacement of all muck from within the lateral limits called for on the drawings or as stated
by the Engineer, and to the bottom of the marsh, firm support or levels indicated.
1.4.5 Excavation of road shoulders for widening of pavement
In works involving of existing pavements unless otherwise specified, the shoulders shall be
removed to their full width and to levels shown on the drawings or as indicated by the
Engineer. While doing so, care shall be taken to see that no portion of the existing pavement
designated to be retained is loosened or disturbed.
1.4.6 Dewatering
If water is met within the excavations due to springs, seepage, rain or other causes, it shall
be removed by suitable diversions, pumping or bailing out and the excavation kept dry
whenever so required or directed by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to so discharge the
drained water as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property.
1.4.7 Disposal of excavated materials
All the excavated materials shall be the property of the Government. The operations shall be
so arranged that the capacity of cutting, haulage and compaction is nearly the same.

28 of 194
 All hard materials, such as hard moorum, rubble etc. not intended for use in the bank, shall
be stacked neatly on Government land as directed by the Engineer, within the lead specified
for the item, for future use such as pitching. Unsuitable and surplus materials not intended
for use in any part of the road shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
1.5 Useful Materials and Finds
Any useful material obtained from the excavation shall be stacked separately in regular
stacks as directed by the Engineer and shall remain the property of the Government. Any
finds such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other articles of value shall delivered to the
Engineer and shall also remain the property of the Government.
1.6 Earthwork for Levelling the Area
1.6.1 Setting out and making profiles
1.6.1.1 Masonry pillars will erected at suitable points in the area to serve as bench marks for the
execution of the work. These bench marks shall be connected with G.T.S or any other
bench mark approved by the Engineer. Necessary profile with pegs, bamboos and strings of
"Burjis" shall be made to show the correct formation levels before the work is started. The
Contractor shall supply labour and materials for setting out and making profiles and "Burjis"
for the work at his own cost. The profiles and "Burjis" shall also be maintained by him during
the execution of work.
1.6.1.2 The ground levels shall be taken at 5 to 15 meters intervals in level on uniformly sloping
ground and, at closer intervals where local, mounds pits or undulations are met with, as
directed by the Engineer. The ground levels shall be recorded in field books and plotted on a
plan, which shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer before earth work is started
and labour required for taking levels shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.

1.6.2 Rough Excavation

1.6.2.1 Excavation not requiring dressing of sides and bottom and reduction to exact levels, such as
winning earth from borrow pits, hill side cutting etc. shall be described as "Rough
Excavation" and given in cubic meters.

1.6.3 Cutting and Filling

1.6.3.1 Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. Under-mining or under-cutting shall not be
allowed. The earth from cutting shall be directly used for filling and no claim of double
handling of earth shall be entertained. Filling shall be done in regular layers, each layer not
exceeding 20 cms in depth. The earth used for filling shall be free from all roots, grass and
rubbish and all lumps and clods exceeding 8 cms in any direction shall be broken down.
Each layer shall be consolidated by breaking clods and ramming. Watering shall be done, if
so stipulated and as required. The top surface of the finally finished area shall be neatly
dressed.

1.6.3.2 Where consolidation of filling or banking is specified each layer of earth shall be adequately
watered to aid compaction. It shall then be rolled with roller of minimum half-tonne weight
not less than five times till it gets evenly and densely consolidated. Where roller cannot
work, the earth shall be consolidated with wooden or steel rammers of seven to ten
kilograms weight having a base of 20 cms square of 20 cms diameter. The labour for
ramming shall be at least one rammer to six diggers. Every third layer of earth and the
topmost layer shall be well consolidated with power roller of minimum eight tonne weight,
not less than five times till the soil behaves as an elastic material and gets compressed
under the load of roller. Before placing the next layer, the surface of the under layer shall be
moistened and scarified with pick axes or spades, so as to provide a satisfactory bond with
the next layer. The top surface of the finally finished area shall be neatly dressed.

1.6.3.3 All cutting shall be done to the required levels. Should cutting be taken deeper, such extra
excavation shall not be measured for payment. Further the bottom of excavation shall be
brought to required levels by filling in with suitable earth duly consolidated at the
Contractor‟s cost. However in case of hard rock. Where blasting operations have been
resorted to, cutting shall be measured to the actual levels, provided the Engineer is satisfied
that the Contractor has not gone deeper than what was unavoidable.

29 of 194
1.6.3.4 The finished formation levels, in case of filing shall be kept higher than the required levels by
making and allowance of 10% of depth of filing for future settlement in case of ordinary
consolidated fills and 5% in case where the consolidation is done by heavy mechanical
means.
1.6.3.5 During the execution of work, the natural drainage of the area shall be maintained by the
Contractor.
1.7 Plying of Construction Traffic
Construction traffic shall not use the cut formation without the prior permission of the
Engineer. Any damage arising out of such use shall be made good by the Contractor at his
own expense.
1.8 Preservation of Property
The Contractor shall undertake all reasonable precautions for the protection and
preservation of any or all existing roadside trees, drains, sewers to other sub-surface drains,
pipes, conduits and any of the structure under or above ground, which may be affected by
construction operations and which in the opinion of the Engineer shall be continued in use
without any change. Safeguards taken by the Contractor in this respect, shall be got
approved by him from the Engineer. However, if any of these objects is damaged by reason
of the Contractor‟s negligence, it shall be replaced or restored to the· original condition at his
expense.
1.9 Measurements for Payments
Roadway and drain excavation shall be measured by taking cross-sections at suitable
intervals in the original position before the work starts and after its completion and
computing the volumes in cubic meters by the method of average end area. Where it is not
feasible to compute volumes by this method because of erratic location of isolated deposits)
the volumes shall be computed by other accepted methods.
At the option of the Engineer, the Contractor shall leave depth indicators during excavations
of such shape and size and in accurately as directed so as to indicate the original ground
level as accurately as possible. The Contractor shall see that these remain intact till the final
measurements are taken.
For rock excavation the overburden shall be removed first so that necessary cross section
could be taken for measurement. Where cross sectional measurements could not be taken
due to irregular configuration or where the rock is admixed with other classes of materials,
the volumes shall be computed as per the direction of Engineer.
The Lead and Lift shall be measured from the center of gravity of the excavated earth to that
of the placed earth, for such measurements the earth work proposed to be worked upon
shall be demarcated in sections economically for placement of Excavated Earth. The mean
lead and lift shall be Calculated Separately for such sections.
When earth has to be carried over a spoil bank and dumped beyond it, the mean lift would
be the difference in level between center of gravity of the excavated earth and top of the
spoil bank omitting the dowel.
The rates provided for additional leads are valid for distances upto 300 meters for disposals
done manually. However, the most economical mode i.e. manual (including the use of wheel
barrows), animal transport or mechanical transport shall be decided by the Engineer and
paid as such according to the relevant schedule of rates for manual, animal or mechanical
transport.
1.10 Rate
The rates for the items of excavation shall be paid for carrying out the required operations
as described for the individual items. These rates do not include the cost of pumping out of
water which shall normally be done departmentally. Whenever work is to be get done by
contract, the rate shall be settled before execution on the merits of the individual case. The
labour rates do not include the expenses on account of Compressor. The rates include all
labour, materials, tools, safe guards and incidentals necessary to complete the work to the
specifications within specified leads and lifts. Contractor‟s profit @ 10% and overhead
changes @ 5% have been included in the rate.

2. EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION, DRAINS, CHANNELS, PIPES AND CABLES

2.1 Description
Excavation for structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction of
foundations for bridges, culverts, retaining ,walls, headwalls, cut of walls, pipe culverts and

30 of 194
 other similar structures in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the
lines and dimensions shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer. The work
shall include construction of the necessary cofferdams and cribs and their subsequent
removal; all necessary sheeting, shoring, bracing, draining, and pumping; the removal of all
logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and obstructions necessary for placing the
foundations; trimming bottoms of excavations; backfilling and clearing up the site, and the
disposal of all surplus material.
2.2 Classification of Excavated Material
2.2.1 All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the Engineer in the following
groups:
(a) Ordinary Soil
This shall comprise vegetable or organic soil, turf, sand, silt, loam, clay, mud, peat,
black cotton soil, soft shale or loose moorum a mixture of these and similar material
which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, rake or other ordinary
digging implement. Removal of gravel or any other nodular material having diameter
in any one direction not exceeding 75 mm occurring in such strata shall be deemed to
be covered under this category.

(b) Hard Soil

This shall include:
i) stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact moorum requiring grafting tool or pick or
both and shovel, closely applied;
ii) gravel and cobble stone having maximum diameter in any one direction between
75 and 300 mm;
iii) soling of road, paths, .etc., and hard core;
iv) macadam surface such as water bound, and bitumen/tar bound;
v) lime concrete, stone masonry in lime mortar and brick work in lime/cement
mortar, below ground level;
vi) soft conglomerate, where the stones may be detached from the matrix with picks;
and
vii) generally any material which requires the close application of picks, or scarifiers
to loosen and not affording resistance to digging greater than the hardest of any
soil mentioned in (i) to (vi) above.
(c) Ordinary Rock (not requiring blasting)
This shall include:
(i) limestone, sandstone, laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated
rock which may be quarried or split with crowbars;
(ii) unreinforced cement concrete which may be broken up with crowbars or picks
and stone masonry in cement mortar below ground level;
(iii) boulders which do not require blasting having maximum diameter in any
direction of more than 300 mm, found lying loose on the surface or embedded in
river bed, soil, talus, slope wash and terrace material of dissimilar origin; and
(iv) Any rock which in dry state may be hard, requiring blasting,· but which when wet
becomes soft and manageable by means other than blasting.
(d) Hard Rock (requiring blasting)
This shall comprise:
(i) any rock or cement concrete for the excavation of which the use of mechanical
plant or blasting is required;
(ii) reinforced cement concrete (reinforcement cut through but not, separated from
the concrete) below ground level; and
(iii) boulders requiring blasting.
(iv) Hard Rock (blasting prohibited)
Hard rock requiring blasting as described under Clause 2.2.1 (d) above but where
blasting is prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by
chiselling wedging or any other agreed method.

(e) Marshy Soil

31 of 194
 This shall include soils excavated below the original ground level of marshes and
swamps and soils excavated from other areas requiring continuous pumping or
bailing out of water.
2.2.2 Authority for Classification
The classification of excavation shall be decided by the Engineer and his decision shall be
final and binding on the Contractor. Merely the use of explosives in excavation will not be
considered as a reason for higher classification unless blasting is clearly necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer.
2.3 Construction Operations
2.3.1 Setting Out
After the site has been cleared, the limits of excavation shall be set out true to lines, curves
and slopes.
2.3.2 Excavation
Excavation shall be taken to the width of the lowest step of the footing and the sides shall be
left plumb where the nature of soil allows it. Where the nature of soil or the depth of the
trench does not permit vertical sides, the Contractor at his own expense shall put necessary
shoring, strutting and planking or cut slopes to after angles/or both with due regard to the
safety of personnel and works and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall be as shown on the drawings,
unless the type of material encountered is such as to require changes, in which case the
depth shall be as ordered by the Engineer.
2.3.3 Dewatering and protection
Where water is met within excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs, rain or other
reasons, the Contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing, pumping,
constructing diversion channels, drainage channels, bunds, cofferdams and other necessary
works to keep the foundation trenches dry when so required and to protect the green
concrete/masonry against damage by erosion or sudden rising of water level. The methods
to be adopted in this regard and other details thereof shall be left to the choice of the
Contractor but subject to approval of the Engineer. Approval of the Engineer shall, however,
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy of dewatering and protection
arrangements and for the quality and safety of the works.
Where cofferdams are required, these shall be carried out to adequate depths and heights,
be safely designed and constructed and be made as watertight as is necessary for
facilitating construction to be carried out inside them. The interior dimensions of the
cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the construction and inspection
and to permit installation of pumping machinery, etc. inside the enclosed area.
Pumping from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to
preclude the possibility of the movement of water through any fresh concrete. No pumping
shall be permitted during the placing of concrete or for any period of at least 24 hours
thereafter, unless it is done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete work by a
watertight wall or other similar means.
At the discretion of the Contractor, cement grouting or other approved methods may be
used to prevent or reduce seepage and to protect the excavation area.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting channels and in discharging the
drained water as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property.
2.3.4 Preparation of foundation
The bottom of the foundation shall be levelled both longitudinally and transversely or
stepped as directed by the Engineer. Before footing is laid, the surface shall be slightly
watered and rammed. In the event of excavation having been made deeper than that shown
on the drawings or as otherwise ordered by the Engineer, the extra depth shall be made up
with concrete or masonry of the foundation grade at the cost of the Contractor. Ordinary
filling shall not be used for the purpose to bring the foundation to level.
When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be freed of all soft and loose material,
cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped or serrated as directed by the
Engineer. All seams shall be cleaned out and filled with cement mortar or grout to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be substantially completed
before beginning pile-driving operations therein. After pile driving operations in a given pit

32 of 194
 are completed; all loose and displaced materials therein shall be removed to the elevation of
the bottom of the footings.
2.3.5 Slips and blows
If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, these shall be removed by the Contractor at
his own cost.
2.3.6 Public safety
Near towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and foundation pits shall be
securely fenced, provided-with proper caution signs and marked with red lights at night to
avoid accidents. The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the
excavation operations do not affect or damage adjoining structures.
2.3.7 Backfilling
Backfilling shall be done with approved material after concrete or masonry is fully set and
carried out in such a way as not to cause undue thrust on any of the structure. All space
between foundation masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to the
original surface, making due allowance for settlement, in 200 mm loose layers, which shall
be watered and compacted.
2.3.8 Disposal of surplus excavated materials
Clause 1.4.7 above shall apply.
2.4 Precautions
All materials and labour required for fencing in and protecting against risk or accidents due
to open excavation shall be provided by the Contractor.
2.5 Pumping
The Contractor shall arrange bailing out water in the foundations or trenches accumulated
due to rains. The pumping out of water caused by springs, sub-soil water, canal or river
seepage, and broken water mains or drains for which the Contractor is not responsible shall
be arranged by the Department and the cost for the same is not included in the rate.
2.6 Rock Foundation
If rock foundation is secured, the excavation shall be done in such a manner as to allow the
rock to be exposed and prepared for receiving the concrete or masonry. All loose and
disintegrated rock or thin strata shall be stripped to a clean bed acceptable to the Engineer.
All seams or crevices shall be cleaned out and filled with concrete or mortar which shall be
paid for separately.
2.7 Completion
The Contractor shall report in writing the completion of the foundation trenches to the
Engineer, and no concrete or masonry may be commenced without that Officer's sanction in
writing.
2.8 Measurements
Excavation for structures shall be measured in cubic meters for each class of material
encountered, limited to the dimensions shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Excavation over increased width, cutting of slopes, shoring shuttering and
planking shall be deemed as convenience for the Contractor in executing the work and shall
not be measured and paid.
2.9 Rate
The rate includes all the operation as described in the items of work.

3. FILLING EXCAVATED EARTH IN FOUNDATION TRENCHES AND PLINTH OR UNDER

FLOORS AND SAND FILLING IN PLINTH
3.1 Excavation in Earth Work and Filling
3.1.1 General
For excavation, reference may be made to specifications in section 1 and 2 above. The
earth from cutting shall be directly used for filling and no claim for double handling of earth
shall be entertained. Filling shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not exceeding 15
cm. in depth. Normally, excavated earth from same area shall be used for filling.
3.1.2 Earth
The earth used for filling shall be free from salts, roots, grass, rubbish or other foreign and
organic matter. Lumps and clods exceeding 8 cms in any direction shall be broken or
removed.
3.1.3 Filling Sides of Trenches

33 of 194
 As soon as the work in foundation has been completed and measured, the sides of
foundations shall be cleared of all debris, brick-bats, mortar droppings etc., and filled with
earth in layers not exceeding 15 cms, each layer shall be adequately watered, rammed and
consolidated before the succeeding one is laid. Earth shall be rammed with iron rammers
where feasible, and with the butt ends crowbars where rammer cannot be used, No filling
shall be commenced without the permission of the Engineer which must be obtained in
writing.
3.1.4 Plinth filling i.e. Filling under Floors
The plinth shall be similarly filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cms adequately
watered and consolidated by ramming with iron or wooden rammer. When filling reaches the
finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry
and then rammed and consolidated in order to avoid any settlement at a later stage. The
finished level of filling shall be kept to slope intended to be given to the floor.
Where there is black cotton soil, this shall be removed to a depth of 60 cms as it is liable to
absorb moisture and thus ruin a floor.
3.1.5 Measurements
Depth of consolidated earth fillings shall be measured for the purpose of payment. The
dimensions of the filling shall be measured correct to the nearest cm and cubical contents
worked out in cubic meters correct to two places of decimal.
3.1.6 Rate
The rate includes cost of all operations described above. This includes the excavation in
earth work and filling in 15 cms layer, ramming, watering and consolidating upto a lead of 20
meters and lift upto 1.5 meters have been included in the rates. Water charges, contractor‟s
profit @ 10% and over-head charges @ 5% have also been included in the rates.
3.2 Filling in Plinth with Sand under Floors including Watering, Ramming, Consolidating and
Dressing Complete
3.2.1 Sand
Sand shall be clean and free from dust organic and foreign matter and corresponding to
grading Zone V or IV.
3.2.2 Filling
Sand filling shall be done in a manner similar to earth filling as specified in 3.1.4 above. The
surface of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to required level or slope. Concreting of
floor shall not be started till the Engineer has inspected and approved the sand filling.
3.2.3 Measurements
Volume of consolidated filling shall be measured. The dimensions shall be measured correct
to the nearest cm and cubical contents worked out in cubic meter correct to two places of
decimal.
3.2.4 Rate
The rate includes cost of materials and labour involved in all operations described above.
Carriage of material by mechanical transport upto one km and head load upto 100 mtrs has
been included in the rates. In addition to this, water charges, contractor's profit @ 10% and
over-head charges @ 5% have also been included in the rates.

4 LEAD, LIFT, AND SURFACE DRESSING

4.1 Lead
4.1.1 Lead shall be measured from the center of gravity of excavated earth. For measurements,
the earth work proposed to be worked upon shall be demarcated in sections economically
for placement of excavated earth. The mean lead shall be calculated separately for such
sections.
4.1.2 The extra rates are applicable in different type of works for a lead of 20 meters or part
thereof. The rates include contractor's profit @ 10% and overhead charge @ 5%.
4.2 Lift
4.2.1 The lift shall be measured from center of gravity of excavated earth to that of the placed
earth. For such measurements, the earth work proposed to be worked upon shall be
demarcated in sections economically for placement of excavated earth. The mean lift shall
be calculated separately for such sections.
4.2.2 For converting lift into horizontal lead, the lift up to 4 meters will be multiplied by 10 and from
above 4 meters to 6 meters, it will be squared and then multiplied by 3.25 and beyond 6
meters it will be multiplied by 20.

34 of 194
4.2.3 When earth has to be carried over a spoil bank and dumped beyond it, the mean lift would
be the difference in level between the center of gravity of the excavated earth and top of the
spoil bank omitting the dowel.
4.3 Dressing
4.3.1 Surface dressing shall include removing vegetation of cutting and filling up to depth of 25
cms. High portions of ground shall be cut down and, hollow and depression filled up to the
required level with the excavated earth so as to give an even, neat and tidy look to the site.
The cutting and filling shall be so balanced that no carriage of earth is involved either from
or the site in question.
4.4 Measurements
The area of the ground dressed shall be measured in sqm. Length and breadth shall be
measured correct to the nearest cm. Area shall be measured correct to two places of
decimals.
4.5 Rate
The rate includes cost of labour involved in all the operations described above. This also
includes 10% contractor's profit and 5% over-head charges.

5 PLANKING AND STRUTTING FOR EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION

5.1 General
When the depth of trench in soft/loose soil exceeds 2 meters, stepping, sloping, or planking
and strutting of sides shall be done. In case of loose and slushy soils, the depths at which
these precautions are to be taken shall be determined by the Engineer according to the
nature of soil.
Planking and strutting shall be 'close' or 'open' depending on the nature of soil and the depth
of trench. The type of planking and strutting shall be determined by the Engineer. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to take all necessary steps to prevent the sides of
trenches from collapse.
5.1.1 Close planking and strutting
Close planking and strutting shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trench,
generally with short, upright, and members called 'poling boards.' These shall be 250 mm x
38 mm in section or as directed by the Engineer. The boards shall generally be placed in
position vertically in pairs, one board on either side of cutting. These shall be kept apart by
horizontal walling of strong wood at a minimum spacing of 1.2 meters cross strutted with
ballies or as directed by the Engineer.
The length and diameter of the ballie struts shall depend upon the width of the trench.
Typical sketch of close timbering is given in Fig. 2.2 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
Where the soil is very soft and loose the boards shall be placed horizontally against the
sides of the excavator and supported by vertical 'wallings' which shall be strutted to similar
timber pieces on the opposite face of the trench. The lowest boards supporting the sides
shall be taken in the ground for a minimum depth of 75 mm. No portion of the vertical side of
the trench shall remain exposed, so that the earth is not liable to ship out.
The withdrawal of the timbers shall be done very carefully to prevent collapse of the trench.
It shall be started at one end and proceed systematically to the other end. Concrete or
masonry shall not be damaged while removing the planks. No claim shall be entertained for
any timber, which cannot be withdrawn and is lost or buried, unless required by the
Engineer to be left permanently in position.
5.1.2 Open planking and strutting
In case of open planking and strutting, the entire surface of the side trench is not required to
be covered. The vertical boards of 250 mm x 38 mm width shall be spaced sufficiently apart
to leave unsupported strips of 50 cm average width. The detailed arrangement, sizes of the
timber and the distances apart shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In all other
respect, specifications for close planking and strutting shall apply to open planking and
strutting. Typical sketch of open planking and strutting is given in Fig. 2.2 (CPWD
Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
5.1.3 Measurements
The dimensions shall be measured correct to the nearest cm and the area of the face
supported shall be worked out in sqm correct to two places of decimal.
5.1.3.1 Work shall be grouped according to the following:
(a) Depth not exceeding 1.5 m.

35 of 194
 (b) Depth exceeding 1.5 m in stages of 1.5 m.

5.1.3.2 Planking and strutting to the following shall be measured separately:

(a) Trenches.

(b) Areas (the description shall include use and waste of raking shores).

(c) Shafts, walls, cesspits, manholes and the like.

(d) Where tightly driven close butt jointed sheeting is necessary as in case of running sand,
the item shall be measured separately and packing of cavities behind sheeting with
suitable material included with the item.

(e) Planking and strutting required to be left permanently in position shall be measured
separately.

5.1.4 Rate

The rate shall include use and waste of all necessary timber work as mentioned above
including fixing and subsequent removal.

5.1.5 Safety measures as detailed in Indian Standard Safety Code for excavation work (IS: 3764-
1992 as amended from time to time) shall be adhered to.

5.1.6 Whenever there is disagreement between the Contractor and the Engineer regarding the
necessity or otherwise of timbering or other safety measures, the Contractor shall be
responsible to obtain the decision of the Engineer in writing, failing whish the contractor shall
be liable for the damages caused, due to non-adoption of proper timbering methods.

5.1.7 Poling Boards

These are used to support the sides of excavation in which the ground can stand upto a
vertical phase of one meter or more. (Long enough to enable poling boards to be placed).
Poling boards are short upright members of 250 x 38 mm section or as otherwise directed
by the Engineer. The boards shall generally be placed in position vertically, in pairs one
board on each side of cutting and shall be kept apart by horizontal walling of strong wood, at
a minimum spacing of 1.2 meters cross strutted with ballies. The length of the ballie strut
shall depend upon the width of the trench.

5.1.8 Horizontal strutting

In cases where the soil is found to be soft and loose or where the ground is heavily
surcharged, the timber boards shall be placed horizontally against the sides of the
excavation and supported by vertical wallings which in turn shall be strutted by cross ballies.

5.1.9 Runners

5.1.9.1 This type of timbering is used in bad ground which requires support during the whole period
of excavation. These are driven down slightly in advance of the digging and the ends are
kept 'toed in' to the bottom of the excavation to prevent loss of ground.

5.1.9.2 Runners are usually square edged but V-jointed runners are used to make tight job and to
prevent as far as possible, the infiltration of water, silt etc. The lower ends shall be
sharpened to a chisel edge and splayed.

36 of 194
5.1.9.3 If hard driving is anticipated the lower ends shall be iron. Shed and the heads shall be
ringed or bound heads with hoop iron. Payment for each such item shall be made extra over
the ordinary runner work (without iron shed end) described above.
5.1.10 Open timbering in trenches including use of and waste of all necessary timber work
including walls, struts, open poling boards/horizontal sheeting/runners etc. as may be
necessary and fixing and removal complete (measurements to be taken of the face area).
5.1.10.1 Open planking and strutting
This shall be as per Clause 5.1.2 above.
5.1.10.2 Measurements
The dimension shall be measured correct to the nearest cm and the area of the faces
supported shall be worked out correct to two places of decimal in sqm. The type of timbering
shall be clearly described in the bill of quantities. The area shall be measured for different
depths as mentioned in the schedule.
Where tightly driven close butt jointed sheeting is necessary as in the case of running sand,
the item shall be measured separately and the packing of cavities behind sheeting with
suitable material shall be included in the description of the item.
5.1.10.3 Rate
The rate shall include use and waste of all necessary timber work as mentioned above
including fixing and subsequent removing. The rate includes the cost of materials such as
poling boards, walling ballies and struts etc. The carriage of material upto one km. by
mechanical transport and upto 100 meters by head load has been included in the rates.
Contractor's profit @ 10% and over-head charges @ 5% has been included in the rates.
5.1.11 Close timbering in trenches including use and waste of all necessary timber work including
walls, struts, close poling board/horizontal sheeting/runner etc. as may be necessary
shoring and packing cavities (Wherever required) and fixing and removal complete
(measurements to be taken of the face area timbered).
5.1.11.1 Close planking and strutting
This shall be as per Clause 5.1.1 above.
5.1.11.2 Measurements
For measurements, specification 5.1.10.2 above shall be referred to.
5.1.11.3 Rate
For rates, specification 5.1.10.3 above shall be referred to.

6 REMOVAL OF SLIPS
6.1 Removal of slips in all kinds of soil (including saturated soil (including saturated soil but
excluding boulder and rocky portion requiring blasting).
6.1.1 In this case the serviceable material should be stacked at safe place so that it may not
cause hindrance to traffic. The unserviceable material should be disposed of and a lead of
20 meters has been included in the rates. The rate includes removal of saturated soil also.
Every effort should be made to remove as big boulders as is possible with manual labour
and without resorting to blasting. For the removal of boulders and rocks, the help of
crowbars shall be taken. Where the crowbars are available in short supply at the site where
the slips are to be removed, the uses of wooden poles have also been found out to be
useful.
6.2 Removal of boulders or rocky portion of slips.
6.2.1 Wherever it is not possible to remove the boulders and rocks manually, blasting shall be
resorted to. For carrying out the blasting, reference may be made to relevant Chapter 2 of
Earth Work under CPWD Specifications (Vol. 1). The rate includes removal of boulders or
rocky portion upto a distance of 20 meters. Disposal of unserviceable materials stacking
serviceable materials and neatly dressing the surface have been included in the rates.

6.3 Measurements
The cross-sections at suitable intervals as per the direction of the Engineer shall be plotted
on the Measurement Books-M.B.'s before actually removing the slips. Permanent pegs or
bench marks may be fixed in order to plot the cross-sections. The slips should be measured
in cubic meters. Convenient method may also be used in case of calculating the volumes of
boulders and or rocks.
6.4 Rate

37 of 194
 The rates include cost of all materials and equipment. The rates also include the labour
involved in various operations for the removal of this item as mentioned in the schedule of
rate. This also includes contractor's profit @ 10% and over-head charges @ 5%.

7 FORM WORK WITH STEEL PLATES AND TIMBER BATTENS, BALLIES ETC.
7.1 General
Form work shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming the concrete,
together with all temporary construction required for their support.
Forms for concrete shall be constructed of timber, plywood or metal or PGI sheets and be of
substantial and rigid construction true to shape and dimensions shown on the drawings.
Where metal forms are used all bolts and rivets shall be counter sunk and well ground to
provide smooth plain surface. Forms shall be so constructed as to be removable in sections
in the desired sequence, without damaging the surface of concrete or disturbing other
sections. For easy removal, bolted and wedged connection should be preferred to nailed
joints. Wherever nailed joints are provided, just sufficient number of nails should be used
and indiscriminate use of nails shall be avoided.
7.2 Materials
7.2.1 Timber, planks, scantlings and battens
Timber planks, scantlings and battens shall conform to specifications as given below.
7.2.1.1 Timber shall be of good quality and well-seasoned. It shall have uniform colour, reasonably
straight grains and shall be free from dead knots, cracks, shakes, sap-wood, heart-rot, sap
rot boxed heart, pitch (resinous) pockets or streaks in exposed edges, worm holes, splits
and wraps etc. Specified variety of timber shall be used in the work. Timber shall be sawn in
direction of grains. Sawing should be truly straight and square. The timber for use in
structures constantly in contact with water or damp earth shall be treated with suitable
preservative laid down in IS: 401-2001 so as to resist fungi in termites and marine borers.
Timber consisting of sap-wood can also be used with the permission of the Engineer
provided:
1) Its use is economical as compared to timber consisting of heart wood only and;
2) It is chemically impregnated with a suitable preservative as per recommended practice
laid down in IS: 401-2001.
7.2.1.1.1 Kail Wood
st
7.2.1.1.2 1 Class Kail Wood
The timber shall .be of very good quality, well-seasoned and free from defects such as dead
knots, cracks, sapwood etc. No individual hard and sound knot shall exceed 6 sqcm in size
and the aggregate area of such knots shall not be more than 1% of the area of the piece.
There shall not be less than 5 growth rings per cm width in cross-section.
nd
7.2.1.1.3 2 Class Kail Wood
The timber shall be of good quality, well-seasoned and generally free from defect such as
dead knots, cracks, shakes, sapwood etc. However, traces of sapwood shall be allowed. No
individual sound and hard knot shall exceed 15 sqcm in size and the aggregate area of such
knots shall not exceed 2% of the area of the piece. There shall not be less than 2 growth
rings per cm width in cross-section.
The timber used in shuttering shall not be so dry as to absorb water from concrete and swell
and bulge, nor, so green or wet as to shrink or wrap after erection. Kail wood or such other
soft wood, which is not affected appreciably by its contact with water, shall be used. It shall
be free from shakes, loose knots, wormholes or other defects. The planks, scantlings and
battens shall be accurately sawn and planned on the side and the surface coming in contact
with concrete. The dimensions of scantlings and battens shall conform to the design. The
strength of the wood shall not be less than that assumed in the design.
7.2.1.2 Sal Wood
Sal is about 30 percent heavier than teak, 50 percent harder, and about 20 to 30 percent
stronger. In shock resistance it is about 45 percent above teak. Its heart wood is a naturally
durable wood, and usually remains immune to attack by white ants and fungi for a long
period, while its sapwood is very perishable and should not be used. Well dried Sal is not a
really easy wood to saw and work. It is a rough constructional wood than a carpentry timber.
No individual hard and sound knot shall exceed 25 mm in diameter and the aggregate area
of all the knots shall not exceed 1% of the area of the piece.

38 of 194
 It can be used for a variety of purposes, such as for beams, rafters, flooring, piles, bridging,
tool handles, picker arms and tent pegs etc.
7.2.2 Ballies
7.2.2.1 Ballies shall satisfy the requirements of IS specification No. 3337-1978. Ballies of various
sizes and species of timber are extensively used for the construction of scaffolding and for
the erection of temporary and semi-permanent structures. Ballies are also used in large
quantities for fencing work, pile foundation, supports for shuttering and for flood protection
works in the form of permeable spurs bank piling for preventing erosion. This standard has,
therefore, been prepared with the object of providing guidance on the sizes and
requirements of Ballies for general purposes.
7.2.2.2 Manufacture
Unless otherwise specified, the bark shall be completely removed and all branches and
excrescences shall be dressed down flush with the surface. The top and bottom ends shall
be cut square.
7.2.2.3 Requirements
Ballies shall be air-dried to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 12
mm from the surface when measured at one-third length of the Ballies from its butt end.
Ballies shall be reasonably straight, and shall be free from cut across the grain, live insect
attack, any kind of decay (rot), pronounced spiral or twisted grain, hollow heart and dead
knots exceeding 5 cm in diameter.
7.2.2.4 The ballies shall be of Sal and of the variety popularly known as 'gollas'. The diameter
specified shall be the mean diameter. This mean diameter shall be the average of three
diameters measured at the center and the two ends. The following tolerances shall be
permitted:
S. Mean diameter or Tolerances in diameter at the
Length
No. diameter at the center thinner end
1. Ballies not exceeding Not less than the specified The diameter at the thinner end shall
3 meters length. diameter. not be less than specified diameter
by more than 10 mm.
2. Ballies exceeding 3 Not less than the specified The diameter at the thinner end shall
meters length. diameter. not be less than specified diameter
by more than 20 mm.
Ballies to be used as props shall have 100 mm minimum diameter, measured at mid length
and 80 mm at thin end. Ballies shall be reasonably straight (the center line joining any two
points on the actual axis 3 meter apart shall not deviate from any point on the actual line of
axis of the ballies by more than 50 mm in a length of 3m); and shall be free from cuts across
the grain, large cracks, live insect attack, any kind of decay (rot) pronounced spiral or
twisted grain, hollow heart and dead knots exceeding 50 mm in diameter. The top and
bottom ends shall be cut square and shall be free from cracks.
For any further details on timber and ballie specifications, provisions of Chapter 9 of Timber
Work under CPWD Specifications (Vol. 1) shall be followed.
7.2.3 P.G.I. Sheets
When the formwork with sheathing of steel sheets is to be done, it shall be ensured that the
minimum thickness of plain galvanized iron sheet is 1 mm. The steel sheets shall be placed
on planks. In addition to planks, the battens etc. should also be provided to the satisfaction
of Engineer. The battens should be horizontal well as vertical. The battens should be
provided as per the design equipment. In case of vertical surface, the sheathing or iron
sheets shall be adequately fixed. While fixing the sheathing with the planks, it shall be
ensured that head of the nails do not protrude above the plate. The steel plate sheet
thickness shall be as specified in the Work item.
7.2.4 Oil for Forms
Unless some other form of oil is specified, refined pale paraffin mineral oil, raw linseed oil
shall be used for wood forms. For steel forms the oil shall consist of refined mineral oil/raw
linseed oil suitably compounded with one or more ingredients which are approved for the
purpose.

7.2.5 Soap Solution for surface treatment

39 of 194
 Soap solution for surface treatment of formwork shall be prepared by dissolving yellow soap
in water to get the consistency of paint.

7.2.6 Nails

Mild Steel wire nails, shall be bright finished and of adequate strength. The type and size
(length or designation) shall be as indicated or directed by the Engineer. Mild Steel wire
nails shall conform to IS: 723-1972 Specification for Steel Countersunk Head Wire Nails (as
amended from time to time).
7.2.7 Rope
Rope for use in formwork and centring shall consist of good quality munj ban or other equal
and approved quality. It shall be new and stout.
7.3 Workmanship
7.3.1 Classification of Form Work
Formwork shall be classified depending upon the type of finish required for a particular work
and will fall in any of the following four categories:
i) Formwork for Rough Finish: Formwork required to give a concrete surface which is
either hidden from view or requires to be separately finished with plastering or
rendering.
ii) Formwork for Fair Finish: Formwork required to give a concrete surface free from joint
marks, honey combing etc. and is presentable without further treatment.
iii) Formwork for Medium Smooth Finish: Form work required to give a concrete surface
which may show some joint marks which may not be objectionable (on account of
forming a pattern, by itself or otherwise not objectionable).
iv) Formwork for Textured or Decorative Fine Finish for Architectural Concrete: Formwork
required to give a surface with a clear impression of lines according to the pattern
specified by the Architect in the drawings, without requiring any treatment. This type of
formwork will be further classified as under:
a) Formwork with ordinary timber planking,
b) Formwork with wr0ught timber i.e. sheathing having planed surface,
c) Formwork with sheathing having tongued and grooved board/plywood lining/ steel
sheets, and
d) Formwork with sheathing having special lining formed by providing formwork with
smooth surface in bands of required sizes and at the required place as per the
pattern specified in the architectural drawings.
7.3.2 General Requirements
7.3.2.1.1 The form work shall be rigid and so constructed as to retain the shape and dimensions of
the member being cast. It shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand the load of
concrete, and vibrations, movement of men, materials and plants and any other incidental
loads without excessive deflection beyond permissible limits.

7.3.2.1.2 The form work shall be so constructed as to be removable in sections by unscrewing or

otherwise loosening them without hammering or levering with force. Only wedges, clamps,
bolts or screws etc. shall be used in preference to nails or spikes. All side pieces shall be
easily removable without disturbing the bottom pieces. Where however, use of nails and
spikes become unavoidable, these shall be left projecting so that they can easily be
withdrawn.

7.3.2.1.3 If at any stage of work during or after placing concrete in the structure, the form work sags
or bulges out beyond the required shape of the structure, the concrete shall be removed and
work shall be redone with fresh concrete and adequately rigid form work at the cost of the
Contractor. Details of shuttering and centring shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

7.3.3 Propping of Centring

7.3.3.1 The props shall consist of ballies or brick masonry pillars laid in mud mortar. Ballies shall be
placed at a spacing of 1 to 1.2 meters and shall rest squarely on wooden sole plates of 40
mm thickness and with a minimum bearing area of 0.1 sq. meters. Double wedges shall be

40 of 194
 provided between the sole plate and the wooden prop so as to facilitate tightening and
easing of shuttering without jarring the concrete. In case brick masonry pillars are used as
props, the wooden sole plates shall be provided at the top of pillars and double wedges
inserted between the sole plate and the bottom of shuttering.
7.3.3.2 In case of structures with two or more floors, the weight of concrete and centring and
shuttering of any upper floor shall be suitably supported on at least two floors below the
same. In such cases the props of upper floors shall necessarily come over the props of the
lower floors. The formwork and concreting of the upper floors shall not be done until the
concrete of the lower floor has set for at least 14 days.
7.3.4 Shuttering
7.3.4.1 Shuttering shall be either of wooden planking of 38 mm minimum thickness with or without
steel sheet lining or of steel plates stiffened suitably by steel angles and would be such as to
give the required type of finish on the surface. The shuttering shall hive smooth and even
surface and the joints shall not permit any leakage of cement grout or slurry.
7.3.4.2 Unless otherwise desired, all angles in concrete work shall be sharp and well defined.
Where, however, a rounded edge, bevelled edge or moulding is required the provision shall
be made in the form itself. Openings for fan clamps and other fittings connected with
services shall be provided in the shuttering as directed by the Engineer.
7.3.4.3 Form lining shall be such as would not discolour the concrete nor would interfere with the
normal chemical reaction of cement. When steel sheets are used for lining, the sheets shall
be placed and mounted on the forms with minimum amount of kinks and other
imperfections.
7.3.5 Surface treatment for shuttering
7.3.5.1 Forms shall be cleaned of all dust, wood shavings, dirt and other matter by washing with
water. The process is facilitated by providing draining holes in the shuttering. The surface
shall then be coated with soap solution applied before concreting is done. Soap solution for
the purpose shall be prepared by dissolving yellow soap in water to get consistency of paint.
Alternatively coats of raw linseed oil/refined pale paraffin mineral oil or form oil of approved
manufacture may be applied. In case steel shuttering is used, soap solution or raw linseed
oil shall be applied after thoroughly cleaning the surface.
7.3.5.2 The oil or coating shall be applied with a brush or sprayed so as to cover the entire surface
evenly. Care shall be taken that the coating, does not get on construction joint surfaces and
reinforcement bars. It shall also not cause softening or permanent staining of concrete
surface nor shall impede the wetting of surfaces to be water cured.

Special care shall be taken in case of small grooves. The form strips shall be oiled or coated
thoroughly so as to prevent swelling of the forms and consequent damage to the concrete
on removal of forms.
7.3.6 Camber
The shuttering for beams and slabs shall have camber of 4 mm per meter (1 in 250) or as
directed by the Engineer, so as to offset the subsequent deflection. For cantilevers, the
camber at free end, shall be 1/50th of the projected length or as directed by the Engineer.
7.3.7 Erection or Assemblage of Forms
Formwork shall be erected true to line, vertical or battered to proper slope as required and
free from twist. It shall be so assembled as to facilitate easing and removal of the various
parts in proper sequence without jarring the concrete. The completed form work shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer before placing reinforcement and laying concrete.
7.3.8 Ties
Metal rods or bolts are used as form-ties to hold the forms in position and to prevent bulging
during concreting. Normally mild steel bolts are used varying in diameter from 10 mm to 20
mm, the smaller sizes being generally sufficient for bolts in direct tension in column and wall
shuttering while the larger sizes are used for bolts subject principally to transverse loading.
The threads of the bolts should be well-greased and any adhering concrete spillings cleaned
from them as often as practicable. The diameter of holes through the timber should not be
more than 1.5 mm greater than the diameter of the bolt. The bolts are removed when the
forms are struck. Removal of bolts passing through set concrete can be made easier by well
greasing the bolt or by giving the bolt half a turn while the concrete is only partly set. These
bolts to be used as ties should be ordered in generous overall lengths with ample threaded
length. Excess length can be readily taken up by packing and this enables us to use the

41 of 194
 bolts in any type of work. Sometimes wire ties are also used but their use is restricted to
such places where the concrete surface is to be covered by subsequent finishing materials
as the ends of wire are liable to give objectionable rust stains if the concrete surface is left
uncovered. The wire ties are drawn tight without exhibiting spring and are left in the
concrete, the projecting ends being clipped off after removing shuttering. Wire ties are made
of black annealed iron wire No. 9 to 16 gauge.

7.3.9 Spreader
7.3.9.1 Spreaders are provided in the forms to prevent the sides being forced in when the ties are
tightened. There are many types of spreaders and most common of these are old fashioned
wooden spreaders made by ripping of 25 rnm boards. Wooden spreaders are removed as
the concreting proceeds. Concrete spreaders are also quite common and these are cast in
lengths equal to the thickness of wall, column or beam. They are usually 50 mm x 50 mm in
cross-section and have a hole in the center to allow the tie bolt to pass through. The
advantage of these spreaders is that they need not be removed while the concreting
proceeds and the removal of tie is very easy.
Where walls are subjected to water pressure on one side and are required to be water-tight,
the ties are not removed and they are so provided that the clearance between their ends
and the concrete surface is not less than 32 mm.
7.3.9.2 Arrangement of ties and spreaders
Typical arrangement of form work for „beams, columns and walls‟ are shown in Figures 5.1
to 5.8 and form secured by wall ties is shown in Fig. 5.3 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1,
2009).
The form faces have to be kept at fixed distance apart and an arrangement of wall ties with
spacer tubes or bolts is considered best. A typical wall form with the components identified
is given in Fig. 5.1, 5.2 & 5.3 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009). The two shutters of the
wall are to be kept in place by appropriate ties, braces and studs, some of the accessories
used for wall form are shown in Fig. 5.3 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
7.3.10 Striking/Removal of Forms
Forms shall be removed gently. They shall be eased carefully in order to prevent the load
being suddenly transferred to concrete. Form work shall not be struck and removed until the
concrete has attained strength to take at least twice the stress to which concrete may be
subjected at the time of removal. The period that shall elapse after the concrete bas been
laid and before easing and removal of centring and shuttering is undertaken shall be as
follows:

S. No. Part of structure Periods*

1. Slides of foundations, columns and walls. 48 hours

2. Underside of slabs up to

a) 4.5 m span. 7 days

b) Over 4.5 m span. 14 days

3. Under side of beam soffits and arches up to

a) 6 m span. 14 days

b) Over 6 m span & upto 9 m. 21 days

c) Under side of beams and arches over 9 m. 28 days

4. Domes, shells vaults, folded plates & structures of special As per written instructions of
nature Engineer.

42 of 194
 * This period is given for concrete work using Ordinary Portland Cement. For rapid hardening cement,
th
a period equal to 3/7 of the above period will be sufficient in all cases except vertical sides of slabs
beams etc. in which case it shall be 24 hours. In case of frost or bad weather the periods may be
suitably increased at the discretion of Engineer.

In slab and T-beam construction, sides shall be stripped first, then the underside of slab and
lastly that of the beam.

In case of cantilever slabs and beams, centring shall remain till structures for counter acting
or holding down have been erected and have attained sufficient strength.

The periods as mentioned in the above table are for normal weather conditions in plains
0 0
when temperature is above 21 C (70 F). In cold weather conditions, when temperature is
0 0 0 0
below 10 C (50 F), the above periods may be doubled. For a temperature of 10 C to 21 C
0 0
(50 F to 70 F), the above periods may be increased proportionately.

For pre-stressed units the side forms shall be released as early as possible after 12 hours
and soffit forms shall permit without restraint deformation of the member when pre-stress is
applied.

All form work shall be removed without using any damage to the concrete. Centring shall be
gradually and uniformly lowered in such a manner as to avoid any shock or vibrations.
Supports shall be removed in such a manner as to permit the concrete to take stresses due
to its own weight uniformly and gradually. Any work damaged through premature or careless
removal of form shall be reconstructed at the cost of the Contractor.

The Engineer shall be informed in advance by the Contractor of his intention to strike any
form work.

While fixing the time for form work, due consideration shall be given to the local conditions,
character of the structure, weather and other conditions that influence setting of concrete
and the materials used in the mix.

7.4 Measurements
Form work shall be measured as the area in square meters of shuttering in contact with
concrete except in the case of inclined slab, and portion of curved shells requiring shuttering
both on the underside and upper side in which case only area of underside shall be
measured for payment. Dimensions shall be measured correct to a centimeter and areas
shall be worked out correct to two decimal places.
2
No deductions shall be made for openings upto 0.4 m in area.
Formwork to secondary beams shall be measured upto the sides of main beams but no
deduction shall be made from the form work of the main beam at the intersection point. No
deduction shall be made from the form work of a column at intersection of beams.
Where it is not specifically stated in the description of the item that formwork shall be paid
for separately, the rate of R.C.C. items shall be deemed to include the cost of form work.
Items involving height of propping and centring in excess of between supporting floor and
ceiling shall be measured separately for different heights as under:
(i) Height between 4 m to 5 m.
(ii) Height between 5 m to 6 m.
(iii) Height between 6 m to 7 m.
The edges of slabs and beams in floors and walls shall be measured in running meter
correct to the nearest cm.
7.5 Rate
7.5.1 Unless otherwise stated, the labour rates include handling of all materials within 100 meters.
7.5.2 These rates are applicable for form work comprised of ordinary timber planking unplaned so
as to give a rough finish. In case of planks are planed so as to give a medium smooth finish
as per directions of the Engineer /Project Manager, the same has to be carried out at the
same rate in the BOQ. The rates are applicable to all conditions of working and at all floors.
Nothing extra shall be payable on account of extra lift of materials involved.

43 of 194
 The rates are applicable to all conditions of working and at all floors. Nothing extra shall be
payable on account of extra lift of materials involved. The rates shall include the cost of
materials and Iabour for various operations involved such as:
(a) Splayed edging and notching, allowances for overlaps and passing at angles, centring,
shuttering, strutting, propping, bolting, nailing wedging, easing, striking and removal.
(b) Filleting.
(c) Dressing with oil.
(d) Raking or circular cutting.
7.5.3 (a) The rates are applicable for four meters height of propping and centring below
supporting floor. For heights between 4 meters to 7 meters extra rates as per schedule
shall be paid. These extra rates are exclusive of the cost of supporting brick/stone/C.C.
Pillars if required at site. In case, these are used additional rates for these shall be paid
after recovering the cost of salvaged materials.

In case the supporting brick/stone/C.C. pillars are required at site and extra rate for the
same is to be given to the Contractor, then extra rates should be given for the net
increase in height after deducting the height of the brick/stone/C.C. pillars. The
provision of brick/stone/C.C pillars has not been taken into consideration upto a height
of 4 meters, and these need not be constructed upto a height of 4 meters except
otherwise the Engineer so directs.
(b) In case the supporting brick/stone/C.C. pillars are required at site and extra rate for the
same is to be given to the Contractor, then extra rates should be given for the net
increase in height after deducting the height of the brick/stone/C.C. pillars. The
provision of brick/stone/C.C. pillars has not been taken into consideration upto a height
of 4 meters, and these need not be constructed upto a height of 4 meters except
otherwise the Engineer so directs.
7.5.4 The rates include carriage by mechanical transport upto 1 km, and head-load up to 100
meters.
7.5.5 The wastage at the time of fixing of centring/shuttering has been taken into consideration.
Also the rates include the wastage on account of repeatedly usage of the material.
7.5.6 Where the inclination to horizontal plane exceeds 300 the shuttering shall be provided on
both underside and upper side, the area of the underside only shall be measured for
payment. The rate includes the provision of shuttering of both sides.
7.5.7 In case of arches, the rate includes provision of fittings such as straps, bolts etc. and their
carriage. The rate includes labour such as Carpenter, Beldar for assembling erection,
dismantling and cleaning.
8 CONCRETE WORK
[Note: Latest IS Codes including any amendments shall be followed over and above the
CPWD Specifications ,Vol. 1, 2009 and as amended from time to time, and such code
provisions shall supersede the following specifications, as applicable.]
8.1 Cement Concrete
8.1.1 General
These specifications cover the requirements of cement concrete for use in various
components of structures.
For all items of concrete in any structural portion of the bridge or its components; controlled
concrete shall be used unless otherwise specified when ordinary concrete of the mix shown
on drawings or as directed by the Engineer may be used. These specifications shall apply to
cement concrete for ordinary structures and not for dams or any other massive structures in
which case the reference may be made to separate specifications. The essentials to make a
good concrete are listed briefly as below:
i) Fresh cement and enough of it.
ii) Not too much mixing water.
iii) Clean, hard sand and stone.
iv) A proper balance between the amounts of sand and stone-not too much of either.
v) Carefully measured materials for each batch.
vi) Thorough mixing.
vii) Careful and uniform placing of concrete.
viii) Concrete kept damp or covered for several days.
8.1.2 Materials

44 of 194
8.1.2.1 Cement
The type of cement to be used shall be subject to the approval of Engineer and it shall
conform to specifications given below.
8.1.2.1.1 General
8.1.2.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified cement shall conform to the following Indian Standard
specifications:
(a) Ordinary Portland cement, (ii) Rapid Hardening Portland Cement, and (iii) Low
Heat Portland Cement shall conform to IS: 269-1989.
(b) Portland blast furnace slag cement shall conform to IS: 455-1989.

(c) Portland Pozzolana cement shall conform to IS: 1489-1991.

(d) Masonry cement shall conform to IS: 3466-1988.

(e) White Portland cement shall conform to IS: 8042-1989.

8.1.2.1.1.2 Supply
The cement shall be packed in bags (of gunny, malt-ply paper of cloth) net weight of
each bag being 50 kg. Alternatively it may also be supplied at site in silos installed for
the purpose of supply.
8.1.2.1.1.3 Stacking and Storage
Cement shall be stored at the work site in such a manner as to prevent deterioration
due to moisture.
Cement shall be stored and stacked in bags in dry and water proof sheds. The bags
shall be stacked at least 15 to 20 cm clear above the floors and 25 to 35 cm clear off
the walls to prevent deterioration. Cement bags shall be kept free from the possibility
of any dampness or moisture coming in contact with them. Cement shall be used in
the order in which it is received. Each consignment of cement shall be stacked
separately therein to permit easy access for inspection and facilitate removal. Cement
bags shall not be stacked more than 12 bags high to avoid lumping up under
pressure.
Storage of cement at site of work shall be at the Contractor‟s expense and risk in the
event of any damage occurring to cement due to faulty storage or on account of
negligence on his part. Such damage shall be the liability of the Contractor.
Where cement has been stored for over 6 months or for any reason the stored
cement shows signs of deterioration or contamination, it shall be got tested before
use, to ascertain its strength, setting time etc.
8.1.2.1.1.4 Limitation to use
The Contractor shall use all cement issued to him on the work for which it has been
supplied. Cement surplus after the completion of the work shall not be disposed of
without the previous consent of the Executive Engineer in writing.
8.1.2.1.1.5 Mode of Measurement
Cement shall be measured by weight in quintals, tonne/tons or in bags of 50 kg each,
as the case may be.
8.1.2.1.1.6 Unless otherwise specified, „cement‟ shall mean Ordinary Portland Cement for general
use. Any type of cement which does not satisfy the conditions as per ISI Standards
shall be rejected.
8.1.2.1.2 Classification
8.1.2.1.2.1 Portland Cement
8.1.2.1.2.1.1 Chemical Requirements
Ordinary and rapid hardening Portland cement shall comply with the following chemical
requirements:
(a) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica, alumina, and iron oxide,
when calculated by the formula:
CaO - 0.7 SO3

---------------------------------------------

45 of 194
 2.8 SiO2 +1.2 Al2O3 + 0.65 Fe2O3

: Not greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.66.

(b) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide: Not less than 0.66.

(c) Weight of insoluble residue: Not more than 1.5 percent.

(d) Weight of magnesia: Not more than 5 percent.

(e) Total sulphur content, calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3): Not more than
2.75

percent,

(f) Total loss on ignition: Not more than 4 percent.

Low heat Portland cement shall comply with the following requirements as to its
chemical composition given below:
The percentage of lime after deduction of the amount necessary to combine with
sulphuric anhydride present shall be not more than 2.4 times the percentage of silica
plus 1.2 times the percentage of alumina and plus 0.65 times the percentage of iron
oxide; nor be less than 1.9 times the percentage of silica, plus 1.2 times the
percentage of alumina plus 0.65 times the percentage of iron oxide. In all other
respects, low heat Portland cement shall comply with the requirements specified
under item 8.1.2.1.2.1.1 (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f).
8.1.2.1.2.1.2 Physical Property Standards
(i) Soundness
Expansion by the “Le Chatelier” test not more than 100mm or 5mm after 7 days
aeration, time of boiling being 3 hours. Alternatively autoclave expansion shall
not be more than 0.5 percent when tested according to IS: 269-1989.
(ii) Setting Time
The setting time of the cements shall conform to the following requirements:

Setting Time Cement Type

Ordinary Rapid Low Heat

(Minutes) Hardening (Minutes)
(Minutes)

(a) Initial setting time not less 30 30 60

than

(b) Final setting time not more 600 600 600

than

(iii) Compressive Strength

The average compressive strength of at least three mortar cubes of the cement
shall be as follows:

Compressive Strength Cement Type

Ordinary Rapid Hardening Low Heat (kg/sqcm)

(kg/sqcm) (kg/sqcm)

46 of 194
 Compressive Strength Cement Type

Ordinary Rapid Hardening Low Heat (kg/sqcm)

(kg/sqcm) (kg/sqcm)

(a) 1 day (24 hours) not - 115 -

less than

(b) 3 days (72 hours) not 115 210 70

less than

(c) 7 days (168 hours) not 175 - 115

less than

(d) 28 days (672 hours) - - 265

not less than

(iv) Tensile strength

When requested by the purchaser at the time of placing the order, the average
tensile strength of six mortar briquettes shall be as follows:

Compressive Strength Cement Type

Ordinary (kg/sqcm) Rapid Hardening

(kg/sqcm)

(a) 1 day (24 hours) not less than - 20

(b) 3 days (72 hours) not less than 20 30

(c) 7 days (168 hours) not less than 25 -

Cement shall not be rejected on the basis of tensile test above and no tensile
strength test shall be required in case of low heat Portland cement.

(v) Heat of Hydration

The heat of hydration of low heat Portland cement shall be as follows:
(a) 7 days – not more than 65 calories per gram.
(b) 28 days – not more than 75 calories per gram.

8.1.2.1.2.2 Portland Pozzolana Cement

8.1.2.1.2.2.1 Manufacture
Portland pozzolana cement shall be manufactured either by intimately intergrinding
together Portland cement clinker and pozzolana or by intimately and uniformly
blinding Portland cement and fine pozzolana. Grinding method is easier and should
be preferred. Where the blinding method is to be restored to due to certain reasons,
care should be taken to that the blinding is as intimate as possible. The pozzolana
constituent shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of the Portland cement.
8.1.2.1.2.2.2 Quality
Portland pozzolana cement shall conform to the relevant Indian Standard.
8.1.2.1.2.2.3 Uses
Portland pozzolana cement produces less heat of hydration and offers greater
resistance to the attack of aggressive waters than normal Portland cement. Moreover
it reduces the leaching of calcium hydroxide, liberated during the setting of cement. It
is particularly useful in marine construction and mass concrete structures. While
Portland pozzolana cement can generally be used wherever ordinary Portland
cement is used, it is important to appreciate its limitation that the addition of

47 of 194
 pozzolana does not contribute to strength at early ages; only at later ages can one
expect strengths similar to those for ordinary Portland cement.
8.1.2.1.2.3 White Cement
Thy grey colour of ordinary cement is due to the presence of an impurity of iron oxide
in the raw materials, which do not contain iron oxide will be white. Contamination is
also avoided during burning by using oil fuel instead of coal. The other properties of
this cement are the same as those of ordinary cement. Coloured cements are
prepared from white cement except in the case of red or brown cements which can
be prepared from grey Portland cement. The grey or white cement is mixed with 5 to
10% of a suitable and chemically inert colouring pigment during the grinding process.
White cement is used as a rendering to give white appearance to concrete and
plaster in buildings or other structures and also in white terrazzo flooring and dados. It
is also necessary to use white Portland cement for the lighter shades of coloured
concrete mortars and terrazzo flooring. The whiteness is secured by reducing the iron
oxide to a minimum.
8.1.2.2 Aggregate
Coarse aggregates of nominal size as specified and used for each item shall conform to
specifications given below.
8.1.2.2.1 Aggregates
8.1.2.2.1.1 Description and Physical Characteristics of Aggregates
8.1.2.2.1.1.1 General
To enable detailed reports on aggregates to be framed on a comparable basis, the
following general headings under which the appropriate information may be given
are suggested as a guide:
(a) Trade Group: For example, granite, lime stone and sand stone.
(b) Petrological Name & Description: The correct petrological name should be used
and should be accompanied by a brief description of such properties as
hardness, colour, grain, imperfections etc.
(c) Description of the Bulk: The degree of cleanliness, that is, freedom from dust
should be stated and reference made to the presence of any pieces not
representative or the bulk, such as elongated or flaky pieces.
(d) Particle Shape.
(e) Surface Texture.
8.1.2.2.1.1.2 Nomenclature of Rock
The technical nomenclature of rocks is an extensive one and for practical purposes it
is sufficient to group together with those rocks having certain petrological
characteristics in common. Accordingly, the list of trade groups given is adopted for
the convenience of producers and users of stone.
8.1.2.2.1.1.3 Trade Groups of Rocks used as Aggregates
Name of trade-groups: Granite, Gabbro, Aplite, Dolerite, Rhyolite, Basalt, Sand stone,
Lime Stone, Granulite, Gneiss, Schist and Marble.
8.1.2.2.1.1.4 List of Rocks placed under the appropriate Trade Groups
The correct indentification of a rock and its placing under appropriate trade-group
shall be left to the decision of the Geological Survey of India or any competent
geologist.
Igneous Rocks
Granite Group
Granite Granodiorite
Granophyre Dorite
Synite
Gabbro Group
Gabbro Peridiotite
Norite Pyroxenite
Anorthosite Epidiorite
Aplite Group
Aplite Quartzreef
Porphyry
Dolerite Group

48 of 194
 Dolerite Lamprophyre
Rhyolite Group
Rhyolite Felsite
Trachyte Pumicite
Basalt Group
Andesite Basalt
Sedimentary Rocks
Sand Stone Group
Sand Stone Arkoses
Quartzite Greywacke
Grit
Lime Stone Group

Lime Stone Dolomite

Metamorphic Rocks
Granulite and Gneiss Groups
Granite Gneiss Amphibolite
Composite Gneiss Granulite
Schist Group
Slate Phylite
Schist
Marble Group
Marble Crystalline
Lime stone
8.1.2.2.1.1.5 Particle Shape and Surface Texture

(i) The external characteristics of any mixture or mineral aggregate include a wide
variety of physical shape, colour and surface condition. In order to avoid lengthy
descriptions, it may be convenient to apply to distinctive group types of
aggregates some general term which could be adopted.

(ii) The simple system shown in tables below has, therefore, been devised and is
put forward in the hope that it will facilitate defining the essential features of both
particle shape and surface characteristics.

Particle Shape
Classification Description Example
1 2 3
Round Fully water borne or River or seashore gravels,
completely shaped by desert, seashore and
attrition. windblown sands.
Irregular or partly Naturally irregular, or partly Pit-sands and gravels; land or
rounded shape by attrition, and having dug flints; cuboid rock.
rounded edges.
Angular Possessing well-defined Crushed rocks of all types;
edges formed at the talus; screed.
intersection of roughly planar
surfaces.
Flaky Material, usually angular, of Laminated rocks.
which the thickness is small
relative to the width and/or
length.
Surface Characteristics of Aggregates

S. No. Group Surface Texture Example

1. Glassy Black flint.

49 of 194
 S. No. Group Surface Texture Example
2. Smooth Cherty, slate, marble, some rhyolite.
3. Granular Sand stone, colitis.
4. Crystalline Fine: Basalt, trachyte, keratophyre.
Medium: Cole rite, granophyres, granulites, micro
granite, some lime stones, many dolomites.
Coarse: Gabbro, gneiss, granite, Granodiorite,
Synite.
5. Honey combed and Scoriae, pumice, tress.
porous
(iii) Surface characteristics have been classified under five headings or groups. The
grouping is broad and is not supposed to be a precise petrographical
classification, but is based upon a visual examination of hand specimens. With
certain materials, however, it may be necessary to use a combined description
with more than one group-number for an adequate description of the surface
texture, for example, crushed gravel 1 and 2, colitis 3 and 5.
8.1.2.2.1.2 Crushed Stones (One size)
8.1.2.2.1.2.1 Scope
This standard covers the requirements for aggregates, crushed or uncrushed, derived
from natural sources, such as river terraces and river beds, glacial deposits, rocks
boulders and gravels, for use in the production of concrete for normal structural
purposes including mass concrete works, road works etc.
8.1.2.2.1.2.2 General
Aggregate most of which is retained on 4.75 mm I.S. Sieve and containing only as
much final material as is permitted for the different types is described as coarse
aggregates. This shall be broken from hard stone obtained from the approved quarry.
The quarry shall be approved by the Executive Engineer. The aggregates shall be
hard, strong, dense, durable clean, free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious
amounts of disintegrated pieces, alkali, vegetable matter and other deleterious
substances. As far as possible, flaky, scoriaceous and elongated pieces shall be
avoided. It shall also be free from soft, friable, thin, elongated or laminated pieces and
shall be roughly cubical in shape. It shall be clear from dirt. If coarse aggregates
contain more than the prescribed limits of clay or mud etc., it shall be properly
washed and dried before mixing with other ingredients to make concrete.
8.1.2.2.1.2.3 Deleterious Materials
Coarse aggregates shall not contain any harmful material such as iron pyrites, coal,
mica, shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali, soft fragments, sea shells,
organic impurities etc., in such quantities so as to adversely affect the strength and
durability of concrete. In addition to above in reinforced concrete, the aggregate shall
not contain any material which might attack the reinforcement. The maximum
quantities of deleterious materials in the coarse aggregate, when determined in
accordance with IS: 2386-1963 (Part 2) “Method of test for Aggregates for Concrete”,
shall not exceed the limits (Percentage by weight) laid down in the following table.
However, the Engineer, at his discretion, may relax some of the limits as a result of
some further tests and evidence of satisfactory performance of the aggregates.
Limits of Deleterious Materials

S. Deleterious Method of Test Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate

No. Substance (%age by Weight – (%age by Weight –
Max.) Max.)

Uncrushe Crushe Uncrushe Crushed

d d d

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(i) Coal & lignite IS: 2386 (Part 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

50 of 194
 S. Deleterious Method of Test Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate
No. Substance (%age by Weight – (%age by Weight –
Max.) Max.)

Uncrushe Crushe Uncrushe Crushed

d d d

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2)-1963

(ii) Clay lumps -do- 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00

(iii) Materials finer than IS: 2386 (Part 3.00 15.00 3.00 3.00
Sieve 75 micron 1)-1963

(iv) Soft fragments IS: 2386 (Part - - 3.00 -

2)-1963

(v) Shale -do- 1.00 - - -

(vi) Total of percentages 5.00 2.00 5.00 5.00

of all deleterious
materials (except
mica) including S.
No. (i) to (v) for Col.
4, 6 & 7 and S. No.
(i) and (ii) for Col. 5
only.

Note 1: The presence of mica in the fine aggregate has been found to reduce considerably the
durability and compressive strength of concrete and further investigations are underway to
determine the extent of the deleterious effect of mica. It is, advisable, to investigate the mica
content of fine aggregate and make suitable allowances for the possible reduction in the
strength of concrete of mortar.

Note 2: The aggregate shall not contain harmful organic impurities (tested in accordance with IS: 2386
(Part 2)-1963 in sufficient quantities to affect adversely the strength and durability of concrete.
A fine aggregate which fails in the test for organic impurities may be used, provided that when
tested for the effect of organic impurities on the strength of mortar, the relative strength at 7
and 28 days in accordance with 7 of IS: 2386 (Part 6)-1963 is not less than 95 percent.

8.1.2.2.1.2.4 Aggregate Crushing Value

The aggregate crushing value, when determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part
4)-1963, shall not exceed 45 percent for aggregate used for concrete other than for
wearing surfaces, and 30 percent for concrete for wearing surfaces, such as runways,
roads and pavements.

8.1.2.2.1.2.5 Aggregate Impact Value

As an alternative, the aggregate impact value may be determined in accordance with

the method specified in IS: 2386 (Part 4)-1963. The aggregate impact value shall not
exceed 45 percent by weight for aggregates used for concrete other than for wearing
surfaces and 30 percent by weight for concrete for wearing surfaces, such as
runways, roads and pavements.

8.1.2.2.1.2.6 Aggregate Abrasion Value

51 of 194
 Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier the abrasion
value of aggregates, when tested in accordance with the method specified in IS: 2386
(Part 4)- 1963 using Los Angeles machine, shall not exceed the following values:

(a) For aggregates to be used in concrete for wearing surfaces. 30 percent

(b) For aggregates to be used in other concrete. 50 percent

8.1.2.2.1.2.7 Soundness of Aggregate

For concrete liable to be exposed to the action of frost, coarse and fine aggregates
shall pass a sodium or magnesium sulphate accelerated soundness test specified in
IS : 2386 (Part 5)-1963, the limits being set by agreement between the purchaser and
the supplier, except that aggregates failing in the accelerated soundness test may be
used if they pass a specified freezing and thawing test satisfactory to the user.

8.1.2.2.1.2.8 Size and Grading of Aggregates

The coarse aggregates shall be supplied in the nominal size as given in the tables
below.

Coarse Aggregates

I.S. Percentage Passing for Single-sized Aggregate Percentage Passing for Graded
Sieve of Nominal Size Aggregate of Nominal size
Design-
ation 63 40 20 16 12.5 10 40 20 16 mm 12.5
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

80 mm 100 - - - - - 100 - - -

63 mm 85 to 100 - - - - - - - -
100

40 mm 0 to 85 to 100 - - - 95 to 100 - -
30 100 100

20 mm 0 to 5 0 to 85 to 100 - - 30 to 95 to 100 100

20 100 70 100

16 mm - - - 85 to 100 - - - 90 to -
100 100

12.5 mm - - - - 85 to 100 - - - 90 to
100 100

10 mm 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 0 to 0 to 45 85 to 10 to 25 to 30 to 40 to
20 20 100 35 55 70 85

4.75 mm - - 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 0 to 5 0 to 0 to 10 0 to
20 10 10

52 of 194
 Coarse Aggregates for Mass Concrete

The following aggregates for mass concrete works shall be in the size as per the
following table:

Class & Size I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage Passing

Very Large, 150 to 80 150 mm 90 to 100

mm
80 mm 0 to 10

Large, 80 to 40 mm 80 mm 90 to 100

40 mm 0 to 10

Medium, 40 to 20 mm 40 mm 90 to 100

20 mm 0 to 10

Small, 20 to 4.75 mm 20 mm 90 to 100

4.75 mm 0 to 10

2.36 mm 0 to 2

8.1.2.2.1.2.9 When coarse aggregates brought to the site is ungraded, single size coarse
aggregates of different nominal size shall be mixed at site with other ingredients of
concrete, either directly in the mixture or on the platform in the proportion indicated in
the following table:

Cement Nominal size of graded Part of single size aggregate of sizes

concrete aggregate required
mixture (mm) 50 mm 40 mm 20 mm 12.5 10 mm
mm

1:6:12 63 9 - 3 - -

1:6:12 40 - 9 3 - -

1:5:10 63 7.5 - 2.5 - -

1:5:10 40 - 7.5 2.5 - -

1:4:8 63 6 - 2 - -

1:4:8 40 - 6 2 - -

1:3:6 63 4.5 - 1.5 - -

1:3:6 20 - - 4.5 - 1.5

1:2:4 40 - 2.5 1 - 0.5

1:2:4 20 - - 3 - 1

53 of 194
Cement Nominal size of graded Part of single size aggregate of sizes
concrete aggregate required
mixture (mm) 50 mm 40 mm 20 mm 12.5 10 mm
mm

1:2:4 12.5 - - - 3 1

1:1-1/2:3 20 - - 2 - 1

Note: The proportions indicated in table above are by volume. When considered necessary, these
proportions may be varied marginally by Engineer after making sieve analysis of aggregate
brought to site for obtaining required graded aggregate. No adjustments in rates shall be made
for any variations in the proportions so ordered by the Engineer. If single size coarse
aggregates are not premixed at site to obtain the graded coarse aggregate required for the mix,
the volume of single size aggregates shall be suitably increased to account for reduction in
total volume at the site of mixing.

8.1.2.2.1.2.10 Supply

The coarse aggregates proposed to be used for the concrete work shall be got
approved from the Engineer before the start of the work. All subsequent supplies
shall preferably be obtained from the same source.

8.1.2.2.1.2.11 Stacking

Only the aggregates, satisfying the specification requirements, shall be conveyed to

the roadside and stacked. Each size of aggregate shall be stacked separately.
Likewise, materials obtained from different quarry sources shall be stacked
separately in locations not liable to inundation or foods.
The dimensions of the stacks and their location shall be as approved by the Engineer,
Where the material is improperly stacked, the Engineer shall have the right to order
complete re-stacking of the materials to specifications at the cost of the Contractor.
Mineral filler shall be supplied in dry state in bags or other suitable containers
approved by the Engineer and shall be protected from weather, dampness, etc., so
as to prevent deterioration in quality.
The coarse aggregates shall be supplied at site in regular stacks as mentioned below:

Size of stack (in meters)

Length Breadth Height

2.0 2.0 0.50
or 5.0 5.0 1.50
or 5.0 1.0 0.50
8.1.2.2.1.2.12 Storage
The materials shall be stored so as to prevent contamination and stagnation. If stored
in piles on ground, the aggregate shall not be dumped on loam, mud or grass so that,
on re-handling, dirt and rubbish are not carried to the concrete. If a clear and hard
surface is not available, a platform of planks or a floor of bricks shall be prepared to
receive the aggregates.

The aggregates shall be stored in such a way as to prevent admixture of foreign

materials. Different sizes of fine or coarse aggregates shall be stored in separate
stock-piles sufficiently away from each other to prevent intermixing of the materials at
the edges of the piles.

8.1.2.2.1.2.13 Measurements

54 of 194
 Coarse and fine aggregates supplied at site of works shall be paid for in cubic meters.
The actual volume of the aggregates to be paid for shall be computed after deducting
the following percentages from the volume computed by stack measurements:

S. Standard size of Percentage reduction in volume computed by

No. aggregates stack measurements to arrive at the volume to
be paid for
1. 75 mm and 63 mm 12.5
2. 40 mm and 25 mm 10
3. 20 mm, 12 mm, 10 mm & 6 5
mm
4. Fine aggregate Nil
Unless otherwise directed, measurements shall not be taken until sufficient material
for use on the road have been collected and stacked. Immediately after
measurement, the stacks shall be marked by whitewash or other means as directed
by the Engineer.
8.1.2.2.1.3 All-in-Aggregates
8.1.2.2.1.3.1 General
For all common properties it shall conform to “Coarse Aggregate”. All-in-aggregate
shall be composed of fine and coarse aggregates collected directly from pit, river bed
or crushing plants.

8.1.2.2.1.3.2 Grading of all-in-aggregates

If combined aggregate containing both fine and coarse aggregate are available, these
need not to be separated into fine and coarse but necessary adjustments shall be
made in the grading by addition of single-sized aggregates/fine aggregates to obtain
the specified grading. For 40 mm and 20 mm nominal size of all-in-aggregate, the
final grading shall be as under:

All-in-Aggregate
I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage passing for all-in-aggregate of:
40 mm nominal size 20 mm nominal size
80 mm 100 -
40 mm 95 to 100 100
20 mm 45 to 75 95 to 100
4.75 mm 25 t0 45 30 to 50
600 micron 8 to 30 10 to 35
150 micron 0 to 6 0 to 6
8.1.2.2.1.3.3 Sample
Samples of all-in-aggregate proposed to be used for the concrete work shall be got
approved from the Engineer before the start of work. All subsequent supplies shall
preferably be obtained from the same source.
Note: All-in-aggregate is not recommended to be used in reinforced concrete work, as
the grading is liable to vary and the wide range of sizes increases rate of segregation.
8.1.2.2.1.4 Water-Borne Stone aggregate (One Size)
Same as under section 8.1.2.2.1.2 above.
The fine aggregate used shall conform to specifications given below.

8.1.2.2.2 Sand

55 of 194
 For Plasters, sand shall be used as per IS: 1542-1992, and for Masonry mortars the sand
shall be used as per IS: 2116-1980, and sand of fine aggregate for Cement Concrete Work
shall conform to IS: 383-1970. The quarry from which the sand is obtained shall be subject
to the approval of the Executive Engineer.
8.1.2.2.2.1 General
Natural sand is found as a result of disintegration of rock, which is deposited by
stream or glacial agencies. Sand may be obtained either from river bed or from pits.
Sand consists of cohesion-less aggregates of rounded, sub-rounded, angular, sub-
angular, or flat fragments of more or less unaltered rocks or minerals, 90 per cent of
the particles being greater than 0.06 mm and less than 2 mm in size.
Sand which contains 90% of particles of size greater than 0.06 mm and less than 0.2
mm in fine sand.
Sand which contains 90% of particles of size greater than 0.6 mm and less than 2
mm is coarse sand.
8.1.2.2.2.1.1 Qualities of Sand
Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic
matter and shall not contain any appreciable amount of clay balls or pallets. Sand
shall not contain harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica,
shale or similar laminated material, alkali and organic impurities in such form or
quantities as to affect the strength or durability of concrete or mortar. Sand to be used
for places where reinforcement is used shall not contain any material liable to attack
the steel reinforcement.
8.1.2.2.2.1.2 Sand for Mortars
In addition to the requirements given in the foregoing Clause 8.1.2.2.2.1.1 unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer, the maximum quantities of silt, in sand not
exceed the following limits, determined by field test with measuring cylinder - 8%.
8.1.2.2.2.1.3 Grading of Coarse Sand
The grading of coarse sand shall be within the limits specified below:
I.S. Sieve Designation (IS: 460-1985) Percentage by Weight Passing I.S.
Sieve
4.75 mm 100
2.36 mm 90 – 100
1.18 mm 70 – 100
600 micron 30 – 100
300 micron 5 – 70
150 micron 0 – 15
Sand whose grading falls outside the above limits due to excess or deficiency of
coarse or fine particles shall be processed to comply with the standard by screening
through a suitably sized sieve and/or blending with required quantities of suitable size
of sand particles.
8.1.2.2.2.2 Fine Sand for Mortars
8.1.2.2.2.2.1 General
Where coarse sand is not available or where its cost is prohibitive, fine sand, not
conforming to the specifications of sand as given above, may be used if so specified
by the Engineer after ascertaining the strength and suitability of mortar prepared out
of fine sand. (Such detailed provision shall be clearly indicated in the general
specifications in the tender documents.)

8.1.2.2.2.2.2 Qualities of Fine Sand

Fine sand shall be obtained from river beds not affected by tidal waters of the sea
and shall be clean, sharp and free from excessive deleterious matter. The sand shall
not contain more than 8 percent of mud and silt as determined by field test with a
measuring cylinder. The method of determining silt content is given below:
A sample of sand to be tested shall be placed without drying in a 200 ml measuring
cylinder. The size of sample shall be such that it fills the cylinder upto the 100 ml
mark.

56 of 194
 Clean water shall be added upto 150 mI mark.
The mixture shall than be shaken vigorously and the contents allowed to settle for 3
hours.
The height of the silt visible as settled layer above the sand shall be expressed as
percentage of the height of the sand below.
The sand containing more than the above allowable percentage of silt shall be
washed so as to bring the silt contents within the allowable limits.
8.1.2.2.2.2.3 Fineness Modulus of Coarse/Fine Sand
This shall not be less than 2.5 and 1 (respectively for coarse fine sand as determined
by the following method:
The fineness modulus of sand shall be determined by taking 500 grams of it from
representative sample of sand and passing it successively through the six Indian
Standard sieves No. 4.75 mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, No. 600 microns, 300 microns and
No. 150 microns. The percentage of sand retained on each sieve successively shall
be noted and the cumulated percentage retained on each sieve computed. The total
of cumulative percentages retained on the six sieves divided by 100 shall give the
fineness modules of sand. The following example illustrates the computation of
finesses modulus of a sample of sand:

Sieve description Percentage retained on each Cumulative Percentage

as per I.S. sieve respectively retained on successive sieves
4.75 mm 0 -
2.36 mm 1.0 1.0
1.18 mm 10.5 11.5
600 microns 49.0 60.5
300 microns 33.5 94.0
150 microns 5.0 99.0
Pan 1.0 266.0
Total 100.0 266.0
Fineness Modulus = 266.0 = 2.66
100.0
8.1.2.2.2.3 Bulking of Sand
In the nominal mortar mixes specified by volume sand is assumed to be dry. Dry and
saturated sand almost have the same volume but damp sand increases in volume
(Bulking), depending upon moisture content. Due allowance for bulking of sand shall
be made while preparing the mortar mixes based on volume measurements the
actual amount of bulking varies with the grading of the sand. Bulkage of sand shall be
determined by the methods prescribed below.
Bulking of Fine aggregate Sand (Field Methods)
Two methods are suggested for, determining the bulking of sand/fine aggregate. The
procedure may be suitably varied, if necessary. Both depend on the fact that the
volume of inundated sand/fine aggregate is the same if the sand/fine aggregate were
dry.
Method 1: Put sufficient quantity of sand loosely into a container until it is about two
third full. Level off the top of the sand and pushing a steel rule vertically down through
the and at the middle to the bottom, measure the height. Suppose this is 'X' cm,
Empty the sand out of the container into another container where none of it is lost.
Half fill the first container with water. Put back about half the sand and rod it with a
steel rod, about 6 mm in diameter, so that its volume is reduced to a minimum. Then
add the remainder and level the top surface of the inundated sand. Measure its depth
at the middle with the steel rule. Suppose this is 'Y' cm.
The percentage of bulking of the sand due to moisture shall be calculated from the
formula:
Percentage bulking = ((X/Y) - 1) x 100
Method 2: In a 250 ml measuring cylinder pour (consolidated by staking) until it
reaches the 200 ml mark.

57 of 194
 Then fill the cylinder with water and stir the sand well (the water shall be sufficient to
submerge the sand completely). It will be seen that the sand surface is now below its
original level. Suppose the surface is at the mark „Y‟ ml, the percentage of bulking of
sand due to moisture shall be calculated from the formula:
Percentage bulking = ((200/Y) -1) x 100
The allowance for bulking for any samples of sand shall be got determined [as per IS:
2386 (Part 3)-1963 Appendix A]. The following table gives the relation between the
moisture content and percentage of bulking, which may be used as a rough guidance.

Moisture content (Percentage by weight) Bulking percent (Volume)

2 15
3 20
4 25
5 30
8.1.2.2.2.4 Stacking and Storage of Sand
Sand shall be stacked in regular stacks (refer table given below) on a hard surface or
platform so as to prevent the admixture or clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign
matter.
S. Material Size of stack (in meters)
No. Length Breadth Height
1. Sand 2.0 2.0 0.50
or 5.0 5.0 1.00
or 5.0 1.0 0.50
8.1.2.2.2.5 Mode of Measurement
Sand shall be measured in cubic meters after making due allowance for the bulking
due to moisture.
Allowance for bulking due to moisture shall be made as per actual test. However in
the absence of actual test results the bulking percentage given under table under
section 8.1.2.2.2.4 above may be used at the discretion of the Engineer.
8.1.2.3 Water
Water used shall conform to specifications given below.
8.1.2.3.1 The water used for concrete work, masonry work, making mortars, bricks etc. shall be clean
and free from injurious amount of deleterious materials such as oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
suspended material, vegetable or organic impurities. As a rule, water that is clear and
potable shall be considered satisfactory for all these purposes. Where water can be shown
to contain any sugar or an excess of acid, alkali or salt, the Engineer, may refuse the permit
of its use.
The water used for curing concrete and brick work as well as for soaking bricks shall also be
free from above impurities, as turbid or unclean water is likely to impart its own colour to
concrete, bricks or masonry.
In case of large important concrete structures such as dams, water shall be subjected to
chemical analysis with respect to its acceptability for use in mixing and curing concrete and
its corrosive action on concrete. When water is to be used in compaction for soil for earthen
embankment etc. it shall be free from harmful salts and also from solid materials such as
roots, grass or wood, the presence of which may be likely to render difficult the formation of
a compact homogeneous mass.
8.1.2.3.2 Storage
Wherever water is to be stored for construction purposes, this shall be done in proper
storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities getting mixed up with it. The container for
transport, storage and handling water shall be clean so as not to cause contamination or
deterioration in the quality of the water.

8.1.2.3.3 Permissible Limits

As a guide, the following concentration represents the maximum permissible values of
deleterious materials in water:
(i) Not more than 2 ml of 0.1 normal NAOH be required to neutralise 200 ml of the sample.
(ii) Not more than 10 ml of 0.1 normal HCl shall be required to neutralise 20 ml of sample.

58 of 194
 (iii) Percentage of salts shall not exceed the following:
Organic 0.20%
Inorganic 0.03%
Sulphates 0.05%
Alkali-Chlorides 0.10%
8.1.3 Grades of Concrete
8.1.3.1 Controlled Concrete
For controlled concrete, design of the mix shall be arrived at after preliminary tests and in its
production all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the required works cube
strength is attained and maintained. The controlled concrete shall be in eight grades
designated as M 100, M 150, M 200, M 250, M 300, M 350, M 400 and M 450 with the suffix
'Controlled' added to it.
The proportions for ingredients chosen shall be such that concrete has adequate workability
for conditions prevailing on the work in question, and can be properly compacted with the
means available.
Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that supply, of properly
graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained till then, completion of work, grading
of aggregate should be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different sizes and
blending them in the right proportions as required. Different sizes. However, shall be
stocked in separate stock piles. Required quantity of material shall be stock-piled several
hours, preferably a day, before use. Grading of coarse and fine aggregate shall be checked
as frequently as possible, frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer to
ensure that the suppliers are maintaining the uniform grading as approved for samples in
the preliminary tests.
In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregate shall be determined by
weight. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting the maker's weight per bag,
a reasonable number of bags shall be weighed separately to check the net weight. Where
cement is weighed from bulk stocks at site and not by bags, it shall be weighed separately
from the aggregates. Water shall either be measured by volume in calibrated tanks or
weighed. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition.
Their accuracy shall be periodically checked.
It is most important to keep the specified water cement ratio content and at its correct value.
To this end, moisture content in both tine and coarse aggregates shall be determined as
frequently as possible, frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer
according to the weather conditions. The amount of mixing water shall then be adjusted to
compensate for variations in the moisture content. For the determination of moisture content
in the aggregates, IS: 2386 (Part 3) shall be referred to. Suitable adjustments shall also be
made in the weights of aggregates to allow for the variation in weight of aggregates due to
variation in their moisture content.
Minimum quantity of cement to be used in controlled concrete shall not be less than 210 kgs
per cubic meter in plain concrete and not less than 300 kg/per cubic meter in reinforced
concrete structural members, The minimum quantity of cement for pre-stressed concrete
work shall not be less than 360 kg/per cubic meter of concrete nor shall it be more than 540
kg/per cubic meter of concrete.
8.1.3.2 Ordinary Concrete
In case of ordinary concrete, mix is not required to be designed by preliminary tests and
proportions of cement, fine aggregates and coarse aggregates are specified by volume. The
ordinary concrete shall be in four grades designated as M 100, M 150, M 200 and M 250. It
can also be specified by volume as given in table below.
In the designation of a concrete mix, letter 'M' refers to the mix and the number to the
specified 28 days works cube compressive strength of that mix on 150 mm cubes,
2
expressed in kg/cm .
The ordinary concrete mix shall generally be specified by volume. For cement which
normally comes in bags and is used by weight, volume shall be worked out taking 50 kg of
cement as 0.035 cubic meter in volume. While measuring aggregate by volume, shaking,
ramming or hammering shall not be done. Proportioning of sand shall be as per its dry
volume and in case it is damp, allowance for 'bulking' shall be made as per IS: 2386 (Part
3).

59 of 194
 Ingredients required for ordinary concrete containing one 50 kg bag of cement for different
proportions of mix shall be as given in table below:
Total quantity of dry
aggregates by volume per
Proportion of the Quantity of
Grade of Mix by 50 kg of cement, to be
aggregate of coarse water per 50 kg
Concrete volume taken as the sum of the
aggregate of cement (max.)
individual volumes of fine
and coarse aggregates
1 2 3 4 5
3
M100 1:3:6 300 cm Generally 1:2 for fine 34 Liters
3
M150 1:2:4 220 cm Aggregate to coarse 32 Liters
3
M200 1:1.5:3 160 cm Aggregate by volume 30 Liters
3
M250 1:1:2 100 cm But subject to a upper 27 liters
limit of 1:1½ and
lower limit of 1:3*
*Note 1: The proportions of the aggregates shall be adjusted from upper limit to lower limit
progressively as the grading of the fine aggregates becomes finer and the maximum size of
coarse aggregate becomes larger.
Example: For an average grading of fine aggregate (that is Zone II of IS: 383-1970) the
proportions shall be 1:1½ , 1:2 and 1:3, for maximum size of aggregates 10 mm, 20 mm and
40 mm respectively.
Note 2: A mix leaner than M 100 (1:3:6) may be used for non-structural parts of the bridges, if
specified on the drawing or provided in the Contract. In such case grading of aggregates shall
be as specified in the Contract or on the drawings. Other requirements for mixing, placing and
curing shall be the same as specified in this Section.
8.1.4 Strength Requirement of Concrete
Where ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 or Portland blast furnace cement
conforming to IS: 455 is used, the compressive strength requirements for various grades of
concrete controlled as well as ordinary shall be as given in tables below. Where rapid
hardening Portland cement is used, the 28 days compressive strength requirements
specified in tables below shall be met at 7 days.
For controlled concrete, the mix shall be so designed as to attain in preliminary tests a
strength at least 33 percent higher than that required on work tests. Preliminary tests need
not be made in case of ordinary concrete.
2
Strength Requirements of Concrete (all values in kg/cm )
Compressive strength of 15 cm Cubes at 28 days
Grade of concrete
Preliminary Test (Min.) Works Test (Min.)
1 2 3
M 100 135 100
M 150 200 150
M 200 260 200
M 250 320 250
M 300 380 300
M 350 440 350
M 400 500 400
Note 1: Preliminary Test: A test conducted in a laboratory on the trial mix of concrete produced in the
laboratory with the object of:
a) designing a concrete mix before the actual concreting operation starts,
b) determining the adjustments required in the designed mix when there is a change in the
materials used during the execution of work, or
c) verifying the strength of concrete mix.
Note 2: Works Test:
A test conducted either in the field or in a laboratory on the specimens made on the works out
of the concrete being used on the works.

60 of 194
Note 3: Size of cubes:
In the working test, with the approval of the Engineer, 10-cm cubes may be used in place of 15-
cm cubes provided the maximum nominal size of aggregate does not exceed 20mm. Even the
use of 15 cm cubes should normally be restricted to concretes having a maximum nominal size
of aggregate not exceeding 40 mm. Where concrete with aggregates larger than 40 mm size is
required to be tested, the size of cubes should be specified by the Engineer, keeping in view
that generally the length of side of the cube should be about four times the maximum nominal
size of aggregate in the concrete constituting the cube specimen.
Note 4: Strength in Relation to size of the Cube:
Where 10-cm cubes are used, the values obtained from tests on 10-cm cubes shall be reduced
to the extent established by comparative preliminary tests with 10 and 15 cm cubes, or in the
absence of such comparative tests, by 10 percentage of the value determined from the tests, in
order to give the equipment strength for 15 cm cubes. Where cubes larger than 15-cm are
adopted, generally no modification is necessary unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
Note 5: Cylinder strength:
Compressive strength tests may, with the approval of the Engineer, be concluded on 15 cm
diameter and 30 cm high cylinders instead of on cubes. Where cylinder strength figures are
adopted, the compressive streng.th figures given above shall be modified according to the
formula:
Minimum cylinder comparative strength required=0.8 compressive strength specified for 15-cm
cubes.

2
Optional Work Test Requirements of concrete (all values in kg/cm )
Grade of Compressive strength Modules of Rupture by Beams Test, Min
concrete on 15 cm cubes (min. at
7 days) At 72 + 2 hours At 7 days
1 2 3 4
M 100 70 12 17
M 150 100 15 21
M 200 135 17 24
M 250 170 19 27
M 300 200 21 30
M 350 235 23 32
M 400 270 25 34
Note: Notes 3 to 5 under earlier table are also applicable to this table.
For Permissible Stresses in Concrete, reference may be made to ISI Code 456.
8.1.5 Admixtures
No materials other than the essential ingredients i.e. cement, aggregate and water, shall
ordinarily be used in the manufacture of concrete or mortar. But the Engineer may permit
the use of approved admixtures for imparting special characteristics to the concrete, on
satisfactory evidence that its use does not in any way adversely affect the properties of
concrete particularly its strength, volume changes, durability and has no deleterious effect
on the reinforcement.
8.1.6 Size of coarse aggregates
Following shall be the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate for the different items of
work:
S. Items of construction Maximum nominal size of
No. coarse aggregate
i) RCC well curb RCC well steining and RCC 40 mm
piles.
ii) PCC well steining. 63 mm
iii) Well cap or pile cap solid type piers 40 mm
abutments and wing walls, and their pier

61 of 194
 S. Items of construction Maximum nominal size of
No. coarse aggregate
caps.
iv) RCC work in cross girders, deck slab, 20 mm
wearing course, kerb, light posts, ballast wall
approach slab, etc. and hollow type piers,
abutments, wings walls and their pier caps.
v) RCC bearings. 20 mm
vi) For any other item of construction not As specified on the drawing or as
covered by items (i) to (v) above. desired by the Engineer in case it
is not specified on drawing.

For heavily, reinforced concrete members as in the case of ribs of main beams, nominal
maximum size of aggregate shall usually be restricted to 5 mm less than the minimum
lateral clear distance between the main bars or 5 mm less than the minimum cover to the
reinforcement, whichever is the smaller.

8.1.7 Proportioning
Proportioning shall be done by volume. Boxes of suitable size shall be used for measuring
sand aggregate. The size of the boxes (material) shall be 35 cm x 25 cm and 40 cm deep.
The unit of measurement for cement shall be a bag of cement weighing 50 kgs and this shall
be as 0.035 cubic meter. While measuring the aggregate and sand, the boxes shall be filled
without shaking, ramming or hammering. The proportioning of sand shall be on the basis of
its dry volume and in case of damp sand, allowances for bulkage shall be made which shall
be determined by the method as given in Clause 8.1.2.2.2 above.

8.1.8 Concrete mixes used for various types of work

Concrete mix shall be as specified in the Contract. If nothing is mentioned in the Contract, it
shall be as specified by the Engineer in writing. A rough guide regarding the use of nominal
mixes is given below:
Nominal Size Type of work for which used
1:8:16 Foundations of buildings and light structures, and base course of
1:6:12 floors.
1:5:10 Foundations of heavy buildings, plum concrete, hearting of abutments
and piers and retaining walls with stone faces in hilly areas.
1:4:8 Mass concrete and foundations of hydraulic works and heavy buildings
1:3:6 Mass concrete, bed plates, concrete blocks, canal lining.
1:2:4 General R.C.C. Buildings and similar works namely beams, slabs
panel walls, stairs, columns retaining walls pavements, floors, bed
plates etc.
1:1-1/2:3 Important RCC structures piles, arches, and impermeable construction
against water heads.

Note: However, the provisions of IS 456 as amended from time to time shall primarily prevail.

8.1.9 Form Work

This shall comply with specification as given in Section 7 above.

8.1.10 Consistency
Quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce dense concrete of required workability
for the job. Accurate and strict control shall be kept on the quantity of mixing water. For
ordinary concrete mix, the quantity of water required shall generally be equal to 5% by
weight of aggregate plus 30% by weight of cement. From this theoretical quantity of water,

62 of 194
 deduction shall be made for the surface water present in the aggregate which may be
estimated from the table given below:
Aggregate Approximate quantity of surface water Ltrs. Cum
Very wet sand 120
Moderately wet sand 80
Moist sand 40
*Moist gravel or crushed rock 20 to 40
*The coarser the aggregate the less water it will carry.

The actual quantity of water required to be added in the field will vary with the quantity of
aggregate, consistency required and surface water present in the aggregate. Therefore, the
amount of water required shall be determined in the field by carrying out slump/Vee Bee
Consistometer Test as described below.
DETERMINATION OF CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE BY SLUMP TEST
1. Scope
1.1 This method covers test for determining the consistency of concrete samples
from concrete being used in construction.
2. Specimen
2.1 The test specimen shall be formed in a mould in the form of the frustum of a
cone with internal dimensions as follows:
a) Bottom diameter 20 cm,
b) Top diameter 10 cm, and
c) Height 30 cm.
The bottom and the top shall be open, parallel to each other and at right angles
to the axis of the cone. The mould shall be provided with suitable foot pieces
and handles. The internal surface shall be smooth.
2.2 Care shall be taken to ensure that a representative sample is taken.
3. Sampling of Concrete
3.1 Samples of concrete for test specimens shall be taken at the mixer, or in the
case of ready-mixed concrete, from the transportation vehicle during discharge.
The sample of concrete from which test specimens are made shall be
representative of the entire batch. Such samples shall be obtained by
repeatedly passing a scope or pail through toe discharging stream of concrete,
starting the sampling operation of the beginning of discharge and repeating the
operation until the entire batch is discharged. The sample thus obtained shall
be transported to the place of moulding of the specimen, and to counteract
segregation, the concrete shall be mixed with a shovel until it is uniform in
appearance. The location in the work of the batch of concrete thus sampled
shall be noted for future reference. In the case of paving concrete, samples may
be taken from the batch immediately after depositing on the sub-grade. At least
five samples shall be taken from different portion of the pile and these samples
shall be thoroughly mixed before being used to form the test specimen.
4. Moulds
4.1 The internal surface of the mould shall be thoroughly clean dry and free from
set cement before commencing the test.
5. Procedure
5.1 The mould shall be placed on a smooth flat, non-absorbent surface. The
operator should hold the mould firmly in place, while it is being filled, by
standing on the foot-pieces. The mould shall be filled to about one-fourth of its
height with the concrete which shall then be tamped, using 25 strokes of 16 mm
diameter steel rod, 0.6m long and bullet pointed at the lower end. The filling

63 of 194
 shall be completed in successive layers similar to the first, and the top struck off
so that the mould is exactly filled. The mould shall then be removed by rising
vertically immediately after filling. The moulded concrete shall then be allowed
to subside, and the height of the specimen measured after coming to rest.
5.2 The consistency shall be recorded in terms of millimeters of subsidence of the
specimen during the test which is known as the Slump.

DETERMINATION OF CONSISTENCY OF CONCRETE BY VEE-BEE CONSISTOMETER METHOD

1. Scope
1.1 This sub-section deals with the determination of consistency of concrete using a
Vee-Bee Consistometer, which determines the time required for transforming by
vibration, a concrete specimen in the shape of a conical frustum into a cylinder.
2. Apparatus
2.1 The Vee-Bee Consistometer consists of:
a) A vibrator table resting upon elastic support.
b) A metal pot.
c) A sheet metal cone, open at both ends; and
d) A standard iron rod.
2.2 The vibrator table (G) is 380 mm long and 260 mm wide and is supported on
rubber shock absorbers at a height of about 305 mm above floor level. The table
is mounted on a base (K) which rests on three rubber feet, and is equipped with
an electrically operated vibrometer mounted under it operating on either 65 volts
or 220 volts, three phase, 50 cycles alternating current. A sheet metal cone (B)
open at both ends is placed in the metal pot (A) and the metal pot is fixed on to
the vibrator table by means of two wing nuts (H). The sheet metal cone is 30 cm
high and its bottom diameter is 20 cm and top diameter 10 cm. A swivel arm
holder (M) is fixed to the base and into this is telescoped another swivel arm (N)
with funnel (D) and guide sleeve (E). The swivel arm can be readily detached
from the vibrating table. The graduated rod (J) is fixed on the swivel arm and at
the end of the graduated arm a glass disc (C) is screwed. The graduation of the
scale on the rod records the slumps of the concrete cone in centimeters, and the
volume of concrete after vibration of the cone in the pot. The standard iron rod is
20 mm in diameter and 500 mm in length. The electrical equipment mounted on
the base of the Consistometer consists of a fixed plug and connector for the
electric supply cable, plug and socket connection for the detachable cable
connected to the vibrometer and a control switch.
3. Procedure
3.1 A Slump test as described above is performed in the sheet metal cylindrical pot
of Consistometer. The glass disc attached to the swivel arm is moved and is
placed just on top of the slump cone in the pot and before the cone is lifted up
the position of the concrete cone is noted by adjusting the glass disc attached to
the swivel arm. The cone is then lifted up and the slump is noted on the
graduated rod by lowering the glass disc on top of the concrete cone. The
electrical vibrator is then switched on and the concrete is allowed to spread out
in the pot. The vibration is continued until the whole concrete surface uniformly
adheres to the glass disc as indicated in concerned Figure and the time taken
for this to be attained is noted with a stop-watch. The time is recorded in
seconds.
4. Result
4.1 The consistency of the concrete is expressed in Vee-Bee degrees which are
equal to the time in seconds under 3.1 above.

64 of 194
 4.2 The required slump is obtained on the basis of the consistency scale given in
table below.
4.2.1 The curve in concerned graph Figure indicates the relationship between slump
in cm and the degrees covered by the consistency scale given in table below:

No. of Vee-Bee
Consistency Characteristics
Degrees
Moist Earth 40 to 25 to 20 Particles of coarse aggregate in the concrete are
adhesive but concrete does not clot. Risk of
segregation.
Very Dry 20 to 15 to 10 Concrete has the consistency of very stiff porridge,
forms a stiff mound when dumped, and barely tends
to shake or roll itself to form an almost horizontal
surface when conveyed for a long time, in say a
wheel barrow.
Dry 10 to 7 to 5 Concrete has the consistency of stiff porridge forms
a mound when dumped and shakes or rolls itself to
form a horizontal surface when conveyed for a long
time in, say, a wheel barrow.
Plastic 5 to 4 to 3 Concrete can be shaped into a ball between the
palms of the hands and adheres to the skin.
Semi-fluid 3 to 2 to 1 Concrete cannot be rolled into a ball between the
palms of the hands, but spreads out even though
slowly, and without affecting the cohesion of the
constituents so that segregation does not occur.
Fluid More fluid than 1 Concrete spreads out rapidly and segregation takes
place.

The following slumps are adopted for different works.

Slumps
S. No. Type of work When vibrators When vibrators
are used are not used
1 Mass concrete in foundations, 10 mm to 25 mm 30 mm to 75mm
footings, retaining walls and
pavements.
2 Thin flooring of less than 74 mm 25 mm to 40mm 75 mm to 10mm
thickness.
3 Reinforced cement concrete work See under Sub-section 8.2 RCC.

8.1.11 Mixing of Concrete

Mixing of cement concrete shall, as a rule, be done in a mechanical mixer. However, the
Engineer may permit hand mixing in specific cases where in his opinion it is not practicable
to resort to mechanical mixing, either on account of the quantity of cement concrete required
is small or for any other reason. In such cases he should ensure that the inferior quality of
concrete produced by hand mixing will not adversely affect the structure.
8.1.11.1 Mechanical Mixing
Measured quantity of aggregate, sand and cement required for each batch shall be poured
into the drum of the mechanical mixer while it is continuously running after about half a
minute of dry mixing, measured quantity of water required for each batch of concrete mix
shall be added gradually and mixing continued for another one and a half minute. It shall be

65 of 194
 ensured that total mixing time for each batch shall be at least two minutes. The mixed
concrete from one drum shall then be discharged completely and the drum re-charged as
before for the next batch mix. The mixed concrete shall be used within 30 minutes from the
time of adding water. The mixer shall be cleaned thoroughly before suspending the work
each time, revolving the drum with plenty of water.
8.1.11.2 Hand Mixing
A heap of convenient size shall be formed by packing the calculated quantity of aggregate
sand and cement (in that order) in layers. The ingredients shall be mixed, dry thoroughly by
turning them over and over again. The calculated quantity of water then shall be added
gradually and the whole thing slowly and thoroughly mixed again.

8.1.12 Transport, placing and compaction

The method of transporting and placing concrete shall be approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be so transported and placed that no contamination, segregation or loss of its
constituent materials takes place.
All form work shall be cleaned and made free from standing water, snow or ice immediately
before placing of concrete.
No concrete shall be placed in any part of the structure, until the approval of the Engineer
has been obtained.
If concreting is not started within 24 hours of the approval being given, it shall have to be
obtained again from the Engineer. Concreting then shall proceed continuously over the area
between constructions joints. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has
been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a proper construction joints formed.
0
Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not less than 4.5 C and not more
0
than 38 C. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from
the mixer unless carried in properly designed agitators, operating continuously, when this
time shall be within 2 hours of the addition of cement to the mix and within 30 minutes of its
discharge from the agitator.
Except where otherwise agreed to by the Engineer, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal
layers to a compacted depth of not more than 0.45 meter when internal vibrators are used
and not exceeding 0.30 meter in all other cases.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer concrete shall not be dropped into place from a
height exceeding 2 meters. When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and
used in such a way as to avoid segregation.
When concrete is conveyed by chute, the plant shall be of such size and design as to
ensure practically continuous flow. Slope of the chute shall be so adjusted that the concrete
flows without the use of an excessive quantity of water and without any segregation of its
ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of
deposit. The chute shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working
period and the water used for this purpose shall be discharged outside the form work.
When concreting has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be
roughened, swept clean, thoroughly wetted, and covered a 13 mm thick layer of mortar
composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as in the concrete mix itself This 13 mm
layer or mortar shall be freshly mixed and placed immediately before placing of new
concrete.
Where concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet
surface with wire of bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of any particles
of coarse aggregate. The surface shall then be thoroughly wetted, all free water removed,
and then coated with net cement grout. The first layer of concrete to be placed on this
surface shall not exceed 150mm in thickness, and shall be well rammed against old work,
particular attention being given to corners and close spots.
All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogenous mass with the assistance
of vibrators. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer for exceptional cases, such as
concreting under water, where vibrator in serviceable condition shall be kept at site so that
so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.

66 of 194
 Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10,000 cycles per minute, and
external of form vibrators not less than 3,000 cycles per minute.

8.1.13 Mechanical Vibration

8.1.13.1 General
Use of mechanical vibrators for compacting concrete is recommended, provided that the
reduced water content recommended under paragraph 8.1.10 above is adopted. The
number and type vibrations shall be subject to the approval of the Executive Engineer. If
nothing is specified, only, vibrations of the internal type of shall be used. Mechanical vibrator
shall be adequately powdered and capable of transmitting vibrations of the required
frequency to the concrete. A sufficient number of mechanical vibrators shall be provided on
the batch so that each batch may be thoroughly compacted immediately after placing and
that there will be no delay in placing and compacting of ensuing batches. The intensity and
duration of vibration shall be sufficient to ensure complete settlement and compaction
without any stratification of the successive layers or separation of ingredients. Preliminary
experiment in vibrating shall be conducted under actual conditions of mixed and placement
in order to determine the optimum duration and method of vibration.
Vibrations should be continued till the concrete is thoroughly compacted and the voids filled
as indicated by the appearance of mortar or paste at the exposed surface or at faces of
contact with the forms.
8.1.13.2 Type of Vibrators
Vibrators are of the following four general types:
a) Internal vibrators: Which consist of metal spud or rod which is inserted into newly
placed concrete and which vibrates while it is being withdrawn.
b) External or „form‟ vibrators: Which are attached to form work and external shuttering of
walls, column etc. Forms transmit the vibrating action to the concrete.
c) Surface vibrators: Which are mounted on screeds or platforms and which are chiefly
used for consolidating road slab, floors etc.
d) Vibration tables: Which are used for making precast products.
8.1.13.2.1 Internal Type Vibrators
Internal vibrators shall be allowed to penetrate as deeply as possible under their own weight
and shall so consolidate the successive layers as to breakup effectively all strata or seam.
The vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn slowly in such a manner as not to leave voids
in the plastic concrete. The entire operation shall be conducted in a systematic matter and
each course or layer vibrated uniformly. The method of dumping or depositing the loads
shall be so arranged as to keep the vibrators working continuously during placing
operations. The course shall be kept approximately level, and the concrete, even when
deposited in thin layers, shall be as stiff as can be satisfactorily worked. Care shall be taken
not to disturb a set of partially set layer. The vibrations shall be held vertical as far as
possible.
Under no condition shall internal vibrations strike the face of the forms, nor shall
reinforcement steel or embedded metal be jarred with sufficient force to impair the bond
between the concrete and the metal.

8.1.13.2.2 External or Form Vibrators

These are particularly effective on columns and in the citing of pre-cast units such as pipes,
slabs, piles, etc. The machine should be fastened to a wale or gut and transmission of the
vibration around perimeter of the member should be further assisted by means of encircling
chain where this is practicable. Forms vibrators shall also be used on thin wall sections
where reinforcement, ties and spreaders interfere too much with internal vibrators.
8.1.13.2.3 Surface Vibrators
While using surface vibrators, care shall be taken to ensure that the surface vibrator
compacts the layer being placed to its full depth. If this requirement is not met, either the
depth of the layer shall be reduced or a more powerful machine shall be used.
8.1.13.2.4 Vibrating Tables

67 of 194
 Vibrating tables are used for precast units which are made in moulds fastened to the table.
Tables are available in various sizes and are usual equipped with adjustable eccentrics so
that both the speed and amplitude can be adjusted.

8.1.14 Concreting under water

When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the methods equipment, material and
properties of the mix to be used shall be got approved from the Engineer before any work is
started. Such concrete shall not be considered as „Concrete.‟
0
Concrete shall not be placed in water having a temperature below 4.5 C. The temperature
0 0
of the concrete, when deposited, shall be not less than 16 C, nor more than 38 C. The
material shall be so proportioned as to produce a concrete having a slump of not less than
10 mm and not more than 180 mm. The slump shall be tested as per IS: 516.
Coffer-dams or forms shall be sufficiently tight, to ensure still water conditions if practicable,
and in any case to reduce the flow of water to less than 3 meters per minute through the
space into which concrete is to be deposited. Coffer-dams or forms in still water shall be
sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar through the joints in the walls. Pumping shall not
be done while concrete is being placed, or until 24 hours thereafter.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously until it has been brought to the required height.
While depositing the top surface shall always be kept as level as possible and formation of
seams avoided. For depositing concrete anyone of the following methods may be used:
(a) Tremic - When concrete is to be deposited under water by means of a tremic, the top
section of the tremic shall be a hopper large enough to hold full batch for the mix of the
entire contents of the transporting bucket if any. The tremic pipe shall not be less than
200 mm in diameter, and shall be large enough to allow a free flow of concrete and
strong enough to with stand the external pressure of the water in which it is suspended,
even if a partial vacuum develops inside the pipe. Preferably, flanged steel pipe of
adequate strength for the job shall be used. A separate lifting device shall be provided
for each tremic pipe with its hopper at the upper end. Unless the lower end of the pipe
is equipped with an approved automatic check valve, the upper end of the pipe shall be
plugged with a wadding of gunny sacking or other approved material before delivering
the concrete to the tremic pipe through the hopper so that when the concrete is forced
down from the hopper to the pipe it will force the plug (and along with it any water in the
pipe) down the pipe and out of the bottom end, thus establishing a continuous stream
of concrete. It will be necessary to raise slowly the tremic in order to allow a uniform
flow of concrete, but it shall not be emptied so that water enters above the concrete in
the pipe. At all the times after the placing of concrete is started and until all the required
quantity has been placed, the lower end of the tremic pipe shall be kept below the top
surface of the plastic concrete. This will cause the concrete to build up from below
instead of flowing out over the surface, and thus avoid formation of layers of laitance. If
the charge in the tremic is lost while depositing the tremic shall be raised above the
concrete surface, and unless sealed by a check valve it shall be re-plugged at the top
end, as at the beginning, before refilling for depositing further concrete.
(b) Drop/Bottom Bucket: The top of the bucket shall be closed. The bottom doors shall
move freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be filled completely
and lowered slowly to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the
surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be
withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
To minimize the formation of laitance, great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being deposited.

8.1.15 Working in extreme weather

Where concrete is to be deposited at or near freezing temperatures, precautions shall be
0
taken to ensure that at the time of placing it has a temperature of not less than 4.5 C and
that this temperature after it has been placed and compacted is maintained until it has
thoroughly hardened. When necessary the ingredients shall be heated before mixing and
concrete carefully protected after placing; in general, heating mixing water alone to about
0
60 C may be sufficient for this purpose. Dependence shall not be placed on salt or other

68 of 194
 chemicals for the prevention of freezing. Calcium chloride upto 1½% by weight of the
cement can be used to accelerate the rate of hardening. Use of calcium chloride in excess
of this percentage is considered harmful. No frozen material or materials containing ice shall
be used. All concrete damaged by frost shall be removed. It is recommended that concrete
exposed to freezing whether shall have entrained air and the water content of the mix shall
not exceed 30 liters per 50 kg of cement.
When depositing concrete in very hot weather, precautions shall be taken to that the
0
temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38 C while placing. This shall be achieved by
stacking aggregate under the shade and keeping them moist, using cold water, reducing the
time between mixing and placing to the minimum, cooling formwork by sprinkling water,
starting curing before concrete dries out and restricting concreting, as far as possible, to
mornings and evenings.

8.1.16 Construction joints

Concreting shall be carried out continually upto the construction joints, the position and
details of which shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Such joints shall, however, be kept to the minimum.
For a critical construction joint, a stopping board shall be fixed previously at the pre-
determined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to prevent its
displacement or plugging when concrete is compacted against it. Concreting shall be
continued right upto the board. The board shall not be removed before the expiry of the
specified period for removal of vertical forms.
Before resuming work at any construction joint when concrete has not yet fully hardened, all
laitance shall be removed thoroughly, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of coarse
aggregates.
When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened it shall be thoroughly
hacked, swept clean, wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement grout. The neat
cement grout shall be followed by a 13 mm thick layer of mortar mixed in the same
proportion as in concrete and concreting resumed immediately thereafter. The first batch of
concrete shall be rammed against the old work to avoid formation of any stone pockets,
particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.

8.1.17 Use of Plums in Ordinary Concrete

Stone plums shall not be used unless specified on the drawings. When used the size of
stone plums may be from 150 to 300 mm. The maximum dimension of these stones or
rd
plums shall not exceed 1/3 the least dimension of the members.
All plums shall be hard, durable, clean and free from soft materials or loose pieces or
deleterious substance in them and shall not have sharp corners.
During concreting the first layer of concrete of the specified mix shall be laid to a thickness
of the maximum size of plums to be used. The plums shall then be laid while the top portion
of this concrete is still green but sufficiently stiff to prevent compete submergence of the
plums under their own weigh. These plums shall be about half embedded in the concrete
and the remaining part exposed so as to form a key with the next layer of concrete. No
plums shall be used for concrete laid under water.
While placing the plums, care shall be taken to see that the clear distance between any to
plums is not less than either the width or thickness of either of the plums. The distance from
plums to the outer surface or from any steel reinforcement shall be equal to greatest width of
the plum.
If plums of stratified stone are used, they shall be laid on their natural bed. Stones with
concave faces shall be laid with the concave upwards.
The thickness of the next and successive layers of concrete shall be at least twice that of
the largest plums.
The total volume of plums shall not exceed 15 percent of the volume of the finished
concrete.
8.1.18 Finishing

69 of 194
 Immediately after the removal of forms, all exposed bars or bolts passing through the
Reinforced Cement Concrete member and used for shuttering or any other purpose shall be
cut inside the Reinforced Cement Concrete member to a depth of at least 25 mm below the
surface of the concrete and the resulting holes be closed by cement mortar. All fins caused
by form joints, all cavities produced by the removal of form ties and all other holes and
depressions, honeycomb spots, broken edges or corners, and other defects, shall be
thoroughly cleaned, saturated with water, and carefully pointed and rendered true with
mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of concrete
that is being finished and of as dry a consistency as is possible to use. Considerable
pressure shall be applied in filling and pointing to ensure thorough filling in all voids.
Surfaces which have been pointed shall be kept moist for a period of twenty four hours.
All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and
free from any mortar and concrete. Expansion joint filler shall be left exposed for its full
length clean and true edges.
If rock pockets/honey-combs, in the opinion of the Engineer are of such an extent or
character as to affect the strength of the structure materially or to endanger the life of the
steel reinforcement, he may declare the concrete defective and require the removal and
replacement of the portions of the structure affected.

8.1.19 Curing of Concrete

8.1.19.1 Protection and water curing
Immediately after compaction, concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of
weather, including rain, running water, shocks, vibration, traffic, rapid temperature changes,
frost and drying out process. It shall be covered with wet sacking, hessian or other similar
absorbent material approved by the Engineer soon after the initial set, and shall be kept
continuously wet for a period of not less than 14 days from the date of placement. Masonry
work over the foundation concrete may be started after 48 hours of its laying but the curing
of concrete shall be continued for a minimum period of 14 days.
8.1.19.2 Steam curing
Where steam curing is adopted it shall be ensured that it is done in a suitable enclosure to
contain the live steam in order to minimize moisture and heat losses. The initial application
of the stream shall be from two to four hours after the final placement of concrete to allow
the initial set of the concrete to take place.
Where retarders are used, the waiting period before application of the steam shall be
increased from four to six hours.
The steam shall be at 100 percentage relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and to
provide excess moisture for proper hydration of the cement .The application of steam shall
not be directly on the concrete, and the ambient air temperature shall increase at a rate not
0 0 0
exceeding 5 C per hour until a maximum temperature of 60 C to 70 C is reached. The
maximum temperature shall be maintained until the concrete has reached the desired
strength.
When steam curing is discontinued the ambient air temperature shall not drop at a rate
0 0
exceeding 5 C per hour until a temperature of about 10 C above the temperature of the air
to which, the concrete, will be exposed, has been reached.
The concrete shall not be exposed to temperature below freezing for at least six days after
casting.
Care shall be exercised to protect the concrete from all shakings, jarring and other
disturbance during the period of curing.

8.1.20 Tests and Standard of Acceptance

8.1.20.1 Preliminary tests for Controlled Concrete

For controlled concrete preliminary test shall consist of three sets of separate tests, and in
each set, tests shall be conducted on six specimens. Not more than one set of six

70 of 194
 specimens shall be made on any particular day. On the six specimens in each set, three
shall be tested at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days. The preliminary tests at 7
days are intended only to indicate the strength likely to be attained at 28 days.

8.1.20.2 Works Strength Tests for Controlled and Ordinary Concrete

Works strength tests shall be made in accordance with IS: 516. Each test shall be
conducted on ten specimens, five of which shall be tested at seven days and the remaining
five at 28 days. The samples concrete shall be taken on each day of concreting and cubes
shall be made at the rate of one for every 5 cubic meter of concrete or a part thereof.
However, if concreting done in a day is less than 15 cubic meters, the minimum number of
cubes can be reduced to 6 with the specific permission of the Engineer.

Similar works tests shall be carried out whenever the quality and grading of materials is
changed irrespective of the quantity of concrete poured. The number of specimens may be
suitably increased as deemed necessary by the Engineer, when procedure of tests given
above reveals a poor quality of concrete and in other special cases.

All work shall be carried out under the supervision of a qualified and a competent Engineer
who will supervise proportioning, placing and compacting of concrete at all stages.

All necessary labour, materials, equipment, etc., for sampling, preparing test cubes, curing
etc. shall be provided by the Contractor. Testing of the materials and concrete may be
arranged by the Engineer in an approved laboratory are the cost of the Contractor.

8.1.20.3 Standard of Acceptance

The average strength of the group of cubes cast for each day shall not be less than the
specified works cube strength. 20 percent of the cubes cast for each batch may have values
less than the specified strength, provided the lowest value is not less than 85 percent of the
specified strength.

A register for work test of concrete shall be maintained as record which is given as given in
table below.

REGISTER OF WORK TEST OF CONCRETE

Name of Work Concrete Compressive
Mix Strength
Name of Contractor. M 100 As given in the two
Agreement No. M 150 tables under section
8.1.4 above.
Sample No. M 200
Identification mark. M 250
Portion of work and quantity represented sample. M 300
Date and time of casting cubes. M 350
Proportion of mix. M 400
Cube No.
7 days test
1 2 3
1. Due date of test.
2. Actual date of test.
3. Actual compressive strength.
(a) Minimum
(b) Maximum
(c) Average

71 of 194
 Cube No.
7 days test
1 2 3
4. Is average compressive strength,
equal to or more than specified Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
compressive strength?
5. Is minimum compressive strength
equal to or more than specified Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
compressive strength?
6. 15% of average strength.
7. Difference between 3 (a) & 3 (b).
8. Is 7 less than 6? Yes/No Yes/No Yes/No
9. If answer to (4 & 8) are yes, or Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable
answer to 5 is yes.
10. If answers to 4 and/ or 8 are/ is No, Not Not Not
or answer to 5 and 8 are No. acceptable acceptable acceptable
11. If answer to 9 is acceptable. 28 days test not required.
12. If answer to 10 is not acceptable. 28 days test required.

JE AE/AEE EE
Note: Units for S. No. 3a, b, c, 6, 7 & 8 are kg per square cm.

Cube No.
28 days test
4 5 6
1. Due date of test
2. Actual date of test
3. Delay in testing
4. Increase in strength @ 1.50 kg/
2
cm , per day of delay.
5. Anticipated compressive strength
(Min. specified + 4)
6. Actual compressive strength.
(a) Minimum
(b) Maximum
(c) Average
7. Is average compressive strength,
equal to or more than specified / Yes/ No Yes/ No Yes/ No
anticipated compressive strength?
8. If answer to 7 is yes. Accept at full rates.
9. If answer to 7 is No. See last table in this Sub-section
under item 5.4 b & c.

JE AE/AEE EE
Note: Units for S. No. 5, 6 a, b, c are kg per square cm.

72 of 194
 For preliminary test, work test and additional test, reference may be made to the
three tables as given below respectively.

PRELIMINARY TEST FOR COMPRESSION STRENGTH OF CONCRETE

1. Scope
1.1 This method covers compression test on concrete made in a laboratory where
accurate control of quantities of materials and test conditions is possible.
2. Test Specimen
2.1 Test specimens shall be either cubes or cylinders whose size shall be as given
in table below:
SIZES OF TEST SPECIMENS
SIZE OF SPECIMENS
Cubes Cylinder
Maximum size of coarse aggregates
Dia. cm. Height
cm.
cm.
Not exceeding 20mm. 10x10x10 15 30
Greater than 20mm. hut not exceeding 38mm. 15x15x15 15 30
Greater than 38mm after wet screening or hand
15x15x15 15 30
picking aggregates greater than 38mm.
The size of the cubic specimen shall be generally (15cmx15cmx15cm) and this size shall
be preferred to (10cmx10cmx10cm). Where prior consent of the Engineer has been
obtained, the size of the specimen may be (10cmx10cmx10cm).
2.2 Moulds for test specimens shall be rigid and of metal, with inner surfaces
accurately machined. Each mould shall be provided with a metal base having a
smooth machined surface. Means shall be provided for securing the base plate
to the mould.
3. Materials
3.1 The materials and proportions used in making the test specimens including the
water content shall be similar in all respects to those to be used in the works.
The cement on arrival at the laboratory shall be mixed dry either by hand or in a
suitable mixer so as to ensure uniformity, care being taken to avoid the
intrusion of foreign matter, and then stored in airtight containers.
3.2 All material shall be brought to a temperature of 81º F ± 40º F (27º C ± 2º C)
before beginning the tests. The aggregate shall be dry.
3.3 The quantities of cement, aggregate and water for each batch shall be
determined by weight to an accuracy of 1 in 1000.
4. Preparation of Test Specimen
4.1 The concrete shall be mixed by hand, or in a small batch mixer in such a
manner as to avoid loss of water. If the concrete is mixed by hand, the cement
and fine aggregate shall be first mixed dry until the mixture is uniform in colour.
The coarse aggregate shall then be added and mixed with the cement and fine
aggregate. Water shall be then be added and the whole mixed thoroughly until
the resulting concrete is uniform in colour, and in no case for less than two
minutes. If a batch mixer is used, all materials may be placed together in the
mixer and mixed thoroughly until the resulting concrete is uniform in colour, and
in no case for less than two minutes.
4.2 The interior surface of the mould and base plate shall be lightly oiled before the
concrete is placed in the mould. Test specimens shall be moulded by placing
the fresh concrete in the mould in three layers, each approximately one third

73 of 194
 the volume of the mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete, the scoop shall
be moved round the top edge of the mould as the concrete slides from it in
order to ensure symmetrical distribution of concrete within the mould. Each
layer shall be rodded 25 times with 16 mm rod, 0.6 meter in length, bullet point
at the lower end. The strokes shall be distributed in a uniform manner over the
cross section of the mould and shall penetrate into the under laying layer. The
bottom layer shall be rodded throughout its depth. After the top layer has been
rodded, the surface of the concrete shall be struck off with a trowel and covered
with a glass plate at least 6 mm thick, or with a machined metal plate, which
may be later used in capping the test specimen. The whole process of
moulding shall be carried out in such a manner as to preclude the alternation of
the water cement ratio of the concrete by the loss of water either by leakage
from the bottom or overflowing from the top of the mould.
4.2.1 Where it is proposed to use mechanical vibrators for compacting the concrete
at the site of work and to allow increased stresses the test specimens may be
compacted with a mechanical vibrator.
4.3 Capping of Cylindrical Test Specimen
4.3.1 Two to four hours after moulding the cylindrical test specimen, if made in metal
moulds, may be capped with a thin cap of neat cement paste. The cap shall be
formed by means of a piece of plate glass 6 mm thick, or a machined metal
plate 13 mm thick and of a size 50 to 75 mm larger than that of mould. The
plate shall be worked on the cement paste until the plate rests on top of the
mould. The cement for capping shall be mixed to a stiff paste from about 2 to 4
hours before it is to be used in order to avoid the tendency of the cap to shrink.
Adhesion of the concrete to the top and bottom plates may be avoided by
coating them with heavy oil or grease.
4.3.2 If cylindrical specimens are not capped with neat cement paste, they shall be
capped before testing in such a manner that the ends are perfectly plane and at
right angles to the axis of the cylinder. The material used for capping and the
thickness of the cap shall be such that the capping will now flow or fracture
under the load.
4.3.3 It is desirable that the capping material should have a value for modulus of
elasticity equal to or greater than that of the concrete under test.
5. Curing and storage of test specimen
5.1 Immediately the moulding is completed the moulds, containing the test
specimens shall be placed in moist air of at least 90 percent relative humidity
0 0 0 0
and at a temperature of 81 ± 4 F (27 ± 2 C) for 24+½ hour.
After 24 hours, the test specimens shall be removed from the moulds, marked
0 0 0 0
and placed in saturated lime solution at a temperature of 81 ±4 F (27 ± 2 C)
until required for rest.
6. Method of testing
6.1 The tests shall be made at the age of concrete corresponding to that for which
the strengths are specified.
6.2 Compression tests shall be made immediately upon removal of the concrete
test specimen from the curing room i.e., the test specimens shall be loaded in
damp condition. The dimensions of the test specimens shall be measured in
millimeters accurate to 0.5 mm.
6.3 The metal bearing plates of the testing machine shall be placed in contact with
the each of the testing specimens. Cushioning materials shall not be used. In
the case of cubes, the test specimens shall be placed in the machine in such a
manner that the load is applied to the sides of the specimens as cast. An
adjustable bearing block shall be used to transmit the load to the test specimen.
The size of the bearing block shall be the same or slightly larger than that of the
test specimen. The upper or lower section of the bearing block shall be kept in

74 of 194
 motion as the head of the testing machine is brought to a bearing on the test
specimen.
6.3.1 The load shall be applied axially without shock at the rate of approximately 140
kg/sq.cm. per minute. The total indicated by the testing machine at failure of the
test specimen shall be recorded and the unit compressive strength calculated in
kg/sq. cm. using the area computed from the measured dimensions of the test
specimen. The type of failure and appearance of the concrete shall be noted.
7. Standard of Acceptance
This shall be as per Clause 8.1.20.3 above.

WORKS TEST FOR COMPRESSION OF CONCRETE

1. Scope
1.1 This method is intended to apply to the moulding, storing and testing of
compression test specimen of concrete samples from concrete being used in
construction.
2. Specimen
2.1 Test specimens shall either be cubes or cylinders whose sizes shall be as
given in following table below:
SIZES OF TEST SPECIMENS

SIZE OF SPECIMENS
Cubes Cylinders
Maximum size of coarse aggregates
Dia. cm. Height
cm.
cm.
Not exceeding 20 mm. 10x10x10 15 30
Greater than 20 mm but not exceeding
15x15x15 15 30
40mm.
2.2 The moulds for test specimen shall be made of non-absorbent material and
shall be substantial enough to hold their form during the moulding of the test
specimens. They shall not vary from standard dimensions given under 2.1
above by more than one percent. The moulds shall be so constructed that there
will be no leakage of water from the test specimen during mouldings.
Note: Satisfactory moulds can be made from machined iron or steel castings,
machined steel wire pipe, cold drawn steel tubing, rolled metal plate or
galvanized iron.
2.2.1 Each mould shall be provided with a base plate having a plane surface and
made of non-absorbent material. This plate shall be large enough in diameter
to support the moulds property without leakage. Glass plate shall not be less
than 6.5 mm thick or planed metal not less than 12 mm thick shall be used for
this purpose. A similar plate shall be provided for covering the top surface of
test specimen when moulded.
3. Sampling of concrete
3.1 Samples for concrete for test specimen shall be taken at the mixer or in the
case of ready mixed concrete from the transportation vehicle during discharge.
The sample of concrete from which test specimens are made shall be
representative of the entire batch. Such samples shall be obtained by
repeatedly passing a scoop or pail through the discharging stream of concrete,
stacking the sampling operation until the entire batch is discharged. The
sample thus obtained shall be transported to the place of moulding of specimen
and to counteract segregation the concrete shall be mixed with a shovel until it
is uniform in appearance. The location in the work of the batch of concrete,
thus samples shall be noted for further reference. In the case of paving

75 of 194
 concrete, samples may be taken from the batch immediately after deposition on
the subgrade. At least five samples shall be taken from different positions of the
pile and these samples shall be thoroughly mixed before being used to form the
test specimen.
4. Preparation of test specimens
4.1 The interior surface of the mould and base plate shall be lightly oiled before the
concrete is placed in the mould. From the samples of concrete obtained as
described under 3.1 above, the test specimen shall be immediately moulded by
one of the following method:
(a) When the job concrete is compacted by ordinary methods, the 1st specimen
shall be moulded by placing the test concrete in the mould in these layers each
approximately one-third of the volume of the mould in placing each scoopful of
concrete, the scoop shall be moved around the top edge of the mould as the
concrete there slides from it, in order to ensure a uniform distribution of
concrete within the mould. Each layer shall be rodded 25 times with a 16 mm
rod 60 cm in length, bullet point at lower end. The strokes shall be distributed in
a uniform manner over the cross section of the mould and shall penetrate into
the under lying layer. The bottom layer shall be rodded throughout its depth.
After the top layer has been rodded, the surface of the concrete shall be struck
off with a trowel and covered with a glass plate at least 6.5 mm thick or a
machined metal plate which may later be used in capping the cylindrical test
specimens. The whole process of moulding shall be carried out in such a
manner as to preclude the alternation of the water-cement ratio of the concrete
by loss of water either by leakage from the bottom or over flow from the mould.
(b) When the job concrete is placed by vibration and the consistency of the
concrete is such that the 1st specimen cannot be properly moulded by hand
rodding as directed under (a) above, the specimens shall be vibrated to give a
compaction corresponding to that of the job concrete. The fresh concrete shall
be placed in the mould in two layers, each approximately half the volume of the
mould. In placing each scoopful of concrete, the scoop shall be moved around
the top edge of the mould as the concrete there slides from it, in order to
ensure a symmetrical distribution of concrete within the mould. Either internal
or external vibrators may be used. The vibration of each layer not be continued
longer than is necessary to secure the required density. Internal vibrators shall
be of appropriate size and shall penetrate only the layer to be compacted. In
compacting the first layer, the vibrators shall not be allowed to rest on the
bottom of the mould. In placing the concrete for the top layer, the mould shall
be filled to the extent that there will be mortar loss during vibration. After
vibrating the second layer enough concrete shall be added to bring the level
above the top of the mould. The surface of the concrete shall then be struck off
which a trowel and covered with a glass or steel place as specified under (a)
above. The whole process of moulding shall be carried out, in such a manner
as to preclude the alternation of the water-cement ratio of the concrete by loss
of water either by leakage from the bottom or overflow from the top of the
mould.
4.2 Capping of Cylindrical Test Specimen
4.2.1 Two to four hours after moulding, the cylindrical test specimens, if made in
metal moulds, may be capped with a thin cap of neat cement paste. The cap
shall be formed by means of a piece of plate glass 6.5 mm thick, or a machined
metal plate 12 mm thick and of a size 50 to 75 mm larger than that of mould the
plate shall be worked on the cement paste until the plate rests on top of the
mould. The cement for capping shall be mixed to a stiff paste 2 to 4 hours
before it is to be used in order to avoid the tendency of the cap to shrink.
Adhesion of the concrete to the top and bottom plates may be avoided by
coating them with heavy oil or grease.
4.2.2 If the cylindrical specimens are not capped with neat cement paste, they shall

76 of 194
 be capped before testing in such a manner that the ends are perfectly plane,
and at right angles to the axis of the cylinder. The material used for capping
and the thickness of the cap shall be such that it will not flow or fracture under
the load.
4.2.3 It is desirable that the capping material should have a value for modulus of
elasticity equal to or greater than, that of the concrete under test.
5. Curing and Storage of Test Specimens
5.1 In order to afford reasonably uniform temperature and moist conditions during
the first 24 hours for curing specimens and to protect them from damage, the
moulds shall be covered with wet straw or gunny packing and placed in a
storage box so constructed and kept in such a position on work that its air
0
temperature when containing concrete specimens, shall remain between 22 C
0
to 33 C. Other suitable means which provide such temperature and moisture
conditions may be used.
Note: It is suggested that the storage box be made of 25 mm dressed tongued
and grooved timber, well braced with battens to avoid warping. The box should
be well painted inside and outside, and should be provided with a hinged cover
and padlock.
The test specimens shall be removed from the moulds at the end of 24 hours
0 0
and stored in a moist condition at a temperature within the range of 24 C to 30
C until the time of test. If storage in water is desired, a saturated lime solution
shall be used.
6. Method Testing
6.1 The specimens shall be tested in accordance with procedure described under:
6.1.1 Method of Testing
6.1.1.1 The tests shall be made at the age of the concrete corresponding to that for
which the strengths are specified.
6.1.1.2 Compression tests shall be made immediately upon removal of the concrete
test specimens from the curing room i.e. the test specimens shall be loaded in
damp condition. The dimensions of the test specimens shall be measured in
millimeters accurate to 0.5 mm.
6.1.1.3 The metal bearing plates of the testing machine shall be placed in contact with
the ends of the specimens. Cushioning materials shall not be used. In the case
of cubes the test specimens shall be placed in the machine in such a manner
that the loads applied to the sides of the specimen as cast. An adjustable
bearing block shall be used to transmit the load to the test specimen. The size
of the bearing block shall be same or slightly larger than that of the test
specimen. The upper or lower section of the bearing block shall be kept in
motion as the head of the testing machine is brought to a bearing on the test
specimen.
6.1.1.3.1 The load shall be applied axially without shock at the rate of approximately 140
kg/sq.cm. per minute. The total load indicated by the testing machine at failure
of the test specimen shall be recorded and the unit compressive strength
calculated in kg per sq.cm., using the area computed from the measured
dimensions of the test specimen. The type of failure and appearance of the
concrete shall be noted.
7. Standard of Acceptance
This shall be as per Clause 8.1.20.3 above.
ADDITIONAL TESTS FOR CONCRETE
In case the concrete fails when tested as per the method prescribed in preceding table
above, one or more of the following check tests may be carried out at the discretion of
Engineer to satisfy the strength of the concrete laid. All testing expenditure shall be borne

77 of 194
by the Contractor. The number of additional tests to be carried out shall be determined by
the Engineer. He shall be the final authority for interpreting the results of the additional
tests and shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise. His decision in this regard shall
be final and binding. For purpose of payment the cube results only shall be the criteria.
Some of the test outlined below:
1. Curing Cores: This method involves drilling and testing cores from the concrete
for determination of compressing strength. In suitable circumstances the
compressive strength of the concrete in the structure may be assessed by
drilling cores from the concrete and testing. The procedure used shall comply
with the requirements of IS: 1199-1959 and IS: 516-1959.
The points from which cores shall be taken shall be representative of the whole
concrete and at least three cores shall be obtained and tested. If the average of
the strength of all the cores cut from the structure is less than the specified
strength, the concrete represented by the cores shall liable to rejection and
shall be rejected if a static load test (C-5) either cannot be carried out or is not
permitted by the Engineer.
2. Ultrasonic Test: If an ultrasonic apparatus is regularly used by trained personal,
and continuously maintained individual charts are kept showing a large number
of readings; the relation between the reading and strength of cubes made from
the same batch of concrete, such charts may be used to obtain approximate
indications of the strength of concrete in the structures. In cases of suspected
lack of compaction or low cube strength, the results obtained from the
ultrasonic test results on adjacent acceptable sections of the structures may be
used for the purpose of assessing the strength of concrete in the suspected
portion.
3. Rebound Hammer Test: If a rebound hammer is regularly used personal and
continuously maintained individual charts are kept showing a large number of
readings, the relation between the reading and strength of concrete cubes
made from the same batch of concrete, such charts may be used in conjunction
with hammer reading to obtain an approximate indication of the strength of
concrete in a structure or element. If calibration charts are available from
manufacturers it can be used. When making rebound hammer tests each result
should be the average of atleast six readings. Readings should not be taken
within 25 mm of the edge of concrete members and it may be necessary to
distinguished between reading taken on a troweled face and those on a
moulded face. When making the tests on precast units, special case should be
taken to bed them firmly against the impact of the hammer.
4. Load Test on Individual Precast Units: The load tests described in this clause
are intended as check on the quality of the units and should not be used as a
substitute for normal design procedures. Where members require special
testing such special testing procedures shall be in accordance with the
specification. The test loads shall be applied and removed incrementally.
4.1 Non-Destructive tests: The unit shall be supported at its designed points of
support and loaded for five minutes with a load equal to the sum of the
characteristic dead load plus one and a quarter time the characteristic imposed
load. The deflection is then recorded. The maximum deflection measured after
application of the load shall be in accordance with the requirements defined by
the Engineer. The recovery is measured five minutes after the removal of the
load then re-imposed. The percentages recovery after the second loading shall
be not less than that after the first loading nor less than 90 percent of the
deflection recorded during the second loading. At no time during the tests, shall
the unit show any sign of weakness or faulty construction as defined by the
Engineer in the light of a reasonable interpretation of relevant data.
4.2 Destructive tests: The units loaded while supported at its design point of
support and shall not fail at its design load for collapse, within 15 minutes of the
time when the test load becomes operative. A deflection exceeding 1/40 of the
test span is regarded as failure of the unit.

78 of 194
 4.3 Special tests: For very large units or units not reading amenable to the above
tests e.g. columns, the precast parts of composite beams and members
designed for continuity or fixity, the testing arrangement shall be agreed upon
before such units are cast.
5. Load test of structures or parts of structures
The test described in this clause are intended as a check on structures, where
there is doubt regarding structural strength. Test loads are to be applied and
removed incrementally.
5.1 Age of tests: The test is to be carried out as soon as possible after the expiry of
21 days from the time of placing of the concrete when the test is for a reason
other than the quality of the concrete in the structure being in doubt, the test
may be carried out earlier provided that the concrete has already reached its
specified characteristic strength.
5.2 Test load: The test loads to be applied, for the limit states of deflection and
local damage, are the appropriate design loads, i.e. the characteristic dead and
superimposed loads. When the limit state of collapse is being considered the
test load shall be equal to the sum of the characteristic dead load plus one and
a quarter times the characteristic imposed load and shall be maintained for a
period of 24 hours. If any of the final dead loads is not in position on the
structure, compensating loads shall be added as necessary. During the tests
temporary supports of sufficient strength to take the whole load shall be placed
in position underneath but not in contact with the member being tested.
Sufficient precautions shall be taken to safeguard persons in the vicinity of the
structure.
5.3 Measurements during the test: Measurements of deflection and crack width
shall be taken immediately after the application of the load and, in the case of
24 h sustained load test, at the end of 24 h loaded period, after removal of the
load and after the 24 h recovery period. Sufficient measurement shall be taken
to enable side effects to be taken into account. Temperature and weather
conditions shall be recorded during the tests.
5.4 Assessment of results: In assessing the strength of a structure, or a part of
structure following a loading test, the possible effects of variation in
temperature and humidity during the period of the test shall be considered.
The following requirements shall be met:
a) The maximum width of any crack measured
immediately on application of the test load for local damage, is to be not more
than 2/3 of the value of the appropriate limit state requirement.
b) For members spanning between two supports, the
deflection measured immediately on application of the test load for deflection is
to be not more than 1/500 of the effective span. Limits shall be agreed upon
before testing cantilevered portions of structures.
c) If the maximum deflection in mm shown during a 24 h
under load is less than 40 L2/D where L is effective span in m and D is the
overall depth of construction in mm, it is not necessary for the recovery to be
measured and the requirement (d) does not apply, and
d) If within 24 hours of the removal of the test load for
collapse as calculated in clauses (a) a reinforced concrete structure does not
show a recovery of at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection shown during
the 24 h under load, the loading should be repeated. The structure should be
considered to have failed to pass the rest if the recovery after the second
loading is not at least 75 percent of the maximum deflection shown during the
second loading.

8.1.21 Measurements

79 of 194
 The cement concrete shall be measured in cum. The slab shall be measured as running
continuously through and the beam as a portion below the slab. The measurement shall be
done separately as follows:
1) Foundations and plinths.
2) Walls including attached pilasters, buttresses, and their caps and bases and string
courses etc.
3) Suspended beams, columns and pillars.
4) Kerbs, steps and the like.
5) String courses, copings, bed plates, anchor blocks, plain window sills and the like.
6) Small arched lintels not exceeding 1.5 m clear span over sailing copings and the like
requiring form work to suspended portions.
7) Mouldings as in cornices window sills etc. exceeding 15 cm. in girth.
8) Mouldings as in cornices window sills etc. not exceeding 15 cm in girth.
No deductions shall be made for the following:
Small voids such as the shaded portions in Fig. A to J (below clause 4.2.15.4, CPWD
Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009) when each do not exceed 40 sq.cm. in section.
The work under following categories shall be measured separately:
(i) From foundations to plinth level.
(ii) From plinth level to floor two level;
(iii) From floor two level to floor three level and so on; and
(iv) Concrete work in the parapet shall be measured together with the corresponding work
in the wall off the storey next below.
The measurements shall be taken as given below:
The consolidated cubical contents of cement concrete shall be measured in cubic meters
nearer to two places of decimal. Concrete laid in excess of sections shown in the drawing or
as determined by the Engineer shall not be measured.
All measurements shall be taken to the nearest centimeter, except that thickness of slabs,
partitions in case of posts, columns, beams and the like shall be taken to the nearest half
centimeter.
No deductions shall be made for:
i) Ends of dis-similar materials (e.g. joists beams, posts girders. rafters, purlins, trusses,
corbels and steps etc.) upto 500 sq.cm. in section; and
ii) Opening upto 0.1 sqm.
8.1.22 Rate
The rate is inclusive of the cost of labour and materials involved in all the operations
described under various paras pertaining to this item. Contractor's profit @ 10% and over-
head charges @ 5% has separately been added in the rates. In case water borne
aggregates are used instead of crushed stone aggregates, the rates may be reduced as
mentioned in the schedule.
Extra for additional lift over rates upto floor level two for all concrete work above floor level
two, the rates as mentioned in the schedule of rates may be taken into consideration.
The rate for laying cements concrete:
a) in or under water excluding cost of pumping or bailing out water but including removing
slush and;
b) in or under liquid mud including cost of removing slush etc. complete; and
c) in or under foul conditions,
shall be paid extra as mentioned in the latest applicable Uttarakhand PWD Schedule of
Rates (2014-2015) of Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work locations of
Guptkashi, Sonprayag, Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan], under Block
17-Agastyamuni (for Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for Work
location of Jakholi).
8.2 Reinforced Cement Concrete
8.2.1 General

80 of 194
 Reinforced cement concrete work may be cast-in-situ or precast as may be directed by the
Engineer according to the nature of work. Reinforced cement concrete work shall comprise
of the following, which may be paid separately or collectively as per description of the item
of work.
(a) Form work.
(b) Reinforcement.
(c) Concreting.
8.2.2 Materials
8.2.2.1 Cement
The cement used for R.C.C. work shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.1
above.
8.2.2.2 Coarse Aggregates
The coarse aggregates used for R.C.C. work shall comply with specification given in section
8.1.2.2.1 above.
8.2.2.3 Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates used for R.CC work shall comply with specification given in section
8.1.2.2.2 above.
8.2.2.4 Water
Water used for R.C.C. work shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.3 above.
8.2.2.5 Cement Mortar
The cement mortar used for R.C.C. work shall comply with specifications as mentioned
below, while the materials used in cement mortar shall be as per specifications under above
sections 8.1.2.1, 8.1.2.2.1 and/or 8.1.2.2.2, and 8.1.2.3.

8.2.2.5.1 Mixing
The mixing of mortars shall be done in mechanical mixer. The Engineer, may, however, relax
the condition at his discretion, taking into account the nature, magnitude and location of the
work, practicability of the use of these machines etc. or where items involving small
quantities are to be done or if, in his opinion, the use of these mixers is not otherwise
feasible. In cases, where mixers are not to be used, the Contractor shall take prior
permission of the Engineer in writing before the commencement of work.
8.2.2.5.1.1 Mixing in Mechanical Mixer
Cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be fed into the mixer and mixed dry
thoroughly, in the mixer. Water shall then be added gradually and the wet mixing
continued for at least 3 minutes after the addition of water. Care shall be taken, not to
add more water than that which shall bring the mortar to the consistency of a stiff
paste. Only that quantity of mortar, which can be used within 30 minutes of its mixing,
shall be prepared at any time. When mixing is stopped, the stages of the machine
shall be cleaned each time.
8.2.2.5.1.2 Hand Mixing
The requisite and measured quantity of sand shall be leveled on clean watertight
masonry platform and cement bags emptied on top. The cement and sand shall be
thoroughly mixed dry to a homogenous mixture of uniform colour by being turned over
and over, backwards and forwards several times.
8.2.2.5.2 Re-tempering of Mortar
In case of mortar using cement, the mortar that has stiffened because of evaporation of
water from the mortar, may be re-tempered by adding water as frequently as needed to
restart the requirements of consistency but this re-tempering shall be permitted only upto
two hours from the time of addition of cement. Mortar unused for more than 2 hours shall be
rejected and removed from the site of work.
8.2.2.5.3 Freshness

81 of 194
 As a rule, mortar shall be used on the day it is made. After the close of each day's work,
mixing trough pans shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned. Mortars shall not be allowed to
dry and shall be kept damp with wet sacks or by any other suitable means.
The quantity of dry mix, which can be used within 30 minutes, shall then be mixed in water-
tight masonry troughs with just sufficient quantity of water to bring the mortar to the
consistency of a stiff paste by hoeing back and forth for about 10 minutes after the addition
of water.
8.2.2.5.4 Measurements
Mortars shall be measured in cubic meters.
8.2.2.5.5 Rate
The rate for mortar shall be inclusive of the cost of the materials and labour involved in all
the operations. Carriage of one kilometer by mechanical transport and 100 Mtrs by head
load has been taken into consideration.
The rates are exclusive of contractor's profit and overheads but include octroi, royalty etc.
Water charges have not been allowed on the cost of the mortar under basic rates but this
has been allowed in the analysis of complete item in which these mortars are used.
In addition to this, labour for measuring, carrying, depositing and mixing has been included
in the rate.
8.2.2.6 Bitumen
Bitumen and bitumen products used for R.C.C. work shall comply with specifications given
below.
8.2.2.6.1 General
According to IS: 334, Bitumen is defined as a Non- Crystalline Solid or Viscous material
having adhesive properties, derived from Petroleum either by natural or refinery process
substantially soluble in Carbon Di-sulphide. Bitumen are Black or Brown in colour. They may
occur naturally but are usually made as end products from distillation of or as extract from
Selected Petroleum Oils.
Bitumen obtained from distillation of crude petroleum is known as “straight-run” bitumen.
When straight-run bitumen is further treated by blowing air through it, it attains a rubbery
consistency and is known as “blown” bitumen. When straight-run bitumen is blended with a
volatile or party volatile solvent, it is known as “Cut-back” bitumen. The straight-run bitumen
emulsified with water is called “bitumen-emulsion.‟‟
8.2.2.6.2 Types and Specifications
Some relevant bitumen types and specifications are given below. For any details of other
bitumen work related materials.
8.2.2.6.2.1 Bitumen Pre-moulded Joint Filler
It shall conform to IS: 1838-1983 (Part 1) & IS: 1838-1984 (Part 2) and in
which the details regarding performed fillers for expansion joints in concrete non-
extruding and resilient type (Bitumen-Impregnated-fiber) has been given. It specifies
requirement and tests for material, manufacturing, recovered, compression, extrusion,
weathering, penetration and recovered bitumen, dimension and Bitumen content. The
thickness shall be 12 mm, 18 mm or 25 mm as specified and shall be of maximum
available standard length. During the casting of the slab, Pre-Moulded joint filler shall
be placed adequately in position against the finished end of concrete slab. The filler
shall remain 20 mm below the top surface of the pavement and shall expand up to the
sub-grade.
Fiber used may be of soft board, fiber board or other suitable fiber (natural or
artificial) of cellular nature and shall be securely bonded together and uniformly
impregnated bitumen.
8.2.2.7 Steel
The steel shall be clean and free from loose rust and loose mill scale at the time of fixing in
position and subsequent concreting.
Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner likely to injure the material or
reduce the section. Bars, with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings shall not be used.

82 of 194
 The reinforcement shall be bent cold. For bats of 40 mm dia. and above, the bending may
0
be permitted by heating bars to a cherry red stage (temperature not exceeding 845 C or
0
1550 F, but it is imperative that hot bar should be allowed to cool slowly, quenching or
immersion in water otherwise being prohibited.
The steel uses for R.C.C. work shall conform to specifications given below.
8.2.2.7.1 General
The following types of steel for reinforcement shall be used in reinforced concrete/pre-
stressed concrete construction and these shall conform to Indian Standard as revised from
time to time as mentioned against each.
S. Types of Steel Product Indian
No. Standard
a) For ordinary reinforced concrete work.
1. Mild steel and medium tensile steel bard and hard drawn steel IS: 432-1982
wire for concrete reinforcement.
2. Deformed bars of concrete reinforcement, hot rolled mild steel IS: 1139-1966
and medium tensile steel.
3. Cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement. IS: 1786-2008
4. Hard drawn steel wire fabric. IS: 1566-1982
b) For Pre-stressed concrete work.
5. High tensile steel bar for pre-stressed concrete. IS: 2090-1983
6. Plain hard drawn steel wire for pre- stressed concrete.
Part 1: Cold drawn stress relieved IS: 1785-1983
Part 2: As drawn wire. IS: 1785-1983
7. Indented wire for pre-stressed concrete. IS: 6003-1983
8. Uncoated stress relieved strand for Pre-stressed concrete. IS: 6006-1983
8.2.2.7.1.1 The composition of steel shall conform to IS: 226-1975.
8.2.2.7.1.2 Steel shall be supplied by the department, where so stipulated in the Contract. But
where Contractor has to arrange these steel products he shall produce to the
Engineer a copy of the manufacturer‟s test certificate, indicating the Indian Standard
to which the particulars steel conforms and the grade if any before it is incorporated in
the work.
8.2.2.7.1.3 Standard Size
The standard nominal size specified in IS: 432-1982 for mild and medium tensile steel
bars shall be as follows:
Diameter of round bars or side of square bars – 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32,
36, 40, 45 and 50 mm.
There is no objection to the use of bars of other sizes provided they comply with the
physical, chemical and other requirements laid down in IS: 432-1982 (Part 1).
In the case of deformed bar, the nominal size is defined as that equivalent to the
diameter or side of a plain bar having the same weight per meter run as the deformed
bar.
8.2.2.7.2 Mild Steel
8.2.2.7.2.1 The physical requirements for mild steel, grade-I and II, and medium tensile steel bars
are mentioned in table below.
Physical Properties of Bars
S. Property Nominal size of bars Mild Steel Medium
No. Gr. I Gr. II Tensile
Steel
1. Ultimate tensile stress, All sizes. 42 38 55
2
kg/mm

83 of 194
 S. Property Nominal size of bars Mild Steel Medium
No. Gr. I Gr. II Tensile
Steel
2
2. Yield stress, kg/mm For bars up to and
(Min.) including 20 mm. 26 23.5 36
For bars over 20 mm up 24 21.5 34.5
to and including 40 mm.
For bars over 40mm. 24 21.5 33
3. Elongation, percent (Min.) For bars under 10 mm.
on gauge length 5.65, so 20 20 17
where is the cross
sectional area of the test For bars 10 mm and 23 23 20
piece. over.

Note:
1. Mild steel grade-II is available in two varieties designated as ST-42-0 and ST-32-0. ST-42-0
only shall be used subject to the above conditions. ST-32-0 shall not be used as reinforcement.
2. Grade-II mild steel bars shall not be used in the following conditions:
i. Where the structures are located in earthquake zones subject to severe
damage.
ii. Where the structures are subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind loading) such as
railway and highway bridges.
iii. Where welding has to be employed for fabrication.
iv. Where the design of the structures has been based on plastic theory.
3. Mild steel off grade: This variety of steel is not of uniform quality. Whenever this is to be used it
should be subject to ultimate tensile strength and bending tests.

Weight: The tolerance on weight for round and square bars shall be the following
2
percentage of the weight calculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm of
cross-sectional area per meter run.
Nominal Size Tolerance
Upto and including 8.0 mm ± 4 percent
Over 8.0 mm ± 2.5 percent

Tests: Unless otherwise specified, the requirements of IS: 226-1975 shall apply. All
test pieces of bars shall be selected by the Engineer or his authorized representative
either:
a) From the cutting of bars, or
b) If he so desires, from any bar on the coil after it has been cut to the required or
specified length and test piece taken from any part of it.
In neither case, the test piece shall be detached from the bar or coil, except in the
presence of Engineer or his authorized representative.
Tensile test This shall be done as per IS: 226-1975 and IS: 1608-2005.
Bend Test This shall be done as per IS: 1599-1985.
Re-test This shall be done as per IS: 226-1975.

8.2.2.7.2.2 Hot Rolled Deformed Bars

The hot rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel deformed bars shall conform to IS:
1139-1966. The bars are provided with lugs, ribs or deformation on the surface of the
bar to minimize the slippage of the bar in concrete when hot rolled from the steel
billets.

84 of 194
 The physical requirements are mentioned in table below.
S. Property Nominal size of bars Mild Steel bars Medium Tensile
No. Steel bars
1. Ultimate tensile stress, All sizes. 42 55
2
kg/mm
2
2. Yield stress, kg/mm For bars up to and
(Min.) including 20 mm. 26 36
For bars over 20 mm 24 34.5
up to and including
40 mm.
For bars over 40 mm. 24 33
3. Elongation percent, - 23 20
(Min.) on gauge length
5.65, so where is the
cross sectional area of
the test piece.

Weight: The tolerance on weight for round and square bars shall be the following
2
percentage of the weight calculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm of
cross-sectional area per meter run.

Nominal Size Tolerance

Upto and including 8.0 mm ± 4 percent
Over 8.0 mm ± 2.5 percent

Tests:
Tensile test This shall be done as per IS: 1139-1966.
Bend Test This shall be done as per IS: 1599-1985.
Re-test This shall be done as per IS: 1139-1966.
8.2.2.7.2.3 Other Structural Steel sections
(i) M.S. Flats and Plates
This shall conform to IS: 1730-1989.
(ii) Angle Iron Tee Joists and Channels
This shall conform to IS: 808-1989.
8.2.2.7.2.4 Holding Down Bolts
(i) Holding down bolts (upto 0.50m)
(ii) Holding down bolts (beyond 0.50m length).
Anchor bolts shall be placed in the concrete foundations. These should be held in
positions with a wooden template. The anchor bolts shall be provided with suitable
timber mould or pipe sheave to allow for adjustment. The timber mould or pipe shall
be removed after initial set of concrete. The spaces left around anchor bolts shall
have a sloping channel leading to the side of the pedestal and on the underside of the
base plate to allow the spaces being grouted up after the base plate is fixed in the
position along with column footing. Grouting shall be of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement:
3 coarse sand) or as specified.
8.2.2.7.2.5 Rivets
Rivets shall be manufactured from rivet–bars of mild steel conforming to specification
given in IS: 1148-1982. These rivets shall have snap head, flat counter sunk head,
rounded counter sunk head or pan head as shown in drawing or as directed by the
Engineer.
8.2.2.7.2.6 Bolts and Nuts

85 of 194
 (a) Black Bolts: Also known as machine bolts, these bolts shall be made from rods
and they come from the rolling mills and are not finished to exact size. A lower
working stress is taken for these types of bolts than those of rivets and „turned
and fitted bolts‟.
(b) Turned and Fitted Bolts:
These bolts shall be made in an automatic lathe machine which turns the bolts to
exact diameter for these bolts the same suitable stress are allowed as for rivets.
All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal and of equal size, unless specified
otherwise. The screwed threads shall conform to IS: 1363-2002 and the threaded
surface shall not be tapered. The bolts shall be of such length as to project two
clear threads beyond the nuts when fixed in position, and these shall fit in the
holes without any shake. The nuts shall fit in the threaded ends of bolts properly.
Where turned and fitted bolt are required to be used in place of rivets, these shall
be provided with washers not less than 6 mm thick, so that the nut when
tightened, shall not bear on the unthreaded body of the bolt. Tapered washers
shall be provided for all heads and nuts bearing on leveled surfaces. The
threaded portion of the bolt shall not be within the thickness of the parts bolted
together. The faces of bolt heads and nuts abutting against steel members shall
be machine finished.
Where there is risk of the nuts being removed or becoming loose due to vibration
or reversal of stresses, these shall be secured from slackening by the use of lock
nuts, spring washers, cross cutting or hammering down of threads as directed by
the Engineer.
The nominal length of the bolt shall be of the distance from the underside of the
head to the head to the further end of the shank. The nominal diameter of the
bolt shall be the diameter at the shank above the screwed threads.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped in double boiled
linseed oil before use.
8.2.2.7.2.7 Tor Steel (Round)
Cold Twisted Bars shall conform to IS: 1786-2008. The physical properties for all
sizes of twisted bars, whether plain or deformed are mentioned below:
2
1. Tensile strength, kgf/mm , (Min.) 49.5
2
2. 0.2 percent proof stress kgf/mm (Min.) 42.5
3. Elongation, percent (Min.) on gauge length 5.65, so 14.5
where is the cross sectional area of the test piece.

Weight: The tolerance on the weight of bars shall be the following percent – age of the
weight calculated as above:
Nominal Size Tolerance
Upto and including 8.0 mm ± 4 percent
Over 8.0 mm ± 2.5 percent

Tests: Selection and preparation of test samples, unless otherwise specified in this
standard, the requirements of IS: 226-1975 shall apply. All test pieces shall be
selected by the Engineer or his authorized representative either:
a. From the cuttings of bars, or
b. if he so desires, from any bar after it has been cut to the required or specified size
and the test piece taken from any part of it.
The test piece obtained in accordance with as above shall be full sections of the
bars, as rolled and subsequently cold worked and shall be subjected to physical tests
without any further modifications. No reduction in size by machining or otherwise shall
be permissible. No test piece shall be annealed or otherwise subjected to best
treatment. Any straightening which a test piece may require shall be done cold.

86 of 194
 Tensile test This shall be done as per IS: 226-1975 and IS: 1608-2005.
Bend Test This shall be done as per IS: 1599-1985.
Re-bend test This shall be done as per IS: 1786-2008.
Re-test This shall be done as per IS: 1786-2008.
8.2.2.7.2.8 Storage of Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a way as to avoid distortion and prevent
deterioration from corrosion. Where directed, the reinforcing bars shall be given a
cement wash before stacking to prevent scale and rust.
Any reinforcement which has deteriorated or corroded or is considered defective by
the Engineer shall not be used in the work.
8.2.2.7.2.9 Mode of Measurements
All the products of steel as mentioned in Clause 8.2.2.7.2 above shall be measured in
„quintals‟.
8.2.3 Technical Specifications
8.2.3.1 Bending of Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel shall conform accurately to the dimensions given in the Bar Bending
Schedules shown on relevant drawings.
Bars shall be bent cold to the specified shape and dimensions or as directed by the
Engineer using a proper bar bender, operated by hand or power to attain proper radius of
bends.
Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
Bars bent during transport or handling shall be straightened before being used on work, they
shall not be heated to facilitate bending, unless permitted by Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, a U-type hook at the end of each bar shall invariably be
provided. The radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of the round bar
and the length of the straight part of the bar beyond the end of the curve shall be at least
four times the diameter of the round bar. In the case of bars which are not round and in the
case of deformed bars, the diameter shall be taken as the diameter of a circle having an
equivalent effective area.
The hook shall be suitably encased to prevent any splitting of the concrete.
A sketch of hook as shown as below:
Standard Hook

8.2.3.2 Placing of Reinforcement

All reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed in exact position shown on the drawings, and
shall be securely held in position during placing of concrete by annealed binding wire not
less than 1 mm in size and conforming to IS: 280 and by using stays blocks or metal chairs,
spacers, metal hangers, supporting wires or other approved devices at sufficiently close
intervals. Bars will not be allowed to sag between supports nor displaced during concreting
or any other operation over the work. All devices used for positioning shall be of non-
corrodible material. Wooden and metal supports will not extends to the surface of concrete,
except where shown on the drawings. Placing bars on layers of freshly laid concrete as the
work progresses for adjusting bar spacing will not be allowed. Pieces of broken stone or

87 of 194
 brick and wooden blocks shall not be used. Layers of bars shall be separated by spacer
bars, precast mortar blocks or other approved devices.
Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clean condition until
completely embedded in concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent any
displacement of reinforcement in concrete already placed.
To protect reinforcement form corrosion, concrete cover shall be provided as indicated on
the drawings. All bars protruding from concrete and to which other bars are to be spliced
and which are likely to be exposed for an indefinite period shall be protected by a thick coat
of neat cement grout.
In the case of columns and walls, vertical bars shall be kept in normal position with timber
templates having slots accurately cut in for bar position. Such templates shall be removed
after the concreting has progressed up to level just below them.
Bars crossing each other, where required, shall be secured by binding wire (annealed) of
size not less than 1 mm and conforming to IS: 280 in such a manner that they do not slip
over each other at the time of fixing and concreting.
As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case this is not possible, overlapping
of bars shall be done as directed by the Engineer. When practicable overlapping bars shall
not touch each other, but be kept apart by 25 mm or 1¼ times the maximum size of the
coarse aggregate whichever is greater, by concrete between them. Where not feasible,
overlapping bars shall be bound with annealed steel wire, not less than 1 mm thickness
twisted tight. The overlaps shall be staggered for different bars and located at points, along
the span where neither shear nor bending moment is maximum.
8.2.3.3 Laps in Bars
The length of lap in bars shall not be less than:
(a) For bars in tension:
Permissible stress
Bar diameter
Four times the bond stress given in table IS: 456 or 30 bar
diameter, whichever is greater.
(b) For bars in compression:
Permissible stress
Bar diameter Five times the bond stress given in table IS: 456 or 24 bar
diameter, whichever is greater.
8.2.3.4 Distances between Reinforcement Bars
(a) The distance between two parallel reinforcement bars shall be except as provided
under
not less than the greatest of the following three distances:
i) The diameter of either bar, if their diameters be equal.
ii) The diameter of the larger bar, if the diameter be unequal.
iii) 6 mm more than the nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate comprised in
such concrete.
Note: A greater distance should be provided when convenient.
(b) The vertical distance between two horizontal main steel reinforcements, or the
corresponding distance at right angles to two inclined main steel reinforcements shall
be not less than 13 mm except at a splice or lap and except where one of such
reinforcements is transverse to the other;
(c) The pitch of the main bars in a reinforced concrete solid slab shall not be
more than four times the effective depth of such slab.
(d) The pitch of distributing bars in a reinforced concrete solid slap shall not be more than
four times the effective depth of such slab.

8.2.3.5 Cover

88 of 194
 Reinforcement shall have concrete cover, and the thickness of such cover (exclusive of
plaster of other decorative finish) shall be as follows:
(a) at each end of a reinforcing bar not less than 25 mm nor less than twice the diameter of
such rod or bar;
(b) for a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a column not less than 38 mm, nor less than the
diameter of such rod or bar. In the case of columns of minimum dimension of 20 cm or
under, whose bars do not exceed 13 mm diameter, 25 mm cover may be used;
(c) for a longitudinal' reinforcing bar in a beam not less than 25 mm nor less than the
diameter of such rod or bar;
(d) for tensile, compressive, shear or other reinforcement in a slab, not less than 13 mm
nor less than the diameter of such reinforcement; and
(e) for any other reinforcement, not less than 13 mm nor less than the diameter of such
reinforcement.
(f) for all external work, for work against earth faces, and also for internal work where
there exist particularly corrosive conditions, the cover of the concrete shall be increased
by 13 mm over and above the figures given under (a) to (e) above.
Note: In case of rafts where resting on soil directly or on lean concrete, the cover for
reinforcement shall not be less than 75 mm or as mentioned in the drawings.
8.2.3.6 Distribution, Shrinkage Temperature Reinforcement
Reinforcement for distribution and shrinkage and temperature stresses normal to the
principal reinforcement shall be provided in floor and roof slabs where the principal
reinforcement extends in one direction only. The area of such reinforcement shall be not
less than 0.2 percent of the sectional area of concrete and in no case shall the pitch of such
reinforcing bars be greater than (a) 4 times the effective thickness of slab, or (b) 0.6 m
whichever is smaller. In case floor and roof slabs are exposed to sun, such steel shall not be
less than 0.4 percent. The reinforcement shall be provided as per drawing.
8.2.3.7 Reinforcement position, stirrups position, stirrups spacing & off sets in compression
reinforcement
8.2.3.7.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be placed on the neutral axis side of the longitudinal
reinforcement, and on the inner side of any curve in the longitudinal reinforcement.
8.2.3.7.2 Stirrups shall have their ends hooked at the position of anchorage. The tensile
reinforcement shall be within the loop of the stirrup and securely fastened thereto.
8.2.3.7.3 The spacing of stirrups shall not exceed a distance equal to the lever arm of resisting
moment.
8.2.3.7.4 Where changes in the cross section of a compression member occur, the longitudinal
reinforcement bars shall be slopped for the full length of the member or offset in a
region where lateral support is afforded. Where offset, the slope of the inclined
portion from the axis of the member shall not be more than 1 in 6.
8.2.3.8 Effective Diameter of a Bar
For purposes of this section, the effective diameter of a reinforcement bar shall be
calculated as below:
a) For a bar, the cross-sectional area of which is constant along its length and in the case
of deformed bars, the pattern of deformation of which is such that by visual inspection
the cross-sectional area is substantially uniform along the length of the bar, the
effective diameter is that of a circle having the same area as the cross section of the
bar.
b) For a bar, the cross-sectional area of which varies along its length, the effective
diameter is that of a circle having an area equal to the least area of any cross section of
the bar excluding deformation ribs. An allowance not exceeding 3 percent may,
however, be added to the least area of the cross section on account of the ribs or any
non-continuous sides or both.
8.2.3.9 Coupling and Welding of Bar
Whenever indicated on the drawings or desired by the Engineer, bars shall be joined by
couplings which shall have a cross-section sufficient to transmit the full strength of bars. The

89 of 194
 ends the bars that are joined by coupling shall be upset for a sufficient length so that the
effective cross-section at the base of threads is not less than the normal cross-section of the
bar. The threads shall be standard whiteworth threads. Steel for coupling shall conform to
IS: 226.
When premised or specified on the drawings joints of reinforcement bars shall be butt-
welded so as to transmit their full strength. Welded joints shall preferably be located at
points where steel will not be subject to more than 75 percent of the maximum permissible
stresses and welds so staggered that, at any one section, not more than 20 percent of the
rods are welded. Only electric arc welding using a process which excludes air from the
molten metal and conforms to any or all other special provisions for the work will be
accepted. Suitable means shall be provided for holding the bars securely in position during
welding. It shall be ensured that no voids are left in welding and when welding is done in 2
or 3 stages, previous surface shall be cleaned properly. Ends of the bars shall be cleaned of
all loose scale, rust, grease, paint and other foreign matter before welding. Only, competent
welders shall be employed on the work.
The M.S. electrodes used for welding shall conform to IS: 814.
Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested. Specimens shall be taken from the actual
site and their number and frequency of tests shall be as directed by the Engineer.
8.2.3.10 Fire Resistance
Where fire resistance is an important feature of the design, the concrete cover may have to
be increased; such increase depends upon the quality of aggregate and upon the severity
and duration of the possible fire to which the structure may be subjected. Aggregates having
low co-efficient of expansion e.g. formed slag, blast furnace slag, crushed brick aggregate,
well-burnt clinker and lime stone are desirable for the fire protection. The siliceous
aggregates e.g. flint, gravel, granite and other crushed natural stones other than lime stone
should not be used where fire hazard is greater, because the quartz of which they largely
consist has high co-efficient of expansion and, under heat, will expand and crack the
concrete exposing the reinforcement to direct heat.
8.2.3.11 Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
For this, reference may be made to relevant IS Codes.
8.2.3.12 Tying and Positioning
Reinforcement shall always be accurately positioned and secured against displacement by
tying with soft iron wire of not less than 1.00 mm and shall be supported in position clear of
the forms, by concrete or metal chains or spacers or by metal hangers.
8.2.3.13 Future Bonding and Substitutions
Exposed reinforcement bars intended for bonding with future extensions shall be protected
from corrosion.
Substitution of bars of different sizes than specified will be permitted only if authorized by
the Engineer. If steel is substituted, it shall have an area equivalent to the design area or
large, provided further that the safe bond stress is not exceeded, and also the effective
depth is not less that provided in the design.

8.2.3.14 Splices
As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. Splicing of bars except where such is
shown on the plan will not be permitted without the approval of the Engineer. Splices shall
be staggered and shall not be made at points of maximum stress.
8.2.3.15 Relative Positions
Tensile reinforcement shall always be placed within the loop of stirrups and shall be
securely fastened thereto. Stirrups shall have their ends hooked at the position of
anchorage. Transverse reinforcement shall always be placed on the neutral axis side of the
longitudinal reinforcement, and on the inside of any bend in it.
8.2.3.16 To Conform to the Drawings
Reinforcement shall be carefully formed to the dimensions and positions indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

90 of 194
8.2.4 Form Work
The form work shall be done as per specification described in Section 7 above.
8.2.5 Inspection
Full details of the numbers, sizes, lengths, weights, laps, welds, spacing of bars places in
position in different parts of the work shall be recorded, certified and signed by the Engineer
to show that all reinforcement has been placed correctly as per the sanctioned drawing or as
ordered by the Engineer in writing before placing concrete. No concrete shall be deposited
until the Engineer has inspected and certified the correctness of reinforcement, recorded the
steel reinforcements and given permission to place the concrete in writing. After the
approval of reinforcement by the Engineer, it will be the contractor's responsibility to see that
the reinforcement spacing and arrangements are not tampered with in any way before
concreting.
8.2.6 Concreting
8.2.6.1 Concrete
Concrete mix shall be as specified, and it shall conform to the relevant specifications for
cement concrete. Concrete shall be mixed by mechanical mixers. The Engineer may,
however, permit hand mixing under special circumstances by an order in writing.
8.2.6.2 Consistency
For reinforced cement concrete work the general requirement is that the concrete shall flow
sluggishly into the forms and around the reinforcement without any segregation of coarse
aggregate from the mortar and fill the form work completely without forming honey-combed
concrete mass. The degree of consistency, which shall depend on the nature of work and
whether the concrete is vibrated or hand tamped, shall be determined by slump/Vee Bee
Consistometer test as given in section 8.1.10 above.
8.2.6.3 Strength of Concrete
Reference may be made to Clause No. 8.1.4 above.
8.2.6.4 Placing of Concrete
Concrete shall only be commenced after the Engineer has inspected the form work and
reinforcement as placed and passed the same. Form work shall be clean and free from all
shavings, saw-dust, pieces of wood, or other foreign material, and shall be treated as
described under section 7 'Form Work' above.
The concrete shall be gently deposited (and not thrown) as nearly as practicable, in its final
position to avoid re-handling and shall be so deposited that segregation of aggregates does
not occur. In deep trenches and footings concrete shall be placed though chutes as directed
by the Engineer. In case of columns and walls, formwork shall be so adjusted that the
vertical drop of concrete is not more than 1.5 meters.
In case of concreting of slab and beams, wooden, plank cat-walks supported directly on the
form work by means of wooden blocks or logs shall be provided to convey the concrete to
the place of deposition, so as not to disturb the reinforcement in anyway. No one shall be
allowed to walk over the reinforcement.
In case of columns and walls, it is desirable to place concrete in full height in one operation,
so as to avoid construction joints, but the rate of concreting in the vertical direction shall be
restricted to one meter per hour.
It is necessary that the time between mixing (adding water) and placing of concrete shall not
exceed 20 minutes so that the initial setting process is not interfered with.
Concreting, one commenced, shall be carried on continuously to completion useless
otherwise directed.
0
During cold weather, concreting shall not be done when the temperature falls below 4.5 C.
The concrete placed shall be protected against frost by suitable covering. Concrete
damaged by frost shall be removed and work redone. During hot weather, precautions shall
0
be taken to see that the temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38 C. No concrete
shall be laid within half an hour of the closing time of the day, unless permitted by the
Engineer.

91 of 194
 All bars projecting from piers, columns, beams, slabs etc. to which other bars and concrete
are to be attached or bounded to later on, shall be protected with a coat of thin neat cement
grout if the bars are not likely to be incorporated with the succeeding mass of concrete
within the following 10 days. This coat of thin neat cement shall be removed before
concreting.
8.2.6.5 Compaction
(a) The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted as the depositing proceeds by means of a
suitable type of vibrators to get a dense concrete. The vibrators shall maintain the
whole concrete under treatment in an adequate state of agitation, such that declaration
and effective compaction is attained at a rate commensurate with the supply of
concrete from the mixers. The vibration shall continue during the whole period occupied
by placing of concrete, the vibrator being adjusted so that the center of vibration
approximates to the center of the mass being compacted at the time of placing.
The Engineer may relax this condition of using vibrators at his discretion for certain
items, depending on the thickness of the members and feasibility of vibration the same.
For items, where the vibrators are not be used, it shall be the duty of the connector, to
take the prior permission of the Engineer in writing before the start of the work. In
circumstances, the concrete when laid in its final position shall be punned or tamped in
thickness not exceeding 15 cm (confined to only 7.5 cm when working in the vicinity of
reinforcement bars). Compaction shall be arrived out by skilled workmen with hammers
and rods. It shall be continued until the concrete is thoroughly consolidated and is in
perfect contact with reinforcement. The concrete shall be worked to the face of the
forms. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the concrete is worked well into the
bottom of all cavities and also to prevent distortion of rods while ramming around them
and particularly to avoid pressing the rods close to form work.
(b) Concrete shall be judged to be compacted when the mortar fills the spaces between
the coarse aggregate and begins to cream up to form an even surface. When this
condition has been attained the vibration shall be stopped in case of vibrating tables
and external vibrators, and needle of vibrators, withdrawn slowly at the rate of 15 cm
per minute in case of internal vibrators. The internal vibrators shall first be withdrawn at
the rate of 15 cm per minute after which the external vibrators shall be stopped so that
no depression is left in the body of the concrete. The maximum task of the vibrator shall
be the compaction of 1.88 cubic meters of concrete per hour per kilo watt (kW) rating of
the vibrator. The specific instructions of the makers of the particular type of vibrator
used shall be strictly complied with.
Compactions shall be completed before the initial setting starts i.e. within 30 minutes of
addition of water to the dry mixture. During compaction it shall be ensured that the
needle vibrators are not applied on reinforcement which is likely to destroy the bond
between concrete and reinforcement.
8.2.6.6 Joints
Joints shall be provided as shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
8.2.6.6.1 Construction Joint
For large works, where it is not practicable to carry on concreting continuously, the
position of leaving off points or construction joints and the details of which shall be
shown in the drawings or as indicated in Fig. 5.26 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1,
2009) or as directed by the Engineer. Such joints shall be kept to the minimum and
shall not be located in valleys. The joints shall be kept at places where the shear
force is the minimum and these shall be straight and at right angles to the direction of
main reinforcement. In case of columns the joints shall be horizontal and 10 to 15 cm
below the bottom of the beam running into the column head and the portion of the
column between the stepping off level and the top of the slab shall be concreted with
the beam.
When stopping the concrete on a vertical plane in slab and beams, an approved stop-
board shall be placed with necessary slots for reinforcement bars to pass freely
without bending or any other obstruction. The construction joint shall be keyed by
providing a triangular or trapezoidal filled nailed on the stop-board. Inclined or feather

92 of 194
 joints shall not be permitted. Any concrete following through the joints of stop-board
be removed soon after the initial set. When concrete is stopped on a horizontal plane,
the surface shall be roughened and cleaned after the initial set.
Walls shall be left off at any convenient height but the last layer shall be at the same
level all-round the structure.
When the work has to be resumed, on a surface which has hardened (i.e. more than
48 hours old), the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush and loose particles
removed. It shall then be covered with a 13 mm layer of freshly mixed mortar
comprising of cement and coarse sand in the same ratio as the cement and coarse
sand in the concrete mix shall be applied before fresh concrete is laid.
When the work has to be resumed on a surface, which has not fully hardened (i.e.
less than 48 hours old) the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush and loose
particles removed. The surface shall first be thoroughly wetted and all free water
removed. A coat of neat cement slurry at the rate of 2.75 kg of cement per square
meter shall then be applied on the roughened surface before fresh concrete is laid.
8.2.6.6.2 Expansion Joint
Expansion joints shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. The filling of these
joints with bitumen filler, bitumen felt or any such material and the provision of copper
or brass plate etc. (as may be specified) shall be described and paid for separately.
8.2.6.6.3 Joints in Floors
Construction joints in floors shall be located near the middle of spans of slabs,
beams, or girders, unless a beam intersects a girder that shall be offset a distance
equal to twice the width of the beam. Adequate provision shall be made for shear by
use of inclined reinforcement.
8.2.6.6.4 Joints in Columns
Joints in columns shall be made at the underside of the floor. Haunches and column
capitals shall be considered as continuous with, and part of the floor.
8.2.6.6.5 Expansion Joints in Long Structures
Structures exceeding 46 m in length shall be divided by one or more expansion joints.
Structures in which marked changes in plan dimensions, take place abruptly shall be
provided with expansion joints at the sections where such changes occur.
Length of a structure where expansion joint has to be provided shall be determined
after taking into consideration various factors, such as temperature, exposure, to
weather, the time and season of the laying of the concrete etc. Under no
circumstances shall be structure of 46 m or more be without an expansion joint.
8.2.6.6.6 Expansion Joints in Bridges
Wherever expansion joints are provided in the main structure of a bridge, expansion
joints shall be provided in the concrete flooring immediately above them, such joints
should be constructed with two sheets of tarred paper previously laid on the support
and be filled with preformed plastic material 13 mm thick which should be placed in
the forms before concrete is laid so as to give a projection above the top surface of
the concrete; this projection being trimmed of flush with the surface after the concrete
has set.
8.2.6.6.7 Continuous Work Joints to be at Contractor‟s Cost
Concrete shall be deposited continuously and as rapidly as practicable, until the unit
of operation, approved by the Executive Engineer, is completed. Construction joints,
as at points not provided for in the drawings shall therefore be deemed to be for the
convenience of the Contractor and special work entailed shall be carried out by him
within the rate.
8.2.6.6.8 Construction Joints Position
Where construction joints are unavoidable, concreting shall be stopped as near as
possible at the center of beams or slabs and not over the support, in order to make
joint whose plane in normal to the principal lines of stress and at right angles to the
span. Construction joints shall coincide with structural joints wherever possible. If

93 of 194
 made elsewhere, they shall be so located and made to impair the strength and/or
appearance of the structure in the least possible manner. Construction joints are
subject to the approval of the Executive Engineer with respect to their position,
number and construction.
8.2.6.6.9 Horizontal Joints
Where resistance to horizontal shear is essential, a key shall be formed by partially
embedding reinforcing rods, or by forming mortices in the concrete.
8.2.6.6.10 Sliding Joints
When sliding joints are called for on the plans, the seat of the sliding joint shall he
finished to a smooth plane surface and allowed to harden. The seat shall be covered
with the required thickness of bituminous material or otherwise treated as specified
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
8.2.6.6.11 Concreting under Water/Extreme Weather Conditions
For this, reference may be made to Clause 8.1.14 and 8.1.15 above.
8.2.6.7 Finishing
(a) In case of roof slabs the top surface shall be finished even and smooth with wooden
trowel, before the concrete begins to set.
(b) The surface that becomes exposed on the removal of forms shall be examined by the
Engineer, before any defects are made good. Projections due to defective
workmanship on the concrete surface shall be removed by careful chiselling work that
has sagged or bulged out, or contains honey-combing shall be rejected. Honey-
combing of minor nature shall be accepted. Where so stated in the description of the
item, the exposed surface of R.C.C. work shall then be plastered or rendered with
cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand) to give a smooth and even surface true to
line and form.
Note: The tops of slabs, treads and landings, faces of risers in stairs and vertical faces
of lintels shall not be considered as exposed surface.
Where the exposed surface is to be finished otherwise than plastering with cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand), deduction for not plastering with cement mortar 1: 3
shall be made if the same stand included in the rate for the item of R.C.C. work and the
surface finishing as actually done shall be paid for separately.
(c) The exposed surface which is to receive plaster or where it is to be joined with brick
masonry wall, shall be properly roughened immediately after the removal of form work,
taking care to remove the laitance completely without disturbing the concrete. The
roughening shall be done by hacking, wire-brushing etc. as necessary. Before the
surface is plastered it shall be cleaned and wetted so as to give to give good bond
between concrete and plaster.
The R.C.C. work shall be done carefully so that the average thickness of plaster
required for finishing the surface and bringing it shape and form is not more than 6 mm.
(d) The surface of R.C.C. slab on which the cement concrete or mosaic floor is to be laid
shall be roughened with brushes while the concrete is green. This shall be done
carefully without disturbing the concrete. Before laying the floor, the laitance shall be
removed, the surface of slab hacked and a coat of cement slurry at 2.75 kg of cement
per square meter shall be applied, so as to get a good bond between R.C.C. and
concrete floor. The cost of applying cement slurry shall be paid for separately.
8.2.6.8 Curing
Curing shall be as per Clause No. 8.1.19 above.
8.2.6.9 Basis and Standard of Acceptance
This shall be as per Clause No. 8.1.20 above.
8.2.6.10 Bonding New and Old Work
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be
roughened. It shall then be swept clean, thoroughly wetted, and covered with a 13 mm layer
of mortar composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the cement and sand in the

94 of 194
 concrete mix. This 13 mm layer of mortar shall be freshly mixed and played immediately
before the placing of the concrete.
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the
wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of
particulars of coarse aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water
removed. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement grout. The first layer of
concrete to be placed on this surface shall not exceed 15 cm in thickness, and shall be well
rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.
8.2.6.11 Maintenance
Ordinarily maintenance will not be needed for dense concrete constructed in accordance
with these specifications. Where however, the concrete is exposed to attack by weather or
chemical action, maintenance may be needed. Protective coatings i.e. cement-based paints
etc. will delay or prevent deterioration of the concert in such cases. The protective coatings
to be used will depend upon the particular form of exposure, but it should be durable and
able to adjust itself to elastic and thermal movements of the structure. All protective coatings
should be maintained in good condition by renewed application during the life of the
structure.
Painting of concrete structures shall conform to specification given in Clause 14.3 below.
After every three year a periodical check should be made to detect any excessive cracking
or other defect or the concrete.
Where corrosion of the bars has caused staining or has loosened the concrete cover, the life
of the structure can be considerably prolonged by exposing, cleaning and recovering the
bars. Such structures should however be tested occasionally for safety by carrying out load
tests. The reinforcement should also be checked frequently to find out corrosion and loosing
of the concrete cover.
8.2.7 Measurements
8.2.7.1 Measurements shall be done in cubic meter. The measurements for the following items shall
be done separately:
i) Foundations, footings, bases of columns and the like and mass concrete.
ii) Walls (any thickness but not less than 0.10 m thickness) including attached pilasters,
buttresses, plinth and string courses etc., from top of foundation upto floor two level.
iii) Suspended floor, roofs, landings, shelves and their supports balconies, girders,
bressumers and cantilevers upto floor two level.
iv) Columns, pillars, posts and struts, upto floor two level.
v) Stair cases (except spiral stair cases) excluding landing but including preparing of top
surface and finishing of nosing upto floor two level.
vi) Spiral stair cases including landing etc. upto floor two level.
vii) Arches upto floor two level.
viii) Chimney and shaft upto floor two level.
ix) Well steining.
x) Vertical and horizontal (thickness not more than 0.10 m) individually or forming box
louvers and projected band upto floor two level.
xi) Lintels, beams, girders, bressumers and cantilevers upto floor two level.
xii) Chajjas.
xiii) Kerbs, steps and the like.
xiv) String courses, coping, bed plates, anchor blocks, plain window sills and the like.
xv) Small arched lintels not exceeding 1.5 m clear span over ceilings, copings and the
like.
xvi) Moulding as in cornices, window sills etc. exceeding 15 cm in girth.
xvii) Mouldings as in cornices, window sills etc. not exceeding 15 cm in girth.
xviii) Eaves board.
Reinforced concrete shall be measured as per Clause No.8.1.21 above.

95 of 194
8.2.7.2 No deductions shall be made for the following:
i) Ends of dis-similar materials (e.g. joists, beams, posts, girders, rafters, purisms
trusses, corbels, steps etc.) upto 500 sq.cm. in section.
ii) Opening upto 0.1 sqm.
Note: In calculating area of openings the size of opening includes the thickness of
any separate lintels or sills. No extra labour or forming such opening or voids shall be
measured.
iii) The volume occupied by reinforcement shall not be deducted; and
iv) The volume occupied by drainage, water pipes, conduits, etc. not exceeding 100 sqm
each in cross-sectional area shall not be deducted.
8.2.7.3 Nothing extra shall be paid for leaving and finishing such cavities and holes.
All plain, rebated, grooved, locking and tongued joints shall be deemed to be included in the
process of process of laying.
8.2.7.4 Walls, suspended floors, landings and projecting proration of chajjas of average thickness
less than 15 cm. shall be grouped separately.
8.2.7.5 The slab shall be taken as running continuously through and the beam as the portion below
the slab except in case of inverted beam in which case the measurements shall be taken as
per Clause 8.2.7.6 below.
8.2.7.6 In floor one column shall be measured form the top of footings or pedestals to the floor two
level of the floor level. In the case of columns for flat slabs the flare of the columns shall be
included with the column for measurement.
Beams shall be measured from face to face of the columns and shall include haunches, if
any, between the columns and beams. The depth of the beams shall be measured from the
bottom of the slab the bottom of the beam except in case of inverted beam, where it shall be
measured from top of slab to top beam. The cross-section of the beam shall be the actual
cross-section below or above the slab. Shaded portions in sketches below illustrate
measurement of cross-section of beams for a few typical cases.
8.2.7.7 Walls and retaining walls shall be measured from the top of footings.
8.2.7.8 Chajja along with its beaming wall shall be measured in cubic meter nearest to two places of
decimal. When chajja is combined with beam or lintel, the common portion shall be
measured as chajja when chajja or balcony is in continuation of roof of suspended floor, it
shall be measured upto the central line of bearing.
Whenever vertical fins and chajjas are combined, the chajjas shall be measured clear
between the fins. The vertical fins shall be measured through.
8.2.7.9 The thickness of R.C.C. work shall measure correct to a 0.5 cm. Other dimensions of R.C.C.
work shall be measured correct to a cm.
For measurements of R.C.C. under water, reference may be made to Clause No. 8.1.21
above.
8.2.8 Rate
The rate includes all operations as described above, but excludes the cost of formwork and
reinforcement, including bending, binding and placing in position unless otherwise specified.
The rate includes the cost of materials and labour including water charges to be carried out
for different operations. It also includes the contractor's profit and overhead charges @ 10%
and 5% respectively.
Separate rate has been provided for providing mild steel/tor steel reinforcement for R.C.C.
work including bending, binding and placing in position complete upto floor level two.
In case water borne aggregates to be used instead of graded/crushed stone aggregates, the
rates shall be suitably decreased as mentioned in the applicable Uttarakhand PWD
Schedule of Rates (2014-2015) of Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work
locations of Guptkashi, Sonprayag, Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan],
under Block 17-Agastyamuni (for Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for
Work location of Jakholi).
8.3 Finishing

96 of 194
8.3.1 Rendering
The top of suspended floors, landings and stair cases, (treads and risers) shall be rendered
smooth with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 sand). The floating coat of neat cement shall
also be applied and then the surface should be cured properly. The surface shall be
protected with a layer of 7.5 cm earth laid over 15 mm layers of sand in case of suspended
floors, landings and steps etc. After the proper curing has been done, the earth and sand
etc. should be removed subsequently and all the surfaces should be cleaned.
The measurement is to be done in square meters and the rate includes all the operations
described above.
8.3.2 Application of cement slurry
The surface of R.C.C. slab on which the cement concrete or mosaic floor is to be laid shall
be roughened with brushes while the concrete is green. This shall be done carefully without
disturbing the concrete. Before laying the floor, the laitance shall be removed, the surface of
slab hacked and a coat of cement slurry at 2.75 kg of cement per square meter shall be
applied so as to get a good bond between R.C.C. and concrete floor. The cost of applying
cement slurry shall be paid for separately.
The rate includes cost of cement, carriage by mechanical transport upto 1 km and by head
load upto 100 meters, water charges, contractor's profit @ 10% and over-head charges @
5%.
8.3.3 Finishing on exposed surfaces
This shall be as per Clause 8.2.6.7 above.
The rate includes cost of materials, labour, water charges, and contractor‟s profit @ 10%
and over-head charges @ 5%.
8.3.4 Plaster drip
Plaster drip or throating and mouldings to R.C.C. chajja shall be provided as per the
approved drawings or as per the direction of the Engineer. The rate includes cost of labor,
Impregnated fiber board
The impregnated fiber board shall conform to requirement of IS: 1838 and shall be got
approved from the Engineer. The joint filler shall consist of large pieces and assembling of
small pieces shall be avoided. The rate includes the cost of impregnated fiber board, primer
ceiling compound and labour. The rate also includes contractor's profit and over-head
charges etc.

8.4 Faulty Concrete Construction

8.4.1 Failures vs. Defects
When one considers the many possibilities for slighting or improperly performing the work of
making concrete, actual failures are relatively rare. Concrete may have been either deficient
in cement, made with dirty aggregates, drowned with water, or allowed to dry out-but unless
two or several of these occur at the same time, failure will not usually result. It is believed
that poor work is generally due to lack of chemical knowledge rather than to actual
dishonesty.
8.4.2 Defects
Defects, however, occur in most structures which are otherwise well built and which are
satisfactorily performing their intended service. Sometimes these defects are so many and
so glaring that the structure may become unfit for use, but more often they are conspicuous
rather than serious. In any case, it is worthwhile to avoid defects by incorporating sound
ingredients into a uniformly dense mixture of concrete and by placing and curing this mixture
with reasonable care.
The various operations involved in making concrete are well known to builders. Good results
are obtained not so much because of what is done as because of how it is done.
Workmanship is the key note to a first-class job, and general carelessness of haste is the
sure forerunner of defects. The fact that parts (usually nine-tenths or more) of even a
defective structure are sound and hard shows that the same builder could get satisfactory
results when the requirements for good concrete were met.

97 of 194
 This chapter is not intended either in criticism or commendation of concrete, but to point out
that too often small structures are built of needlessly low quality and that consequently they
are unsightly and short-lived. It is hoped that builders generally may become dissatisfied
with the lax standards of the past twenty yearly and will in the future build concrete of the
high quality which can be obtained when desired, as shown by numerous examples.
In addition to the specific causes leading to poor results listed in the following table, it may
be said generally that large contributing factors are aiming at too low quality and lack of
proper supervision and inspection.

9 STONE WORK – MASONRY AND SOLING

9.1 Materials
9.1.1 Stone
Stone used for stone masonry shall comply with specifications given below.
9.1.1.1 Quarried Stone in Blocks (Undressed)
The stone shall of the specified variety (such as granite, trap stone, sand stone, quartzite,
etc.) The stone shall be obtained only from an approved quarry and shall be hard, sound,
durable and free from defects like cavities cracks, sand holes, flaws, injurious veins, patches
of loose or soft material, etc. Stone with round surface shall not be more than 5 percent
when tested in accordance with IS: 1124-1974 (Method of test for water absorption of
natural building stones). The minimum crushing strength of building stone shall be 200
kg/sqm unless higher minimum strength is specified in any particular case. All stone shall be
obtained by quarrying large massive rock unless otherwise specified.
9.1.1.2 Ordinary Quarried Stone
This stone shall be of the same specification as per item 9.1.1.1 above. This type of stone
shall however be used in masonry or filling voids etc.
9.1.1.3 Through Bond Stones and Quoins
9.1.1.3.1 Bond Stones
The Bond Stones or through stones running right across the thickness of the walls,
shall be provided in walls upto 600 mm thick. In thicker walls 2 stones over-lapping
each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided across the thickness of the wall to
form Bond Stone. There shall be at least 1 bond stone for 0.5 square meter of wall
surface. The bond stone marked by the distinguishing latter during construction for
subsequent verification and shall be laid staggered in subsequent layers.
In case of highly absorbent type of stones (Porous lime stone and sand stone etc.)
the bond stone shall extend about 2/3rd into the walls. Through stones in such cases
may give high to dump penetration. Therefore, for all thicknesses of such walls a set
of 2 or more bond stone over-lapping each other by atleast 150 mm shall be
provided. Where Bond Stones of suitable lengths are not available Cement Concrete
Block of 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) shall be used.
Through and Bond Stone shall broadly be staggered separately from ordinary
building stone and the stack shall be marked to distinguish it from the rest.

9.1.1.3.2 Quoins
The Quoins or corner stone shall be selected neatly dressed· with Hammer and or
chisel to form required corner angle and laid header and stretcher alternately. The
bed and top surfaces of Quoins shall be chisel dressed to give horizontal point. The
quoins shall have uniform chisel draft of at least 25 mm width at 4 edges of each
exposed face of the edges of the same face being in one plane. No quoins stone
shall be smaller than 0.025 cubic meter (25 dm) in volume and it shall also not be
less than 300 mm in length, 25% of it being not less than 500 mm in length.

98 of 194
 9.1.1.4 Stone for Soling/Filling Crates etc.
9.1.1.4.1 Source
Stone for soling/filling crates shall be obtained from the quarries/ sources as specified
in the Contract. When the source/quarry is not specified these shall be obtained from
the source as, approved by the Engineer, from which the best material nearly used
for the purpose in the locality are obtained. The sample of the material shall be kept
in the custody of Engineer and all subsequent supplies shall conform strictly to the
sample.
9.1.1.4.2 Stone for Soling
9.1.1.4.2.1 General
Stone for soling shall be granite, trap, basalt, lime stone, laterite, Kankar or any other
as indicated. Stone shall be clean, hard, free from laminations, unsound fragment and
free from decay and weathered stuff.
9.1.1.4.2.2 Collection
The soling stone shall be collected in the requisite quantity to give the specified depth
after laying. Material collected, in excess, shall not be paid for and if not removed
within 1 month to field measurement, shall become the property of Govt. The
collection shall begin in each km from the end farthest from the source of supply and
shall proceed continually till the km has been filled.
9.1.1.4.2.3 Size
Soling stone shall not be less than 4 kg in weight or more than the depth of the soling
in thickness with only enough small stones to fill interstices after the large stones
have been hand packed in laying. Soling stone shall not be more than 23 cm nor less
than 10 cm in any direction.
9.1.1.4.2.4 Tests
Different tests shall be as per requirements of Specification for Road and Bridge
Work (MORT&H) published by Indian Road Congress (IRC).
9.1.1.4.2.5 Royalty etc.
Unless otherwise specified all charges for royalty, forest and other taxes, octroi etc.
shall be paid by the Contractor and are included in the rates.
9.1.1.4.3 Stone for Filling Crates
9.1.1.4.3.1 General
The Stone used in Apron shall be sound and durable and fairly regular in shape.
Stone subject to marked deterioration by water or weather shall not be used.
The size of stone shall be as large as possible. In no case any fragment shall be less
than 40 kg. The specific gravity of stones shall be as high as possible and it shall not
be less than 2.50.

9.1.1.4.3.2 Royalty etc.

Unless otherwise specified all charges for royalty, forest and other taxes, octroi etc.
shall be paid by the Contractor and are included in the rates.
9.1.1.5 Stone for Pitching
9.1.1.5.1 General
Stone subject to marked deterioration by water or weather will not be accepted. The
stone shall be sound, hard, durable and fairly regular in shape. The best stone
procurable shall be supplied and in no case shall any fragment weigh less than 40 kg

99 of 194
 unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The size of spalls shall be minimum 25
mm and shall be suitable to fill the voids in the pitching.
9.1.1.5.2 Royalty
Unless otherwise specified all charges for royalty, forest and other taxes, octroi etc.
shall be paid by the Contractor and are included in the rates.
9.1.2 Mortar
Mortar used shall comply with specifications as given in section 8.2.2.5 above.
9.1.3 Concrete
Concrete used shall comply with specifications as given in section 8 above.
9.1.4 Sand
Sand shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.2.2 above.
9.1.5 Water
Water for stone masonry shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.3 above.
9.2 Stone Masonry
9.2.1 General specifications
9.2.1.1 Dressing
Dressing of stones shall be as specified for an individual type of masonry work and it shall
conform to the general requirement for dressing of stones covered in this chapter. Other
specific requirements are covered separately with respect to particular type of stone work.
9.2.1.2 Bond stone
Through and bond stones shall broadly be stacked separately from ordinary building stones
and the stack shall be marked to distinguish it from the rest. Marks shall be made on each
bond.
9.2.1.3 Wetting of stones
All stones for masonry in cement or lime mortar shall be thoroughly wetted before being laid
to prevent absorption of water from mortar and the masonry work shall be kept wet while in
progress. Care being taken to avoid washing mortar out of the joints.
9.2.1.4 Preparation of bed
Stones shall be laid on their natural quarry beds so that the pressure borne by them is
normal to the beds. The courses shall be perpendicular to the pressure to be borne and in
case of batter walls, beds of stones and the plane of courses should be at right angles to the
batter.
9.2.1.5 Laying of stones
Wherever practicable, the whole masonry in any structure shall be carried up at a uniform
level throughout. Where breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be made in gradual steps.
Cross walls shall be carefully bonded into main wall and all junctions of walls to be formed at
the time the walls are being built.
9.2.1.6 Work to proceed uniformly
Wherever practicable, the whole masonry in any structure shall be carried up at a uniform
level throughout. Where breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be made in gradual steps.
Cross walls shall be carefully bonded into main wall and all junctions of walls to be formed at
the time the walls are being built.
9.2.1.7 Bonds and Joints
Joints parallel to the external pressure shall be staggered and should not be continuous. In
other words, the stone in any course shall overlap the joint in the course below. In order to

100 of 194
 obtain sufficient transverse bond, the prescribed number of headers shall extend through
the entire thickness of these walls or from outside face to a prescribed depth within thick
walls. Such headers are termed as through or bond stones. The practice of building two thin
faces of stone masonry tied with occasional through stones and filling up the space between
the masonry faces with fine, small or dry stone backing shall not be permitted. To obtain
proper bond at angle junction of walls, the stone at each alternate shall be carried into each
of the respective walls.
All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and in vertical joints and settled carefully in
place with a wooden mallet immediately on placement so that it is solidly bedded in mortar
before the same has set. Clean chips and spalls shall be wedged into the mortar joints and
beds wherever necessary, to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar. Whenever foundation
masonry is laid directly on rock, the face stones of the first course shall be dressed to fit into
the rock snugly when pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. No dry or hollow
space shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all the embedded
faces completely covered with mortar.
Courses of the masonry shall ordinarily be pre-determined. They shall generally be of the
same height. Where there is variation in the height of courses, larger courses shall be
placed at lower levels, with height of courses decreasing gradually towards the top, unless
otherwise specifically mentioned in the contract.
All necessary chases for joggles, dowels and cramps shall be formed in the stone
beforehand. Bell shaped bond stones or headers shall not be used. In case of thick walls,
bond stones shall overlap each other in their arrangement.
All connected masonry in structure shall be carried up at one uniform level throughout as far
as possible, but when breaks, are unavoidable, the masonry shall be raked in sufficient long
steps to facilitate jointing of new work with old. The stepping of raking shall not more than
0
45 with the horizontal. Wing walls, abutments and piers etc., shall be carried up truly plumb
or to the specified batter.
Face work and hearting shall be brought up evenly. The top of each course, however, shall
not be levelled up by use of flat chips.
9.2.1.8 Quoins
Quoins shall be laid as header and stretcher in alternate courses. Quoins and jambs shall
be dressed at a right angle to the bed, the corners being straight and vertical. In the case of
masonry with hammer dressed stones, a chisel draft 2.5 cm wide shall be given on each
external face to allow of accurate plumbing. If for architectural reasons, chisel draft is not to
be allowed, the corner shall be dressed to a vertical line as best as possible. The cost of
quoins and jambs is included in the rate for masonry.
9.2.1.9 Plumb bob and straight edges
In case of vertical walls, all masonry shall be taken up truly plumb and each set of four
masons shall be provided with a plumb bob and straight edges. In case of default the
Assistant Engineer will supply these, deducting the cost from the Contractor.
9.2.1.10 Lintels and inside stones
All Iintels and inside stones not to be plastered over shall be of the full thickness of the wall
in which they are laid, including the plastered face or faces with a grooved joint at the
junction of the plaster and stone.
9.2.1.11 Rounded corners
Interior and exterior-corners of walls and projecting angles shall be rounded if specified.
The drawings shall also indicate the shapes and radii of rounded corners. Rounding of
corners is payable separately in case of exposed masonry, but not in case of masonry to be
plastered.
9.2.1.12 Cleaning work and striking joints

101 of 194
 Mortar shall be confined to the joints and none should be smeared over faces of stones that
are not to be plastered. If some mortar does fall on the stones during construction, it should
be removed immediately and not allowed to set. Where pointing is not provided to be carried
out afterwards, the joints in each day's work shall be struck by a separate mason following
up the masonry work. This shall be paid for separately by superficial measurements as
striking joints.
9.2.1.13 Fixtures
All iron, stone, concrete or other fixtures, returns, buttresses etc. shall be built and bonded
into the masonry in the correct position as work proceeds and not instead or joggled on
afterwards. Fixtures shall be built into the masonry in 1:3 cement sand mortar. The work of
building these fixtures in the masonry is included in the rate of masonry irrespective of the
sources of supply of these fixtures.
9.2.1.14 Bed plates
Bed plates shall be provided under the end of beams, girders, roof trusses etc. Bed plates
shall be either chisel dressed on top and bed, or of cement concrete, if so specified, and
shall conform to the dimensions given in the drawings. Bed plates shall be carefully laid with
fine joints with the necessary packing to give the correct level.
9.2.1.15 Dowels and cramps
Dowels, cramps and joggles shall be supplied and used wherever specified or ordered by
the Executive Engineer. Cramps shall be of gun metal and shall be in length of 16.5 cms
and 30 cms, in thickness 6 mm, 15 mm and 25 mm in width as specified and having each
end turned at right angle. Iron cramps shall not be used. Cramps shall be forged and set
with neat cement. Dowels and joggles shall be of double wedged made from similar stone,
and set in neat cement. Iron dowels or joggles whether galvanised or otherwise shall not be
used.
9.2.1.16 Scaffolding
Proper scaffolding with tightly fastened joints having two sets of vertical supports (of which
the wall may be one) shall be provided. The scaffolding should be strong enough to bear
construction loads, and if the Engineer does not consider it strong enough, he can call upon
the Contractor to strengthen it, but nothing in this case shall be deemed to mean that he is
responsible for the safety of either the work or scaffolding or of the workmen using the
scaffolding. This responsibility shall entirely be that of the Contractor. Where stone wall has
to remain exposed on both faces, double scaffolding shall be provided.
9.2.1.17 Weather protection and watering
Stone masonry laid in cement or lime mortar shall be protected during construction from the
effects of rain and frost by suitable over, if necessary. It shall be kept moist for a period of 10
days. The work shall be left flooded at the end of each day with 25 mm of water. Stone
masonry laid in mud mortar shall not be watered but shall be protected during construction
from rain or from uneven drying.
9.2.2 Stone Work – Individual Items
Particular specifications for individual items given below are in addition to the general
specifications for stone work given above which shall apply to the individual items so far as
they are applicable or unless otherwise specified.

9. 2. 2 .1 Dry Random Rubble Masonry (Uncoursed/Brought to Course)

9.2.2.1.1 General
Dry rubble masonry or dry stone walling shall be used in constructing breast and
retaining walls, revetments walls and parapets.

9.2.2.1.2 Stones

102 of 194
 Stones shall comply with specifications as given in section 9.1.1 above. The stone
shall not be less than 15 cms in any direction except the packing stone. The face
stone's average breadth shall not be less than the height and average length not less
than 1-1/2 times the height for stones upto 20 cm height and not less than 1-1/3rd the
height or 30 cm, whichever is more, for stones exceeding 20 cms in height.
The bond stones shall run right across the wall acid shall not be less than 300 sq.cm.
in cross section at any point. In masonry wall thicker than 60 cm two bond stones
overlapping each other by at least 150 mm may be used in conjunction. The bond
stones shall be provided @ 2 per square meter of front face area.
The bond or through stones shall be of the full height of the course in which they are
used and shall be as broad as possible and of greatest length procurable. All bond or
through stones shall be separately stacked before use and the face marked suitably
so that they can be identified after having been built into the wall.
9.2.2.1.3 Laying
The stones in the foundations shall be the longest available, shall be laid close to
each other and packed in by hand. The front and back stones shall be laid alternately
as headers and stretches as far as possible. The stones in the hearting shall be laid
interlocking each other. The stones shall break joints with the stones below. The bond
stones shall be laid in a line from front face to back overlapping each other by at least
150 mm. The courses shall be built in perpendicular to this pressure which the
masonry will bear. In case of battered (such as retaining walls) the beds of stones
and the plans on of course shall be laid with their bed at right angles to the battered
face.
9.2.2.1.4 Batter
Dry stone walling should not have face batter steeper than 1:12 and until otherwise
specified, batter shall be 1:4. The back of the wall shall be vertical; foundations as
well as the courses shall run at right angles to the face baiter and not horizontally.
9.2.2.1.5 High walls
Dry stone wall higher than 6 meters should be strengthened by laying three
consecutive courses of squared rubble masonry coursed in lime or cement mortar at
every 3 meters interval.
9.2.2.1.6 Long walls
Where ordered by Executive Engineer, long lengths of dry rubble walls should lie
divided into panels separated from one another by short lengths of walls meters long
built with squared rubble courses in lime or cement mortar at intervals of say 6 to 9
meters in order to confine damage, if any, only to the panels affected and thereby to
minimise the repairs required.
9.2.2.1.7 Weep holes
Weep holes shall be provided in dry stone walling when built against earth or hill
slopes subject to saturation by surface or ground water flow. Weep holes shall be
backed by coarse gravel and important walls by graded filters composed of coarse
sand and gravel. The weep holes shall be as per specification given in the retaining
walls.
9.2.2.1.8 Filling
Filling immediately behind dry stone wall shall, wherever possible consist of stone
refuse or chips or coarse gravel. Clayey and silky soil should not be used, where
stone refuse or gravel is available.

9.2.2.1.9 Dry Polygonal Random Rubble Masonry

9.2.2.1.10 General

103 of 194
 In this type of random rubble masonry the face stones are of very irregular shape
most of them forming polygons. The stones are used as they come out of the quarry
and if sufficient stones with polygonal faces are not forthcoming some of the stones
are hammer-dressed to give polygonal faces.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 1 La yi n g
Stones are laid to a random arrangement, care being taken to lay them as close to
each other as possible.
9.2.2.1.12 Other respects
In all other respects, the work will conform to specification 9.2.2.1 above for random
rubble masonry.

9.2.2.1.13 Two types of works

Polygonal random rubble masonry of this type can either be un-coursed or it can be
brought up to course by levelling after every 45 to 60 cm vertical interval U nc o ur s ed
Rubble Masonry/Random Rubble Polygonal Faced Masonry.
9.2.2.1.14 Materials
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 4 .1 St o ne
Stone shall comply with specifications given in section 9.2.2.1.2 above.
9.2.2.1.15 Mortar
The mortar used shall be cement mortar / lime mortar / lime pozzolana mortar /
cement lime mortar / lime surkhi mortar of specified proportion or mud mortar. The
detailed specification for mortar given under section 8.2.2.5 above shall apply.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 5 .1 Dr es s i n g of s t o nes
Stone used for uncoursed or random rubble masonry work shall be hammer dressed
on the sides and beds in such a way as to close up with the adjacent stone in the
masonry work as strongly as possible. The face stones shall be dressed in such a
manner as to give to specified pattern such as polygonal facing etc. The face of
stones shall be so dressed that bushing on the exposed face shall not project by
more than 40 mm from the general wall surface and on the face to be plastered it
shall not project by more than 10 mm nor shall it have depressions more than 10 mm
from the average wall surface.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 La yi n g
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .1 All stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of water
from mortar. The wall shall be built truly plumb (or true to required batter when so
specified). All connected walls in a structure shall normally be raised up uniformly and
regularly. However if for any specific reason, one part of the masonry is required to
0
be left behind, the wall shall be raked back at an angle not steeper than 45 . Toothed
joints in masonry shall not be allowed.
The work shall be carried up regularly and masonry on any day will not be raised by
more than 1 meter in height.
Stones shall be laid in an uncoursed fashion, or to produce specified pattern such as
polygonal facing, random facing etc. However the masonry is required to be brought
to level at various stages viz. plinth level, window sill level, lintel level, roof level and
any other level specifically shown in the drawing. This may be done by firstly
adjusting the laying of stones to one level and then by providing a leveling course of
cement concrete 1:6:12 (1 cement : 6 sand : 12 graded stone aggregate of 20mm
nominal size) or as otherwise specified in the Contract.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .2 Proper bonding shall be achieved by closely filling in adjacent stones as well as by
using bond stones as described herein below. Face stones shall extend back

104 of 194
 sufficiently and bond well with the masonry. The stones shall be carefully set so as to
break joints and avoid formation of vertical joints. The depth of stone from the face of
the wall inwards shall not be less than the height or the breadth at the face. The
hearting or interior filling of the wall shall consist of rubble stones which may be of
any shape. Neither the face stone nor the hearting stone shall be so small as to pass
through a circular ring of 150 mm internal diameter in any direction, nor shall any of
them have such minimum thickness so as to make it possible to pass it through a
rectangular slit of 100 mm width, in any direction.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .3 All stones shall be carefully laid, hammered down by a wooden mallet into
position and solidly embedded in mortar, chips and spalls of stone may be used
wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar beds or joints, at the same time ensuring
that no hollow space is left anywhere in the masonry. The chips used shall not be
more than 20% by volume of masonry, and in the case of random rubble masonry or
polygonal faced masonry no spalls or chips shall be seen on the exposed face. The
hearting shall be laid nearly level with the face stones except that at about one meter
intervals, vertical bond stones or plumbs projecting about 150 to 200 mm shall be
firmly embedded to form vertical bonding in masonry.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .4 B on d s t on es
B on d stones or through stones running right across the thickness of the wall shall be
provided in walls upto 600 mm thick. In thicker walls two stones overlapping each
other by at least 150 mm shall be provided across the thickness of the wall to form
bond stones. There shall be at least one bond stone for every 0.5 sqm of wall
surfaced. The bond stone shall be marked by a distinguishing letter during
construction for subsequent verification and shall be laid staggered in subsequent
layers.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .5 Q u oi ns
The quoins or corner stones shall be selected stones neatly dressed with hammer
and/or chisel to form the required corner angle laid header and stretcher alternately.
The bed and top surface of quoins shall be chisel dressed to give horizontal joints.
The quoins shall have a uniform chisel draft of at least 25 mm width at four edges of
each exposed face, all the edges of the same face being in one plane. No quoin
3
stone shall be smaller than 0.025 cum. (25dm in volume) and it shall also not be
less than 300 mm in length; 25% of them being not less than 500 mm in length.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .6 J am b s t on es
The jambs shall be made with stones specified for quoins except that the stones
provided on the jambs shall have their length equal to the thickness of the wall for
walls upto 600 mm and a line of headers shall be provided for walls thicker than 600
mm as specified for bond.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .7 J o in ts
All joints shall be completely filled with mortar and their width shall not exceed 25
mm. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck
flush and finished simultaneously while laying the stones. Otherwise the joints shall
be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking tool during the progress of laying
while the mortar is still green.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 6 .8 Sc af f ol d in g
Single or double scaffolding shall be used. The scaffolding shall be strong and sound.
The holes left in masonry for supporting scaffolding shall be filled and made good
before plastering.
9. 2. 2 .1 .1 7 Cur i n g an d pr ot ec t io n
Green work shall be protected from rains by suitably covering the same. Masonry in
cement mortar or composite mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for
a period of at least seven days. The top of masonry shall be flooded at the close of

105 of 194
 the day. In case of fat lime mortar (with or without Pozzolana) curing shall commence
two days after laying of masonry and shall continue for seven days.

9. 2. 2 .2 Co ur s ed R u bb l e M as o nr y Fir s t S or t/ Co ur s ed R ub b l e M as o nr y S ec o nd So r t
9. 2. 2 .2 .1 Ma t er ia ls
Same as for uncoursed rubble masonry/random rubble polygonal faced masonry.
9. 2. 2 .2 .2 Dr es s i n g of s t o nes
9. 2. 2 .2 .2 . 1 For first sort coursed rubble masonry, face stones shall be hammer dressed so as to
give approximately rectangular blocks. They shall be squared on bed and side joints.
The bed joints shall be rough chisel dressed for a depth at least 50 mm back from the
face, and the side joints shall be so dressed a depth of at least 40 mm back from the
face, such that no portion of the dressed surface is more than 6 mm from a straight
edge held against the surface. The remaining portions of the respective surfaces shall
not project above the chisel dressed bed and side joints. The bushing on the face
shall not project by more than 40 mm on an exposed face and 10 mm on a face to be
plastered. The hammer dressed stone shall also have a rough tooling for a minimum
width of 25 mm along the four edges of the face of the stone.
9. 2. 2 .2 .2 . 2 For second sort coursed rubble masonry the stones shall be dressed as for first sort
masonry described above except that no portion of dressed surface shall show a
depression of more than 10 mm (as against 6 mm for first sort) from the straight edge
placed against the dressed surface.
9. 2. 2 .2 .3 La yi n g
9. 2. 2 .2 .3 . 1 Co ur s ed r ub b l e m as o n r y f ir s t s or t
All stones shall be wetted before laying the wall shall be built up truly plumb (or to
required batter where so specified). All connected masonry in structure shall normally
be raised up uniformly and regularly. However, if for any specific reasons one part of
wall is required to be left behind such wall shall be raked back at an angle not steeper
0
than 45 , toothed joints in masonry shall not be allowed. The work shall be carried up
regularly and masonry on any day will not be raised by more than 1 meter in height.

All courses shall be laid truly horizontal. The height of course shall not be less than
150 mm nor shall more than 300 mm. Face stones be laid in alternate header and
stretcher fashion. They shall be so arranged as to break joints by at least 75 mm.
Stones shall be laid with grains horizontal so that the load is transmitted along the
direction of their maximum crushing strength. The depth of stone from the face of the
fall inwards shall not be less than the height or breadth. The breadth of a face stone
shall also be not less than 150 mm. Each face stone shall be of the same height in
any given course. The courses shall be built in perpendicular to the pressure which
the masonry will bear. In case of a battered wall (such as retaining walls) the beds of
stone and the plane of courses shall be laid with their bed perpendicular to the
battered face.
The hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of flat bedded stones
carefully laid on their proper beds in mortar, chips, spalls of stones being used where
necessary to avoid excessive use of mortar, care being taken to see that no hollow
space is left anywhere in the masonry. Chips shall not be used below the hearting
stone to bring these upto the level of the face stones. The use of chips shall be
restricted to the filling of interstices between the hearting stones but the volume of
chips shall be limited to 10% of the total volume of masonry.
9. 2. 2 .2 .3 . 2 Co ur s ed r u bb l e m as o nr y s ec on d s or t
This type of masonry shall be constructed in the same manner as first sort masonry
described above, except that, the use of chips for filling of interstices shall be limited

106 of 194
 to 15% of the total volume of masonry and that it is permissible to have courses of
varying heights. A course may be made up of single stones or two stones.
9. 2. 2 .2 .4 B on d s t on es
Bond stones shall be provided in the same manner as in the case of uncoursed
rubble masonry except that in this case there shall be at least one bond stone for
every 1.8 m length of every course.

9. 2. 2 .2 .5 Q u oi ns
The quoins, which shall be of the same height as the course to which it belongs shall
be formed from selected stone of at least 400 mm length. They shall be laid square
on beds as stretchers and headers alternately. The beds shall be rough chisel
dressed to a depth of at least 100 mm. These stones shall have a minimum uniform
chisel draft of 25 mm width at four edges, all the edges being in the same plane.
Quoin stone shall not be smaller than 0.025 cum in volume and it shall also be not
less than 300 mm in length, 25% of them being not less than 500 mm in length.
9. 2. 2 .2 .6 J o in ts
All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints shall be vertical. Face joints shall
not be more than 10 mm thick. All joints shall be properly and completely filled with
mortar. On faces where neither plastering nor pointing is required to be done, the
joints shall be struck flush and finished simultaneously while laying the stones. In
other cases the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking tool
during the progress of work while the mortar is still green.
9. 2. 2 .2 .7 O th er d et a i ls
The specification for curing, protection and scaffolding shall be the same as for
uncoursed rubble/random rubble masonry described above.
9. 2. 2 .3 S qu ar ed R u bb l e M as o nr y Co ur s e d)
9. 2. 2 .3 .1 He i gh t of c ou r s es
The stones shall be laid in horizontal courses not less than 15 cm in height. All the
stones in each course shall be of equal height and all courses of the same height
unless otherwise specified in which case no course shall be thicker than any course
beneath it. All stones to be set full in metal in all bed or vertical joints.
9. 2. 2 .3 .2 Dr es s i n g
The face stone shall be squared on all joints and beds by hammer dressing with the
help of a mason or Waller‟s hammer. The face of the stone to be hammer-dressed,
and 'bushing' not to project neither more than 40 mm. on an exposed face, nor more
than 10 mm on a face that is to be plastered. The beds of stones shall be rough
dressed (one line dressed) or hammer dressed true and square for at least 50 mm
back from the face, and the joints for atleast 40 mm from the face.
9. 2. 2 .3 .3 J o in ts
All stones shall be set full in mortar along all beds and vertical joints. All beds shall be
horizontal and joints vertical. No planings will be allowed on the face. The bees and
joints shall not be more than 10 mm in thickness. Along all course, stones shall
break joint by atleast half the height of the course.
9. 2. 2 .3 .4 S i ze of s t on es
No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height, nor shall it tail into the work to a
length less than its height. At least one third of the stones shall tail into work at least
twice their height, or in walls thicker than 60 cm, three times their height. No stone
should tail into a point.
9. 2. 2 .3 .5 T hr ou g h s to n es

107 of 194
 Through stones shall be inserted one meter apart in every course and shall run right
through walls not more than 60 cm thick. Where the thickness of wall is more than 60
cm a line of two or more headers or stones shall be laid from face to back, which shall
overlap each other by atleast 15 cm. Care should be taken not to place the through
stones of successive courses over each other.
9. 2. 2 .3 .6 Q u oi ns
The quoins which shall be of the same height as the course in which they occur shall
be formed of header stones at least 45 cm long, laid lengthwise alternatively along
each face. The quoins shall be selected stones more carefully dressed, squared and
bedded to a depth of at least 10 cm and laid square on their beds.
9. 2. 2 .3 .7 In ter n a l f ac e
The work on the internal face shall be precisely the same as on the exterior face,
unless the work is to be plastered in which case, the side joints need not be vertical.
9.2.2.3.8 The interior of the wall shall consist of flat bedded stones carefully laid on their proper
beds and solidly bedded in mortar, chips and spalls of stones being wedged in
wherever necessary, so as to avoid thick beds or joints of mortar, care being taken
that no dry work or hollow spaces shall be left anywhere in the masonry. The external
and internal face work shall be brought up evenly, but the hearting should not be
leveled up at each course by the use of chips.

9. 2. 2 .3 .9 O th er r es p ec ts
In all respects the work shall comply with the general specification given in 9.2.1
above for stone masonry.
9. 2. 2 .4 P la i n As h l ar M as o nr y ( Fi g. 7 . 10 , C PW D Sp ec if ic at i o ns , V o l . 1, 2 0 09 )
9.2.2.4.1 The stones shall be of the specified type. It shall be hard, sound, durable and tough
free from cracks, decay, weathering, and undesirable particles. The stones shall be in
accordance with specifications given in Section 9.1.1 above.
9. 2. 2 .4 .2 Dr es s i n g s t o n es
9. 2. 2 .4 .2 . 1 The stones shall be cut to regular and required size and shape so as to have all faces
rectangular, and give perfectly horizontal and vertical joints when laid in the walls.
The beds, joints and faces shall be chisel dressed in such manner that all waviness
and unevenness is completely removed and a fairly smooth surface is obtained. The
face which is to remain exposed in final work, as well as the adjoining faces to a
depth of 12 mm, shall be so dressed that no point on the dressed face shall vary by
more than 1 mm from 600 mm long straight edge. The top and bottom faces that are
to form horizontal joints and the sides which are to form vertical joints shall not show
a variation of more than 3 mm when tested with a 600 mm long straight edge. Any
vertical face that is to come against backing of masonry shall be so dressed that it
shall not show variation of more than 10 mm from a straight edge. All angles and
edges that are to remain exposed in the final position shall be true, square and free
from chippings.
9. 2. 2 .4 .2 . 2 A sample of dressed stone shall be prepared for approval and shall be kept on the
work after approval from the Engineer.
9. 2. 2 .4 .3 La yi n g
9. 2. 2 .4 .3 . 1 Stones shall be wetted, before placing in position. They shall be floated on mortar
and bedded properly and solidly in position with a wooden mallet.
9. 2. 2 .4 .3 . 2 The wall shall be built truly vertical (or true to required batter as specified). Stones
may be laid in alternate header-stretcher fashion or in any other manner as directed
by the Engineer. The headers shall be arranging in such a fashion as to bring them
centrally over the stretchers below and above. Stones shall break joints on the face

108 of 194
 for at least half the height of the course and the bond shall be carried up regularly and
masonry any day will not be raised by more than one meter in height.
9.2.2.4.3.3 The height of course in a masonry work shall be uniform and shall not be less than
(150 mm) unless otherwise specified. The width of stone shall not be less than height.
9.2.2.4.3.4 All connected masonry shall be raised uniformly and regularly throughout but when a
break is inevitable the joint shall be made in good long steps to avoid cracks.
9.2.2.4.3.5 When necessary, jib crane or other mechanical appliances shall be used to hoist
heavy pieces of stones and place them in correct position. They shall be handled
carefully to avoid damage to edges and corners (which are more valuable to
damage). No damaged stone shall be allowed to be used in work.
9.2.2.4.3.6 A masonry work may be a composite one consisting of ashlar stone facing with
backing of either brick work, uncoursed rubble / coursed rubble masonry, etc. In such
cases the two portions shall be carefully bonded. The above specification shall apply
to face work and the backing shall be governed, by the appropriate specifications
applicable to the type of backing used.
This type of masonry is illustrated in F ig . 7 .1 1 ( C P W D Spec if ic a t i ons , V o l. 1,
20 0 9) .
9.2.2.4.3.7 Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of not less than one per 1.8 m length in
each course. They shall be through stones running across the wall upto 600 mm
thick. For thicker walls two stones over lapping each other by not less than 150 mm
may be used in conjunction as bond stones. In case of composite masonry (vide
Section 9.2.2.6.3.6 above) the bond stone(s) shall run right across the combined
thickness of the wall. Bond stone shall be marked by a distinguishing letter during
construction for subsequent verification.
9.2.2.4.3.8 Joints
All joints shall be uniform throughout and not more than 5 mm wide. A uniform recess
of 15 mm depth from the face shall be made with the help of a steel plate to receive
pointing to be done later.
9. 2. 2 .4 .4 P oi n ti n g
All exposed joints shall be pointed using mortar with admixture of pigment to match
the shade of stone as specified. The pointing when finished shall be sunk from stone
face by 5 mm or as specified. The depth of mortar in pointing shall not be less than
10 mm.
9. 2. 2 .4 .5 Cur i n g an d pr ot ec t io n
The masonry shall be cured in the same manner as described in para under
uncoursed rubble/random rubble/polygonal faced masonry. The work shall be suitably
protected from damage during construction.
9. 2. 2 .4 .6 Sc af f ol d in g
Double scaffolding shall be adopted. Single scaffolding shall not be allowed. The
scaffolding shall be built sufficiently strong and sound keeping in view the heavy load
of solid stones and other materials likely to be carried by it.
9. 2. 2 .4 .7 Cl as s if ic at i o n
The ashlar masonry can be divided into three classes:
( a) Fine Ashlar: In fine ashlar every stone shall be fine dressed (three line dressing)
on all beds, joints and faces, full true and out of winding, if the surfaces are
plane, or to uniform curves or twists if required by the design. All stones shall be
laid in cement mortar and the beds and joints shall not exceed 3 mm in
thickness.
(b) Ashlar rough tooled (or bastard ashlar): In this type of ashlar masonry, the faces
exposed to view shall have a fine dressed chisel draft 25 mm wide all-round the

109 of 194
 edges, and be rough tooled (one line dressed) between the drafts, and on all
beds and joints. The thickness of joints and beds shall not exceed 6 mm. The
stones will be set in cement mortar which is specified.
(c) Rock Ashlar, Rustic Ashlar or Quarry-faced Ashlar: This type of masonry is
similar to Bastard Ashlar, except that the exposed faces of the stone between the
drafts shall be left rough as the stone comes from the quarry. No rock face or
bushing may project more than 7.5 cm from plane or drafts. If required for
architectural reasons, the drafts may be omitted altogether except on quoins. All
the beds and sides of stones shall be rough-tooled (one line dressing). The
cement mortar shall be as specified. The beds and joints shall not exceed 6 mm
in thickness. Where only ashlar masonry is specified, without indications on the
drawings or otherwise, the type of ashlar required will be taken as fine ashlar. As
regards size of stones, bond, etc., there is no difference in the three types of
ashlar masonry.

9. 2. 2 .5 P unc h ed As h l ar M as o nr y
9. 2. 2 .5 .1 St o ne
Stone shall be as specified for plain ashlar masonry.
9. 2. 2 .5 .2 Dr es s i n g
As in plain ashlar masonry except that the faces exposed shall have a fine dressed
chisel draft 2.5 cm wide all-round the edges and shall be rough tooled between the
drafts, such that the dressed surfaces shall not be more than 3 mm from straight
edge placed over it.
9. 2. 2 .5 .3 O th er d et a i ls
The specifications for mortar laying, fixing, bond stone, joints, pointing, curing,
protection, scaffolding etc. shall be as specified for plain ashlar masonry.
9. 2. 2 .6 St o ne W ork in Co p i ngs , C or nic es , J a l i, Ch o wk h ats , L i nt e ls , S i lls a nd
Ro of i n g etc .
9. 2. 2 .6 .1 St o ne
Stone used for shelves, copings, cornices, string course, stone jali work, chowkhats
etc. shall be of the specified variety and shall be hard, sound, durable and of uniform
colour and texture.
9. 2. 2 .6 .2 Dr es s i n g
All exposed plane surfaces and sides shall be chisel dressed such that the dressed
surface shall not vary by more than 1 mm at any point from a 600 mm long straight
edge placed against it, except in the case of shelves where a variation of 3 mm shall
be allowed. All visible angles and edges shall be free from chippings. The surfaces to
be buried in masonry shall be rough chisel dressed. Copings, cornices, chowkhats
and sills shall be finished to the shape as shown in the drawing. Jali shall be cut as
per the pattern shown in the drawings. Thickness of jali shall be as specified, with a
tolerance of 2 mm. Fixing of jali shall be done with adjoining work in grooves, rebates
etc. as shown in drawings.
The finished thickness of stone shelves shall be as specified with a permissible
tolerance of 2 mm.
9. 2. 2 .6 .3 La yi n g an d f ix in g
Laying and fixing of these items shall be done in cement mortar of specified mix, in
the manner shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
9. 2. 2 .6 .4 O th er d et a i ls
Pointing, curing, protection, scaffolding etc. shall be done as specified for plain ashlar
masonry work.

110 of 194
9. 2. 2 .6 .5 St o ne c ho wk ha ts
Stone chowkhats for doors, windows and clerestory windows shall have exposed
faces including rebates close picked or three line dressed. The vertical members shall
be jointed to horizontal members by mason's mortice and tenon joints and shall be
embedded minimum 15 cm deep in floor. Four holes shall be provided to every
vertical member of door or window and two to vertical member of clerestory window
for fixing bolts. The projection of the horizontal members shall not be less than 15 cm
wide. These shall be well built into the wall at ends. Recesses and holes shall be
made in the chowkhats for fixing hinges and bolts staples.

9. 2. 2 .6 .6 L in te ls , s i l ls a nd r oof i ng
The stone slabs shall be sawn or split in a plane parallel to
the natural bed of the stone obtained from the approved quarry. Thickness of the slab
shall be as under:
S. No. Span Thickness
a) For clear span upto 2 meters. 7.5 to 10 cm.
b) For clear span exceeding 2 m and upto 2.5 Exceeding 10 cm and
meters. upto 12.5 cm.
The slabs upto three meters shall be in one piece. The increase in weight of the stone
slab after 24 hours soaking in water shall not be more than 10 percent of the dry
weight.
Stone slabs for roofing shall be soaked in water for 2 hours before use. The width of
each slab shall not be less than 25 cm nor more than 35 cm. The slabs shall be self-
faced on top and bottom. The edges shall be true and square on the underside and
two long edges shall be hammer dressed so that the depression from a 600 m m
long straight edge held against the surface shall not exceed 20 mm and the width of
the joint between the two adjoining slabs shall not exceed 2 5 m m . The joints shall
be filled solidly with mortar for their full depth and neatly finished on the underside.
9. 2. 2 .7 St o ne W ork Sunk or M ou l d ed , As h lar Mo u l de d a nd C ar v ed C o l um ns
9.2.2.7.1 Materials
Stone used for the work shall be of the specified variety and shall be hard, sound, durable,
tough and free from defects like cracks, decay, weathering and undesirable patches. Mortar
as specified shall be used. For details, specifications of mortars under section 8.2.2.5 above
shall apply.
9.2.2.7.2 Dressing
Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape and chisel dressed on all beds and
joints so as to be free from waviness and unevenness. It shall give a perfectly vertical and
horizontal joint with adjacent stones. The dressed surface shall not show variation of more
than 3 mm when a straight edge is placed against the surface. The face shall be gauged,
cut, chamfered, grooved, rebated, sunk and/or plain moulded as shown in the working
drawing. A full sized layout of moulding shall be prepared and a neat template cut facilitate
the dressing and cutting of stone to require precise shape and size. All visible angles shall
be true and square. The surface and moulding obtained shall be the finest obtainable by the
process of chisel dressing.
9.2.2.7.3 For important carved work in columns a full-sized model of the work shall be prepared in
Plaster of Paris for the approval of the Engineer, if so directed.
9.2.2.7.4 Other details
The specification for laying and fixing, joints, pointing, curing, protection and scaffolding
shall be the same as that of stone work in plain ashlar masonry.
9. 2. 2 .8 Dr es s i n g of St on es
9. 2. 2 .8 .1 G e ner a l

111 of 194
 Stone shall be cut and dressed as soon after quarrying as possible. Stone required
for masonry shall be dressed as specified or shown on the drawings. Main types of
dressing are prescribed in the following paragraphs. Stones shall be dressed
accurately to the exact size shown in the drawings or according to specifications of
the masonry work. All visible edges shall be free from chippings. For complete detail
of dressing of stones, reference may be made to IS: 1129 (Dressing of stones
Revised from time to time).
9. 2. 2 .8 .2 Sc ab b ed s t o nes
Scabbed stone means quarried stone in which irregular angles have been taken off
with the scabbing hammer, usually done at quarry.
9. 2. 2 .8 .3 Ham m er dr es s e d s to n e
When the scabbed stone is dressed with mason's hammer or waller's hammer to
make the faces square and to remove unnecessary bushing, it is called hammer
dressed stones. No picking or chiseling is used in this type of dressing.
9. 2. 2 .8 .4 Ro u gh t o ol e d s to n e
The rough tooled stone is also called one line dressed stone. It is dressed with a
chisel, or sparrow picked until no portion of the dressed surface is more than 6 mm
from a straight edge placed on it.
9. 2. 2 .8 .5 Ch is e l dr es s e d s t on e
Chisel dressed stone is also called "two-line dressed" stone. It is dressed with chisel
or sparrow picked until no portion of the surface dressed is more than 6mm from a
straight edge placed on it.
9. 2. 2 .8 .6 Fi ne dr es s e d s to n e
This is also called "three-line dressed" stone. By fine dressing or three line dressing is
meant, the best surface which can be given to a stone with chisel, and without
rubbing. The straight edge laid along the face of the stone so dressed shall be in
contact with the stone at every point.

9. 2. 2 .8 .7 Fi ne l y p u nc he d s t on e
This type of stone means stone having face work to an approximately true surface by
means of pointed tools or punch giving a dotted appearance usually specified to give
architectural effect.
9. 2. 2 .8 .8 Cu t s to n e wo r k
Every stone for cut stone work shall be fine-tooled on all faces to exact shape
specified in design. Templates made of zinc sheets shall be used to dress to correct
shapes.
9. 2. 2 .8 .9 S a wi ng an d p o lis h i ng
Certain building stones like marbles shall be sawn in blocks wherever so specified
and certain stones like granite and marble shall be polished with a stone polishing
machine, if so specified. Sand blasting may sometimes be prescribed as a finishing
process for building stones.
9. 2. 2 .9 As hl ar M as o nr y wi t h S an d S t on e
9.2.2.9.1 Stone lining upto 8 cm shall be treated as veneer work and the lining of greater
thickness as plain ashlar masonry. All specifications as given in ashlar masonry shall
be applicable to ashlar masonry with sand stone. Stone used shall conform to
specification given in section 9.1.1 above.
9. 2. 2 .1 0 St o ne W ork in Ar c h es an d D om es
9. 2. 2 .1 0. 1 Ma t er ia ls
Stone used for the work shall be of the specified variety and shall be hard, sound,
durable, tough and free from defects like cracks, decay, weathering and undesirable
patches. Stone .used shall conform to specifications given in Section 9.1.1 above.
9. 2. 2 .1 0. 2 Dr es s i n g

112 of 194
 Every stone shall be cut to the required wedge-shape and size and chisel dressed on
all beds and joints so as to be free from waviness and unevenness. Each stone shall
give a truly radial and straight joint with the adjoining stone, as shown in the drawing.
No point on the dressed surface shall be more than 3 mm from a 600 mm long
straight edge placed against it. The faces shall be gauged, cut, chamfered, grooved,
rebated, sunk and/or moulded to uniform curves or planes as shown in the working
drawings. A full sized layout of each unit of stone shall be prepared and a neat
template cut to facilitate cutting of the stones to the required precise shape and size.
All visible edges and angles shall be true neat and free from chippings. The exposed
surface shall be dressed to give a finest possible finish obtainable by the process of
chiselling. At the exposed joints a width of 12 mm back from the face shall be fine
tooled so that the straight edge laid along it shall make a contact with a variation of
not more than 1 mm.
9. 2. 2 .1 0. 3 Ce ntr i n g a nd s h u tt er in g
Centring, shuttering and false work required for the arch or dome work shall be strong
and unyielding. It shall not sag or deform under load. It shall be got approved from the
Engineer before putting up stone work.
9. 2. 2 .1 0. 4 O th er d et a i ls
Other details regarding laying, joints, pointing, curing protection and scaffolding shall
be the same as for stone work in plain ashlar masonry. Stone work in arches and
domes is illustrated in Fig. 7.13 and 7.12 respectively (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1,
2009).
9. 2. 2 .1 1 St o ne W ork in W all L i n in g e tc . ( Ve n eer W ork )
9. 2. 2 .1 1. 1 Ma t er ia l
Stone shall be of the specified variety (such as red/white sand stone, trap stone etc.)
and shall be obtained from approved quarry. It shall be hard, sound, durable and free
from defects like cavities cracks, sand holes, flaws, injurious veins, patches of loose
or soft material etc. Percentage of water absorption shall not exceed 5 percent when
tested in accordance with IS: 1124-1974. The stones shall be cut into slabs of
required thickness along the planes parallel to the bed or natural grains of the stone.
The stone used shall conform to specifications in Section 9.1.1 above.
Mortar for fixing shall be as specified.
9. 2. 2 .1 1. 2 Dr es s i n g
The face of the stone slabs as well as the sides shall be chisel dressed in such a way
that a smooth surface free from waviness and unevenness is obtained. A straight
edge 600 mm long, when held against the dressed face or side shall not show a
variation of more than 1 mm. The edges and corners shall be true square and free
from chippings. The back of the slab shall be so dressed as to give a rough surface
which shall however be free from projection and waviness. The thickness of stone
slab after dressing shall be of the specified thickness within the tolerance limit of +
2mm.
9. 2. 2 .1 1. 3 La yi n g an d f ix in g
The stone slabs shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of
water from mortar. They shall then be fixed with mortar in position without use of
chips or pinning of any sort. Where so specified the adjoining stones shall be secured
to each other by means of copper pins 75 mm long and 6 mm dia.
The slabs shall also be secured to the backing masonry work, if so specified, by
means of 25 mm x 6 mm gun metal cramps 30 cm long or other size. The fixing
arrangement is shown in Fig. 8.2 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009). Alternatively
the stones may be secured to the backing by means of stone dowels 100 mm x 50
mm x 25 mm as shown in Fig. 8.1 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
Pins, cramps and dowels shall be got approved before use. They shall be fixed using
cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand).
9.2.2.11.4 T he face work and backing masonry shall be built up together. However in the case
of backing of reinforced cement concrete the face stones shall be secured to the

113 of 194
 backing after it has set and got cured. The cramps shall be fixed in concrete at the
required positions while concreting. The face stones shall be laid in regular courses
not less than 20 cm in height and all the courses shall be of the same height unless
otherwise specified in the drawing. The size of each stone and pattern of joints shall
be as specified in the drawing.
9. 2. 2 .1 1. 5 J o in ts
All joints shall be full of mortar. Special case shall be taken to see that the joint
between center of the mass being compacted at the time of the depositing proceeds
by means of a suitable type the facing stone slabs and the back masonry is properly
filled with mortar. The hollowness behind the veneer stone slab or post joining the
back masonry can be detected by tapping the face stone and any such defective
work shall be rectified by relaying the stone slabs. The thickness of the face joints
shall not exceed 5 mm. The face joints shall be uniform throughout. A 15 mm deep
recess shall be formed with the help of a steel plate while the mortar is green.
9. 2. 2 .1 1. 6 O th er d et a i ls
Specification for pointing, curing, protection and scaffolding shall be the same as for
stone work in plain ashlar work.
9.2.3 Measurements
9.2.3.1 General
(a) All work shall be measured on the basis of finished dimensions and measured net,
except where otherwise specified (herein below).
(b) The lengths, breadths and heights of stone work shall be measured correct to a cm.
Only specified dimension shall be allowed. Anything extra shall be ignored.
(c) Work under the following categories shall be measured separately, unless otherwise
specified:
a) From foundations to plinth level.
b) Super-structure above plinth level and upto floor two level.
c) Above floor two level of super-structure.
d) Square or rectangular pillars.
e) Circular pillars.
f) Curved on plan for mean radius not exceeding 6 meters.
g) Stone work sunk or moulded in cornices, square, rectangular and circular pillars.
h) Dressing of stone.
i) In or under water and/or liquid mud.
j) In or under foul conditions.
k) Stone work on the parapet shall be measured together with the corresponding item
of stone work in the storey next below.
(d) No deduction shall be made, not extra payment made for the following:
i) Ends of joints, beams posts, girders, rafters, purlins, trusses, corbels etc. each upto
500 sq. cm. in section.
2
ii) Openings each upto 0.1 sqm (10dm ).
iii) Wall plates and bed plates, bearings of chajjas and the like upto 10 cm depth
(Note: The bearings of door and roof slabs shall be deducted from masonry).
iv) Drain holes and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed holdfasts for doors,
windows etc.
v) Building in the masonry iron fixtures pipes upto 309 mm dia., holdfasts of doors and
windows.
vi) Forming chases in masonry upto Section of 350 sqcm.
(e) Stone masonry in chimney breasts, chimney stacks, smoke flues, or air flues upto 0.25
sqm (25 dm2) in sectional area, shall be measured as solid and no extra payment shall
be made for pargeting and casing such flues. Where flues exceed 0.25 sqm in sectional

114 of 194
 area, deduction shall be made for the flue opening and pargeting and casing of flues
shall be paid for separately.
(f) Apertures for fireplaces shall not be deducted and extra labour for splaying of jambs,
throating and making arch to support opening shall not be paid for separately.
(g) Plinth level: For purpose of measurements for masonry in plinth and foundation and
(or masonry in superstructure, the plinth level shall be determined as under:
i) For Building: Ground floor level or 1.5 meters above ground level whichever is
lower.
ii) For abutments, piers and retaining walls of culverts, walls of reservoirs basement
and the like 1.5 meters above the ground level shall be as marked in the drawings.
( h) Curved masonry: Stone masonry curved on plan to a mean radius exceeding 6 m
shall be measured under stone work in walls of the appropriate category.
9.2.3.2 Individual Items of Work
9.2.3.2.1 Uncoursed rubble masonry / polygonal faced masonry / random rubble masonry (second
sort) / pillars (columns) / curved stone work
( a) The finished work shall be measured net in cubic meters nearest to two places of
decimal.
(b) Square rectangular pillars shall be measured as walls, under the respective category
but extra payment shall be allowed for these over the rate for corresponding stone work
in wall. A rectangular pillar shall mean a detached masonry portion rectangular in
section such that its breadth does not exceed two and a half times its thickness.
(c) Circular pillars shall be measured net as per actual finished work under the respective
category of masonry wall but extra payment shall be allowed for these over the rate for
the corresponding stone work in walls.
(d) Curved stone work having a mean radius not exceeding 6 m on plan shall be measured
net as per actual finished work under the respective category of masonry wall, but extra
payment shall be allowed for this over the rate for the corresponding stone work in
walls.
(e) Provisions as given under "General" shall apply.
9.2.3.2.2 Stone work in plain ashlar masonry / ordinary pillars (columns) / moulded and curved
columns / curved stone wall
(a) The finished work shall be measured in cubic meter nearest to two places of decimals.
(b) Square, rectangular pillars shall be measured net as per actual finished work and
included in the quantity of masonry wall, but extra payment shall be allowed for these
over the rate for corresponding stone work in wall. A rectangular pillar shall mean a
detached masonry portion rectangular in section such that its breadth does not exceed
three times its thickness and the thickness itself does not exceed 60 cm.
(c) Curved stone work having a mean radius not exceeding 6 m on plan shall be measured
net as per actual finished work under the appropriate category of masonry wall, but
extra payment shall be allowed for this over the rate for corresponding stone work in
wall.
(d) In case of battered or curved or curved surface (other than curved columns) the
dimensions of the circumscribing rectangles of the dressed stone used in the work shall
be measured. In such cases the measurement shall be taken, course by course or
stone by stone as the case may be.
(e) Provision as given under "General" shall apply.
9.2.3.2.3 Stone work sunk or moulded
(a) The finished work shall be measured in cubic meters nearest to two places of decimals.
The dimensions of the circumscribing rectangles of the dressed stone used in the work
shall be measured correct to a cm. Measurement shall be taken course by course or
stone by stone as the case may be. Only specified dimensions shall be allowed,
anything extra being ignored.
9.2.3.2.4 Stone work in arches and domes

115 of 194
 The finished work shall be measured net in cubic meters nearest to two places of decimals.
Any recognized Engineering formula shall be used for calculating the volume of the work.
For arches exceeding 6 m in span extra payment for additional cost of labour and hire
charges in respect of centring shall be made on the basis of arches, area of the soffit
including strutting, wedging, casing, striking and removal.
Only specified dimension shall be allowed, anything done extra being ignored.
9.2.3.2.5 Stone work for wall lining etc. (veneer work)
(a) The finished work shall be measured in square meter nearest to two places of
decimals. In case of plain slabs of geometrical shape other than square or rectangular,
or plain slabs of irregular shape, the dimension of the circumscribing rectangle of the
dressed slabs used in the work shall be measured. The veneering work curved in plan
shall be measured as plain work but extra payment shall be allowed for radius not
exceeding 6 m on external face. For radius beyond 6 m on plan the work shall be
measured as plain work only, even when the face may have to be dressed to curve.
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm.
9.2.3.2.6 Stone work in shelves, coping, cornices, jali etc.
(a) The finished stone shelves shall be measured net in square meters nearest to two
places of decimals. The length and breadth including the bearings shall be measured
correct to a cm.
(b) Stone jali shall be measured in square meters nearest to two places of decimals. The
net dimensions of the jali including the portion grooved into the adjusting work shall be
measured.
(c) Stone copings shall be measured in cum nearest to two places of decimals. The
dimensions of the circumscribing rectangles of the dressed stone used in the work shall
be measured correct to a cm.
(d) Plain cornices, string course and plinth courses shall be measured in cum nearest to
two places of decimals. Length, breadth and depth of finished stones as used in the
work shall be measured including bearing, correct to a cm.
(e) Moulded cornices shall be measured in cubic meter under moulded stone work.
(f) No deduction shall be made from the masonry wall for the bearing of stone shelves.
9.2.4 Rate
The rate for various items shall include the cost of materials and labour required for proper
completion of item of works as described in the respective nomenclature in accordance with
the schedule and specifications above including temporary erection like scaffolding etc.
unless otherwise specified.
The rate includes all such items as mentioned in the general specifications of the stone
work. Contractor's profit @ 10% and over-head charges @ 5% has also been included in
the rate.
9.3 Stone Soling
9.3.1 General
Soling shall be constructed on the prepared sub-grade in conformity with lines, grades,
thickness and cross-section shown on drawings or as indicated by Engineer.
9.3.2 Marking out
The edges of soling shall be marked out by strings and stakes. The lines shall be carefully
ranged.
9.3.3 Laying and Packing
The soling stones shall be hand packed carefully to the required chambers of the top
surface by laying correct to the templates placed 15 meters apart. These shall be laid
resting on their broad bases with their height equal to the thickness of the soling and the
largest dimension at right angles to the center line of the road. Stones shall be laid breaking
joints in close contact with each other but not leaning against each other. Large size stones
shall be arranged at the edges and the center of the road. The joints shall be staggered. All
interstices between soling stones shall be wedged in by smaller stones of suitable size well

116 of 194
 driven in by crow bars and hammers to ensure tight packing and complete filling of
interstices. The wedging shall be carried out simultaneously with the placing in position of
soling stone and shall not lag behind. After the hand packing has been completed,
inequalities in the surface shall be checked by templates and carefully set right.

9.3.4 Consolidation
The soling shall be consolidated by a road roller of 8 to 12 tonne as directed by Engineer,
depending upon the type of soling stones and the nature of the sub-grade. Rolling shall
progress from edges towards the center, parallel to the center line. Rolling shall be
continued till a closely knit surface is obtained. The surface shall be again checked by
templates, hollows corrected with spalls, and consolidated.

10 BRICK WORK
10.1 General Specifications for First Class Brick Work
10.1.1 Materials
10.1.1.1 Bricks & tiles
Unless otherwise specified, brick work shall consist of 1st class brick laid in specified mortar.
The bricks used for brick work and the size of brick and tiles and relevant classification shall
be as per specifications given below.

10.1.1.1.1 Sizes of Bricks

Unless otherwise specified bricks required for buildings or architectural works shall
measure 19 cm x 9 cm x 9 cm (actual) or 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal) so that
every 10 courses when laid with horizontal mortar joints shall measure one meter in
height. A tolerance upto 6.5 mm in length, ± 3 mm in width and + 3mm in height shall
be permitted. This tolerance for size shall be measured as explained in detail in
testing of bricks section (i) below.
TESTING OF BRICKS
The sample of bricks shall be taken, so that they form a fairly good representative of
the entire number of bricks, which are required to be tested. A sample of 50 bricks
shall be taken from every consignment of 50,000 bricks or part thereof. The samples
can be taken from either of the two methods:
a) Sampling bricks in motion: In this method, samples can be taken when the bricks
are in motion i.e. while they are being loaded or unloaded, effort being made to
collect the samples at regular intervals so as to get a representative sample of
the whole quantity.
b) Sampling bricks from a stack: In this method, the bricks are taken out at random
from a stack of bricks. The number of bricks required shall be taken from across
the top of the stack, the sides accessible and from the interior of the stack by
opening trenches from the top.
The samples taken by either of the two methods shall be stored in a dry place until
these are required for the tests. Whenever, tests are to be carried out, bricks shall be
taken at random from the sample.
(i) Test of Dimensions of Bricks
a) Metric Bricks: Twenty whole bricks shall be selected at random from the sample
selected as described above. All blisters, loose particles of clay and small
projections shall be removed. They shall then be arranged upon a level surface
in contact with each other and in a straight line. The overall length of the
assembled bricks shall be measured with a steel tape or other suitable
inextensible measure sufficiently long to measure the whole row one stretch.
Measurement by repeated application of a short rule or measure shall not be
permitted. If for any reason it is found impracticable to measure 20 bricks in one

117 of 194
 row, the sample may be divided into two rows of 10 bricks, which shall be
measured separately to the nearest millimeters. All these dimensions shall be
added together.
The dimensions of bricks when tested in accordance with the above procedure shall
be within the following limits:
Length 367.0 cm to 393.0 cm
Width & Height 174.0 cm to 186.0 cm

b) Non-metric Bricks: The test will be carried out exactly in the same manner as
described for metric bricks but only 16 bricks shall be used. Their dimensions
when, tested in accordance with above procedure shall be within the following
limits:
Length 140 inches to 148 inches
Width 68 inches to 72 inches
Height 47 inches to 51 inches
Every brick shall be provided with a frog of the size 10 cm x 4 cm x 1 cm. The corners
of the frog may in certain cases be rounded off with a radius of 2 cm.
The bricks used shall be of the specified class and size. The nominal and actual sizes
of different categories of bricks and brick tiles shall be as under:
S. No. Types of Bricks Nominal Size Actual Size
i) Modular bricks 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm 19 cm x 9 cm x 9 cm
ii) Modular brick tiles 20 cm x 10 cm x 5 cm 19 cm x 9 cm x 4 cm
iii) Conventional FPS bricks 9” x 4-1/2” x 3” 9” x 4-3/8” x 2-3/4”
iv) Conventional FPS bricks tiles 9” x 4-1/2” x 2” 9” x 4-3/8” x 1-3/4”
v) FPS large size bricks 10” x 5” x 3” 10” x 4-7/8” x 3”
vi) FPS large size bricks tile 10” x 5” x 2” 10” x 4” x 2”
The permitted tolerance in sizes for bricks of Class „I‟ is ± 3% and that for bricks of
Class „II‟ is ± 8%.
10.1.1.1.2 Classification
Bricks shall be classified as follows:
10.1.1.1.2.1 First Class Bricks
The first class bricks shall conform to the following specifications:
(a) The size of bricks shall be as specified subject to the tolerance mentioned in
10.1.1.1.1 above.
(b) They shall be made from good brick earth, free from saline deposits and shall be
sand moulded.
(c) They shall be thoroughly burnt without being vitrified and shall have uniform deep
red, cherry or copper colour.
(d) They shall be regular and uniform in shape and size with sharp and square arises
and parallel faces.
(e) They shall be homogenous in texture and emit a clear ringing sound on being
struck.
(f) They shall be free from flaws, cracks, chips, stones nodules or lime or Kankar
and other blemishes.
(g) A first class brick shall not absorb water more than 20% of its own dry weight
after 24 hours immersion in cold water.
Details of this test are given in testing of bricks section (ii) below.

(ii) Test for Determination of Water Absorption of Bricks

118 of 194
 a) Laboratory Test: The test specimens shall consist of five whole bricks
selected at random from the sample of brick obtained as already described
in testing of bricks section above.
Apparatus: The apparatus shall consist of a balance sensitive of within 0.1
percent of the weight f the specimen.
Procedure: The test specimen shall be dried to constant weight in a
ventilated over at 110° C to 115° C. If the specimen is known to be relatively
dry, this may normally be accomplished in 48 hours but if the specimen is
wet, several additional hours may be required to attain constant weight. The
specimen shall then be cooled approximately to room temperature and
weighed. In a ventilated room, bricks properly separated require four hours
for cooling, unless an electric fan passes air over them continuously, in
which case two hours may suffice. Specimens noticeably warm to the touch
shall not be used for the absorption test. The dry specimens shall be
completely immersed without preliminary partial immersion, in clean water at
15.5° C to 30° C for 24 hours. Each specimen shall then be removed, the
surface water wiped off with a damp cloth and the specimen weighed.
Weighing anyone specimen shall be completed within three minutes after
removing the specimen from the water.
Evaluation and report of test: The percentage of water absorption by weight
shall be calculated as:
Water absorption, percentage by weight = ((W2 – W1)/W1) x 100
where,
W1 = Weight of dry specimen, and
W2 = Weight after soaking in water.
The average value of the five specimens shall be taken as the water
absorption of the lot.
b) Field Test: The test specimen shall consist of five whole dry bricks and shall
be selected at random from the simple obtained as already described in
testing of bricks section above.
Apparatus: The apparatus shall consist of a balance sensitive of within 0.2
to 0.3 percent of the weight of the specimen.
Procedure: The test specimen shall be weighed and shall then be
completely immersed in clean water at room temperature and allowed to
remain in this state for a period of 24 hours: The specimen shall then be
taken out, wiped with a damp cloth and then weighed immediately.
Evaluation: The percentage of water absorption by weights shall be
calculated as follows:
Absorption, percent by weight after 24 hour's water immersion = 100 x (b-
a)/a
where,
a = Weight of the dry specimen, and
b = Weight of the specimen after 24 hours immersion in cold water.
(h) The first class bricks shall have a minimum crushing strength of 105 kg per sqcm
when tested according to the test prescribed in testing of bricks section (iv)
below. The crushing strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the
average crushing strength by more than 20 percent.
(i) First class bricks shall not show appreciable signs of efflorescence either in dry
state or subsequent to soaking in water as detailed in testing of bricks section (iii)
below.

(iii) Test for Determination of Efflorescence of Bricks

119 of 194
a) Laboratory Test: Not less than five dry bricks shall be selected at random
from the sample of bricks obtained as already described in testing of bricks
section above.
Procedure: Each brick shall be placed on end in a shallow flat bottom dish
containing distilled water, the depth of immersion of the brick being not less
than 2.5 cm. The whole arrangement shall be allowed to stand in a warm
(e.g. 18° C to 30° C) and well ventilated room until all the water in the dish
evaporated. When the water has been absorbed and the bricks appear to be
dry a similar quantity of distilled water shall again be placed in the dishes
and same allowed to evaporate as before. At the end of .this period, the
bricks shall be examined for efflorescence.
Report of Test Results: The liability to efflorescence shall be reported as
'nil', 'slight', 'moderate', 'heavy' or 'serious', in accordance with the following
definitions:
(a) Nil: When there is no perceptible deposit of efflorescence,
(b) Slight: When not more than 10 percent of area of the brick is covered
with a thin deposit of salts,
(c) Moderate: When there is a heavier deposit that under 'slight' and
covering upto 50 percent of the area of the brick surface but
unaccompanied by powdering or flaking of the surface,
(d) Heavy: When there is a heavy deposit of salts covering 50 percent or
more of the brick surface but unaccompanied by powdering or flaking
of the surface, and
(e) Serious: When there is a heavy deposit of salts accompanied by
powdering and/or flaking of the surfaces and tending to increase with
repeated wettings of the specimen.
b) Field Test for Efflorescence: Five bricks shall be selected at random from
the sample of bricks obtained as already described in testing of bricks
section above.
Procedure: Each brick shall be placed on end in a shallow dish containing
clean potable water. The quantity of water in the dish shall be such that the
brick is immersed to a depth of not less than 2.5 cm. The brick shall be
allowed to stand in this position for a few days under atmospheric conditions
and room temperature until all the water in the dish is evaporated, When the
water has been absorbed and the bricks appear to be dry, a similar quantity
of clean potable water shall he placed in the dishes and the same allowed to
evaporate as before. At the end of this period, the bricks shall be examined
for efflorescence.
Report: The liability to efflorescence shall be reported as „nil‟, „slight‟,
„moderate‟, „heavy‟ or „serious‟ in accordance with the definition given
above.
(iv) Test for Determination of Compressive Strength of Bricks
Sampling: Five whole bricks shall be selected at random from the sample of
bricks obtained as already described in testing of bricks section above.
Procedure: The bricks shall be immersed in water at 25° C to 29° C for 24
hours. They shall then be removed and allowed to drain at room
temperature for about five minutes and wiped free from surplus moisture.
Their frogs shall be filled with mortar composed of one part Portland cement
and one and a half parts clean, coarse sand graded to 0.3 cm and down.
The bricks shall then be stored under damp sacks for 24 hours. After the
expiry of this period, they shall be immersed in water for seven days.
At the end of seven days, the samples of bricks shall be taken out, wiped
dry and placed with the flat surfaces horizontal and the mortar filled face
upwards between 2 three-plywood sheets each, approximately 0.3 cm thick
and carefully centered between the plates of the compression testing

120 of 194
 machine. The compression plate of the testing machine shall have a bell-
seating in the form of a portion of a sphere, the center of which coincides
with the center of the face of the plate. The load shall be applied axially at
the uniform rate of approximately 140 kg per sqcm per minute until failure
occurs.
Evaluation and Report of Test: The maximum load at failure divided by the
area of bricks shall be taken as the compressive strength.
The arithmetic mean of the compressive strength of the five bricks tested
shall be taken as the compressive strength of the lot. The compressive
strength of the bricks shall be expressed in kg per sqcm.
10.1.1.1.2.2 Second Class Bricks
Second class bricks shall conform to the following specifications:
(a) They shall be as well burnt as first class bricks or slightly over-burnt, but not
vitrified in any part.
(b) They shall give a clear ringing sound when struck.
(c) They may have slight irregularities in size, shape and colour provided these
irregularities are not such as to give uneven courses when used for construction.
(d) They may have slight chips, flaws or surface cracks but shall be free from lime or
Kankar nodules, and be homogenous in texture.
(e) The minimum crushing strength of second class brick shall be 70 kg per sqcm
when tested according to the test prescribed in testing of bricks section (iv)
above. The crushing strength of an individual brick shall not fall below the
average strength by more than 20%.
(f) They shall not show any appreciable sign of efflorescence either in dry state or
subsequent, to soaking in water as per test prescribed in testing of bricks section
(iii) above.
10.1.1.1.2.3 Brick Tiles
10.1.1.1.2.3.1 Flat brick tiles
Flat brick tiles shall conform to all the detailed specifications for first class bricks except
that no frogs shall be provided unless specifically ordered by the Engineer. Tiles shall
be made to the following dimensions:
S. No. Description Size of metric tiles
(a) Tiles for 1st class mud roofing. 29 cm x 14 cm x 3 cm
(b) Tiles for 2nd class mud roofing and for flooring and 29 cm x 14 cm x 5 cm
canal lining.
(c) Tiles for flooring, tile-facing and tile-brick masonry. 19 cm x 9 cm x 4 cm
(d) Permissible tolerance in sizes. ± 6.5 mm for length
± 3 mm for width
± 1.5 mm for thickness
Tiles may be machine-moulded if so, specified by the Engineer at the time of calling
tenders. Where nothing specific is mentioned, tiles will mean hand-moulded tiles.
10.1.1.1.3 Storage
Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers as they are
unloaded, to minimise breakage and defacement. The supply of bricks shall be so
arranged that, as far as possible, atleast two days requirements of bricks are
available at site at any time. Bricks selected for use in different situations shall be
stacked separately.
10.1.1.2 Mortars
Mortar of specified proportions shall be used for brick work and shall comply with
specifications as given in the section 8.2.2.5 above.
10.1.1.3 Sand

121 of 194
 The sand used for brick work shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.2.2
above.
10.1.1.4 Bitumen
The bitumen used for brick work shall comply with specification given in section 8.2.2.6
above.

10.1.1.5 Water
Water used for brick work shall comply with specification given in section 8.1.2.3 above.
10.1.2 Soaking
Bricks required for brickwork in cement or lime mortars, shall be thoroughly soaked in clean
water immediately before use for one hour or till the complete cessation of air bubbles
whichever is later, in brick-lined or steel tanks of sufficient size. Bricks shall be place in the
tank by hand, one at a time, and not thrown or tipped in. The soaked bricks shall be kept on
wooden planks or brick platforms to avoid earth being smeared on them. Bricks need not to
be soaked for brickwork in mud mortar.

10.1.3 Laying
10.1.3.1 Brick work shall be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified with frogs upwards. Half
or cut bricks shall not be used except where necessary to complete the bond. Closers in
such cases, shall be cut to the required size and used near the ends of the walls.
10.1.3.2 In exposed brick work, selected bricks of the specified class shall be used for the face work.
10.1.3.3 A layer of mortar shall be spread on full width over a suitable length of the lower course.
Each brick shall be properly bedded and set home (in position) by gently tapping with handle
of trowel or wooden mallet. Its inside faces shall be buttered with mortar before the next
brick is laid and pressed against it. On completion of a course, all vertical joints shall be fully
filled from the top with mortar.
10.1.3.4 The walls shall be taken up truly plumb. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and vertical
joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in alternative courses shall come directly one over
the other. Thickness of brick courses shall be kept uniform and for this purpose wooden
straight edge with graduations indicating thickness of each course including joint shall be
used. The height of window sills, bottom of lintels and other such important points in the
heights of the wall shall be marked on the graduated straightedge.
10.1.3.5 Both the faces of walls of thickness more than one brick length shall be kept in proper plane.
All connected brick work shall be carried up simultaneously and no portion of work shall be
left more than one meter below the rest of the work. Where this is not possible, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the work shall be raked back according to bound (and not toothed)
0
at an angle steeper than 45 . The work done per day should not be more than one meter
height.
10.1.3.6 All iron fixtures, pipes, outlets of water, hold-fasts of doors and windows, which are required
to be built up into the walls shall be embedded in mortar or cement concrete as specified in
their correct position, as directed by the Engineer, as the work proceeds.
10.1.3.7 The flue of the chimney shall be pargeted i.e. plastered with mud gober (cow dung) mortar
[3 mud : 1 gober (cow dung)] as the work proceeds. Nothing extra shall be paid for this
pargetting.
10.1.4 Joints
All horizontal joints shall be parallel and, unless otherwise specified, truly level. All vertical
joints shall be truly vertical and shall come directly over one another in alternate courses.
The vertical joints shall also in every other course be perpendicularly in line on the internal
as well as the external face. The thickness of joints shall be as follows:
Non Metric Bricks Metric Brocks
Thickness of joints shall be ¼ inch and shall not Thickness of joints shall be 8 mm and shall not
3
exceed /8 inch. The height of four courses (and exceed 12 mm. The height of five courses (and
four joints) as laid, shall not exceed by more than five joints) as laid, shall not exceed by more than
1¼” the height of four bricks as piled dry one upon 5 cm the height of five bricks as piled dry one

122 of 194
the other. For exposed brickwork, wherever so upon the other. The thickness of joints shall be
5
specified, the mortar bed joints will be /16 inch regulated so that height of five courses with five
thick and vertical joints ¼ inch thick, brickwork in joints to rise 50 cm.
four courses including four bed joints to rise 12
inches.

10.1.5 Scaffolding
For all exposed brick work or tile work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical
supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together with
horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
For all other brick work in building, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases, the
inner end of the horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header
course for the purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for
scaffolding shall, however not be allowed in pillars/columns less than meter in width, or
immediately near the skew backs of arches. The holes left in masonry works for scaffolding
purposes shall be filled and made good before plastering.
Note: In case of special type of brick work, scaffolding shall be got approved from Engineer
in advance.
10.1.6 Condition of equipment
All equipment used for making or transporting mortar and bricks shall be clean and free from
set mortar, dirt or other injurious foreign substances.
10.1.7 Curing
Brick work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when the mortar is green.
Masonry work in cement mortar, composite lime mortar, lime mortar (lime of category other
than C&D) shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven days.
Brick work carried out during the day shall be suitably marked indicating the date on which
the work is done so as to keep a watch on the curing period. In case of masonry with fat
lime mortar curing shall commence two days after laying masonry and shall be protected
during construction from rain or uneven drying. No curing is required for Brick work in Mud
mortar.
10.1.8 Finishing
10.1.8.1 General
The surfaces can be finished by „Jointing‟ or „Pointing‟ or by „Plastering‟ as given on the
drawings.
For a surface which is to be subsequently plastered or pointed, the joints shall be squarely
raked out to a depth of 15 mm while the mortar is still green. The raked joints shall be well
brushed to remove dust and loose particles and the surface shall be thoroughly washed with
water, cleaned and wetted.
10.1.8.2 Jointing
In jointing, the face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished
surface flush with the face of the brick work. The faces of brickwork shall be cleaned to
remove any splashes of mortar during the course of raising the brick work.

10.1.8.3 Pointing
For pointing, the mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints, before giving the
required finish. The pointing shall then be finished to proper type given on the drawings. If
type of pointing is not mentioned on the drawing the same shall be ruled pointing. For ruled
pointing after the mortar has been filled and pressed into the joints and finished off level with
the edges of the bricks, it shall while still green be ruled along the center with a half round
tool of such width as may be specified by the Engineer. The superfluous mortar shall then
be cut off from the edges of the lines and the surface of the masonry shall also be cleared of
all mortar.
10.1.8.4 Plastering

123 of 194
 Plastering shall be started from top and worked down. All putlog holes shall be properly filled
in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being taken down. Wooden screeds 75 mm
and of the thickness of the plaster shall be fixed vertically 2.5 meters to 4 meters apart to act
as gauges and guides in applying the plaster. The mortar shall be laid on the wall between
the screeds using the plaster‟s float and pressing the mortar so that the raked joints are
properly filled. The plaster shall then be finished off with a wooden straight edge reaching
across the screeds. The straight edge shall be worked on the screeds with a small upward
and sideways motion 50 mm or 75 mm at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off
with a plaster‟s wooden float. Metal floats shall not be used.
When recommencing the plastering beyond the work suspended earlier the edges of the old
plaster shall be scraped, cleaned and wetted before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas.
No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required by the Engineer.
The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified thickness. The
minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall not be less than the specified
thickness by more than 3 mm.
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions, which sound hollow when tapped,
or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and re-
done as directed by the Engineer.
10.1.8.5 Curing of finishes
Curing shall be started as soon as the mortar used for finishing has hardened sufficiently not
to be damaged when watered, shall be kept wet for a period of atleast 7 days. During this
period, it shall be suitably protected from all damages.
10.1.8.6 Scaffolding for finishes
Stage scaffolding shall be provided for the work. This shall be independent of the structure.
10.1.8.7 Building during frosty weather
As a rule, brick work shall be suspended during frosty weather, as the stability of the same
is endangered by the disintegration of the mortar by the frost while it is wet. When, however,
the work is urgently required, it should be built in cement mortar, as it sets more rapidly than
lime mortar, but all the freshly built portions should be carefully covered and protected on
any recurrence of the frost, and always during the suspension of work for the night.
10.2 Half Brick Masonry
10.2.1 When and how used
When it is necessary to economize on space or to reduce dead weight, partition walls of half
brick thickness or even less are constructed. Such walls shall bear no weight except their
own. When built on suspended floors, there shall be a beam underneath to take the load, or
the floor itself designed to take its load. In modern construction, these partition walls are
also provided at the ground floor to effect saving on space and cost. In such cases, these
walls may be built on shallow foundations or even on the floor itself. Thickness of these
walls shall be:
a) 4-½” or 3” in case of wall built with non-metric bricks, and
b) 10 cm or 5 cm case of wall built with metric bricks.
10.2.2 Hoop iron reinforcement
Wall of thickness 5 cm or 7.5 cm shall invariably be constructed with hoop iron
reinforcement. Wall of thickness 10 cm shall be constructed without hoop iron reinforcement
when any of the following conditions exist:
a) The height is not more than 2 meters.
b) The supported length is not more than 3 meters.
c) The work is in first storey below plinth level.
In all other situations, this partition wall of thickness 10 cm shall be reinforced with hoop
iron. The hoop iron reinforcement shall be 25 mm wide and 1.6 mm thick. The hoop iron
band shall be embedded in cement mortar as follows:

124 of 194
 a) Wall constructed with metric bricks - every third course.
b) 4½” thick wall constructed by non-metric bricks - every 4th course.
c) 3” bricks wall constructed with non - every 3rd course.
The hoop iron shall be hooked (give in double lap) with minimum of 20 cm hooks, at all
angled junctions. Hoop iron band shall be continued for 20 cm into the main wall on which
the partition wall abuts, 5 cm length of the hoop iron being bent up or down so as to take a
firm grip of the brick work.
Before laying the hoop iron, it shall be cleaned of rust and loose flakes with wire brush. The
hoop iron shall lie quite flat on the mortar. Half the mortar for the joint shall first be laid and
other half laid after the hoop iron has been laid into position so that it is fully embedded in
the mortar. When hoop iron is not available, the Engineer may allow equivalent
reinforcement in the form of rods.
10.2.3 Materials and construction
Brickwork shall be built with bricks laid in specified mortar. The work being carried out
according to the specification for the class of brickwork specified, with the difference that all
courses shall be laid with stretchers.
10.3 Honey-comb Brick Work
10.3.1 Material
The honey comb brickwork shall be constructed with specified class of bricks which shall be
laid in specified mortar.
10.3.2 Thickness and Opening
The thickness of honey-comb brick shall be equal to half-brick or one brick as ordered by
the Engineer. The size of opening shall be as follows:
a) Half brick thick honey-comb brickwork: In case of non-metric bricks, the width of
opening shall be 4½” and height 3” so that each brick has a minimum bearing of 2¼” on
either side. In case of metric brick, width as well as height of the opening shall be 10
cm, so that each brick has a bearing of 5 cm on either side.
b) One brick thick honey-comb brickwork: In case of non-metric bricks, width of opening
shall be 2½” and height shall be 3” so that each brick shall have a bearing 1” on either
side. In case of metric brick, the width of opening shall be 6 cm and height shall be 10
cm, so that each brick shall have a bearing of 2 cm on either side.
10.3.3 Laying
The honey-comb brickwork shall be laid in the specified mortar and all joints and edges shall
be struck flush to give even surface.
10.4 Brick drip course
Brick drip course shall be laid above the junction of the roof with the parapet wall.
Specially moulded brick shall be laid for drip course. When such special bricks are not
available, bricks cut to shape may be permitted. The shape of drip course, and the
arrangements, shape etc. of lime concrete gola below the drip course to prevent water
seepage through the junction of roof and wall are shown in Fig. 12.7 (under clause 12.13.2,
CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
10.5 Moulding and cornices
Specified quality and class of bricks shall be used for the work. The bricks used for moulded
work shall be either purpose moulded or cut to required shape.
Cornices shall not ordinarily project by more than 15 cm to 20 cm. This projection shall be
formed by projecting each layer of brick by not more than one fourth of the length of bricks.
Where cornices of greater than 20 cm. is required special arrangements such as metal
cramps shall be used; which shall be paid for separately.
Corbelling shall be brought roughly to required shape by plastering with the specified mortar.
The mouldings shall be brought to shape using metal or wooden templates, while the mortar
is still green. The mouldings shall be cured properly for seven days and the work shall be
properly protected against damages by rain etc.
10.6 Chamfering of bricks

125 of 194
 In the case of brick work where a specified shape is required chamfering or cutting is to be
done which shall be paid extra.
10.7 Measurements
10.7.1 General
All brick work shall be measured net, in decimal system, as fixed in its place subject to
tolerances mentioned below. Any work done extra over the specified dimensions shall be
ignored.
Dimensions shall be measured correct upto 0.01 meter, areas shall be worked out correct
upto 0.01 square meter, and volumes shall be worked out correct upto 0.01 cubic meter.
The thickness of brick walls upto and including 75 cm thickness shall however be measured
in multiples of half brick, viz:
i) for brick work with modular brick it shall be in multiples of 10 cm.
ii) for brick work with conventional FPS bricks it shall be in multiples of 11.2 cm
iii) for brick with FPS large size bricks it shall be in multiples of 12.5 cm.
Beyond 75 cm thickness the actual thickness of wall be measured.
If for any reason the thickness of wall is required to be a specific thickness not being a
measured simple multiple of half brick the thickness of wall shall be taken as the next higher
multiple of half brick by more than 2 cm. In the latter case actual specified thickness shall
be.
Walls of half brick thickness or less shall be described as half brick wall stating its thickness
and measured separately in square meters. The following shall be taken as half brick
measurement:
For bricks 19 x 9 x 9 cm 10 cm
For bricks 19 x 9 x 4 cm
For bricks 9 x 4-3/8” x 2-3/4” 4½” or 11.5 cm
For bricks 9 x 4-3/8” x 1-3/4”
For bricks 10 x 4-7/8” x 3” 5” or 12.5 cm
For bricks 10 x 4-7/8” x 2”
Corbels, string courses, projecting pilasters, aprons and friezes, sills, cornices, drip
courses, over-sailing courses and other projections etc. of splayed bull nosed or any other
type of purpose made or cut bricks shall be fully described stating dimensions of each and
measured in running meters.
Reinforced brick work shall be kept separate from plain brick work. Reinforcement shall be
measured separately unless specifically included in the items of brick work as in the case of
half brick masonry wall reinforcement.
The work in the following situations shall be measured separately:
a) Foundations & plinths.
b) Super-structures above plinth level upto floor two level.
c) Super-structures above floor two level.
d) Square and rectangular pillars.
e) Circular pillars.
f) Curved in plan upto mean radius not exceeding 6 mtrs.
g) Tapered surfaces of brick masonry.
h) (i) In or under water or liquid mud.
(ii) In or under foul conditions.
Note: Brickwork in parapet shall be included in the corresponding masonry item of the
storey immediately below the floor above which the parapet is built.
No deduction shall be made from the quantity of brickwork, nor any extra payment be made
for embedding in masonry of making holes, in respect of the following items:

126 of 194
 i) Ends of joists, beams, pivots, girders, rafters, purlins, trusses, corbels, steps etc. whose
Cross sectional area does not exceed 500 sqcm.
ii) Opening not exceeding 1000 sqcm.
iii) Wall plates and bed-plates of slabs, chajjas and the like whose thickness does not
exceed 10 cm and bearing does not extend to the full thickness of wall.
iv) Drainage holes, and recesses for cement concrete blocks to embed hold-fasts for doors
windows etc.
v) Iron fixtures, pipes upto 300 mm dia, hold-fast of doors and windows built into masonry.
vi) Forming chases of section not exceeding 350 sqcm in masonry.
Masonry (excluding refractory brickwork) in chimney breasts, chimney stacks, smoke or air
flues up to 0.25 sqm sectional area shall be measured as solid and no extra payment shall
be made for pargetting and coring such flues. Where flues exceed 0.25 sqm in sectional
area deduction shall be made from the same and pargetting shall be paid for separately.
Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted nor shall extra labour required to make
splaying of jambs, throating and making arches over the aperture shall be paid for
separately.
10.7.2 Half brick masonry
The work shall be measured in square meters.
10.7.3 Honeycomb brickwork
Honeycomb work shall be given in square meters. The full area of honeycomb work shall be
measured without deduction for opening.
10.7.4 Brick drip course
The drip course shall be measured in running meters.
10.7.5 Moulding and cornices
The sectional periphery of mouldings and cornices shall be measured in centimeters along
the curve (excluding the portion in contact with the wall). The length shall be measured in
meters. The unit for payment shall be per cm of periphery, by per meter length of the
mouldings and cornices, measured as above.
10.7.6 Chamfering of bricks
Chamfering should be measured in running meter, correct to a centimeter.
10.7.7 Square or rectangular pillar
Square or rectangular pillar shall mean a detached masonry portion square or rectangular in
section such that its breadth does not exceed three times its thickness and the thickness
itself does not 60 cm. The measurement shall be done as for brick work-General. Extra
payment shall be allowed for pillars over and above the rate for brick work in walls.
10.7.8 Circular pillars
Circular pillar shall include other forms of curved sections such as elliptical, partly straight
and partly curved sections but shall not include intricate moulding work. The work shall be
measured net as per actuals. Extra payment shall be allowed for circular pillars over and
above the rate for brick work in wall.
10.7.9 Tapered walls
Measurement for tapered walls shall be as per actual work done but extra payment shall be
allowed for tapered walls over and above the rate for brick work.
10.7.10 Curved masonry
Curved masonry shall include masonry which has a circular shape or other form of curve, in
plan, having a minimum radius of curvature not exceeding 6 m. This shall be measured as
per actual work done. The length in plan shall be measured along the mean radius. Curved
masonry larger than 6 m radius in plan shall be measured under brick work general.
10.8 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour as described in the respective
items of work for all the operations as detailed in the respective specifications for the various
items of work. The rate also includes carriage of materials upto 1 km by mechanical

127 of 194
 transport and upto 100 meters by head load, including the cost of re-handling of material
within 100 meters. The labour rate as well as through rates include the cost of water. In case
water is supplied free by the Department, the rate shall be reduced accordingly.
The labour rate includes the cost of water, tools and plants (scaffoldings), labour and
material, and cost of good earth for mud mortar. Contractor‟s profit @ 10% and over-head
charges @ 5% has separately been added in the rates.
Separate rate for 1st class and 2nd class brick work shall be paid as mentioned in the
Schedule of Rates.
For additional items, rates as mentioned in the Schedule of Rates shall be paid.
Extra rate for laying brick work under following situations shall be paid as mentioned in the
Schedule of Rates:
a) In or under water and/or liquid mud excluding cost of bailing out or pumping out water to
remove slush.
b) In or under foul conditions.
10.9 Precautions to be taken to prevent cracks in buildings
In order to minimise cracks in buildings, the following measures shall be adopted subject to
the approval of the Engineer.
10.9.1.1 Horizontal cracks in masonry and plaster at the floor or roof slab level
10.9.1.2 A smooth bearing for RCC slabs and beams on the wall with 6 mm cement plaster 1:3 (1
cement : 3 fine sand), finished with a floating coat of neat cement shall be provided and then
finished with a thick coat of lime wash or Kraft paper. The sides and top of slabs and beams
in contacts with walls shall be painted with thick coat of hot bitumen.
10.9.1.3 The slab shall not bear on full thickness of external wall. A gap of about 12 mm shall be kept
between slab and external masonry and filled with bituminous filler or impregnated fiber
board in case of Superior buildings and bituminous filler (80 kg hot bitumen : 1 kg cement :
0.25 cubic meter coarse sand) in other buildings. The external masonry of all beyond the
expansion joint shall not be less than 10 cm.
10.9.1.4 A similar gap of 12 mm wide shall be provided and filled with impregnated fiber board or
bituminous filler when two slabs about against each other and bear on an internal wall. Such
expansion joints should always be provided at ridges (and not in valleys).
10.9.1.5 Ceiling plaster shall be done first, and then the wall plaster. When the ceiling plaster is done,
it shall be finished with a chamfered edge at an angles at its junction with the wall at bearing
with a trowel while the plaster is being done it shall be kept separate from the ceiling plaster
by a thin straight groove drawn with a trowel at an angle with the wall, while the plaster is
still green.
10.9.1.5.1 RCC or plain cement concrete 1:2:4 bed plate with a smooth surface and a thick cost
of lime wash or laid with Kraft paper shall be provided under the beams. The plaster
of wall and the bed plate shall be kept separate from that of the beam. Minimum
thickness of RCC bed plate shall be 10 cm and that of plain concrete 20 cm.
10.9.1.5.2 Horizontal cracks at the junction of sun shades with the wall
Wall plaster shall be kept separate from that of the RCC sun shade as in 10.8.1.4
above.
10.9.2 Inclined cracks at the junctions of sun shades with the wall
10.9.2.1 Flat brick arches shall be constructed for opening upto 1.2 meters.
10.9.2.2 RCC lintels shall be allowed to dry and shrink as much as possible before plastering the
wall.
10.9.3 Vertical cracks at the bearings of RCC beams or pillars
These cracks occur when RCC beam has an expansion joint over the masonry pillar. These
can be avoided by designing a continuous beam on the pillar. Where however, expansion
joint in beam is essential a RCC bed plate may be provided over the pillar for its full length
and width.
10.9.4 Transverse cracks in RCC slab in sun shades, verandahs and room

128 of 194
 Expansion joints shall be allowed at 5 to 6 meters intervals in case of sun shades 12 to 13
meters in case of covered verandah slabs and 12 to 15 meters in case of slabs continuous
over rooms in a row of quarters.
To prevent cracks in the masonry, below or above the expansion joints, the following
measure shall be taken:
10.9.4.1 Sun Shades
In this case, the expansion joints shall not extend to the portion embedded in masonry but
shall stop short of the face of the wall by 5 cm and the distribution reinforcement in the
embedded portion and in the 5 cm portion of the chajja slab where there is no expansion
joint, shall be increased to 40% of main reinforcement. The gap of the expansion joint in the
projected portion shall not be filled with any material.
10.9.4.2 Verandah Slabs
In this case, the expansion joint shall be a neat but joint which shall be finished straight. The
joint shall be carried right through the portion embedded in the masonry also. It is desirable
to provide a vertical but joint in the masonry supporting the verandah slab at the expansion
joints from plinth level. Where this is not possible, R.C.C. or plain cement concrete bed
plates shall be provided on the bearing. To prevent cracks in the masonry above, the
longitudinal wall shall have also a butt joint with gap running in the same vertical plane as
the joint in the slab. The gap can, in the case of roof slabs, be sealed by copper cradles.
10.9.4.3 Room Slabs
In load structure, expansion joint in room slabs shall be similar to that in verandah slabs.
Where slab is combined with T-Beams, the expansion joint shall be provided by substituting
one of the T-beams, with rectangular beam and slabs as per Fig. 5.16 (CPWD
Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
In RCC framed structure, the expansion joint is generally provided in conjunction with twin
beams and twin column as shown in Fig. 5.15 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009). The
expansion joint shall be provided with copper cradle and its top filled with bituminous
materials. The underside of the beam shall be provided with sheet of asbestos or any other
suitable material, which shall be fixed on one side and shall be free to move on the other
side within oval shaped holes, in case of twin columns, the expansion joint is similarly
covered on the inside and outside.
The gap between the twin column and the gap below copper cradle in twin beams need not
be filled with any bitumen filler but may be kept unfilled. Before however, the joint covered
on the outside with asbestos or any other suitable sheets, the gap should be cleaned
thoroughly of all rubbish or mortar droppings etc.
10.9.5 Cracks at the junction of new building with old
When making additions to an old building, if new masonry is toothed with old masonry there
is a likelihood of cracks occurring at the junction because of differential settlement. Toothing
therefore shall be avoided and new masonry shall be laid with a slip joint, for thick walls.
Where tongued and grooved joint is not possible as in 20 cm walls, the joint shall be straight
butt joint only.
10.9.6 Cracks in general
10.9.6.1 Masonry work shall be proceeded systematically and uniformly at all levels.
10.9.6.2 The plaster work on walls shall be deferred as much as possible so as to let shrinkage in
R.C.C. and masonry take place before plastering.
11 FLOORING
11.1 General Specification
11.1.1 Sand Filling
The earth filling shall be stopped at such a height as to allow of full thickness of sand, or
cement concrete and the correct thickness of surfacing. In areas, where the water table is
near the ground surface, a suitable treatment shall be provided to prevent the rise of
moisture into the floor. This treatment shall be paid for separately.

129 of 194
11.1.2 Base Concrete
Base concrete shall be laid in accordance with the specifications laid in section 8 above, in
one operation in a uniform layer, absolutely true and parallel to what is required on the
finished surface and to the satisfaction of Engineer.
11.1.3 Levelling
A reference level mark shall be marked all-round on the walls (15 cms) or so above the floor
level with the help of a water level. Water level consists of a can of water connected with a
rubber tubing to a glass tube, which shows the level of water in the can. With the help of this
level, truly horizontal lines shall serve as a datum from which all levels for base layer and
topping etc. shall be measured off.
11.1.4 Paving to Bond with Base Concrete
The finishing surface or paving shall not be laid before the base concrete, has set for at
least seven days. While the surface is still soft enough to received and retain the
impression, it should be brushed with stiff-bristled broom. This is very necessary in order to
remove laitance, scum and inadequately embedded coarse aggregate.
In addition to the brushing, scour and pit the surface so as to provide mechanical bond for
the topping. During the interval between the finish the base shall be thoroughly cured and
protected from the deposition of grease, pitch paint or any other foreign substance. Also
immediately prior to the placing of the finishing topping, the base course shall be roughened
with steel wire brushes without disturbing the concrete and wetted. It shall be ensured that
the surface of the base course is absolutely free from the surplus water, laitance and other
foreign matter.
11.1.5 Surface to be passed
The surface of the screed bed or base concrete shall be passed by the Assistant Engineer
before the wearing coat.
11.1.6 Flooring to continue under Doorway and Fireplace
The brickwork or masonry shall be kept down sufficiently under all archways, doors and
fireplaces to admit the depth of finishing surface being carried through. Joints shall be given
at this place, however, to avoid unsightly cracks due to any uneven settlement. The offsets
walls, pillars etc. shall be kept down sufficiently under to admit the full depth of both the
finishing surface and the base below it being carried through.

11.1.7 Levels and Slopes

Unless otherwise specified, all floors shall be perfectly level, except bathroom and verandah
floors, which shall have an outward slope of 1 in 60. The layers of sand concrete shall be
uniform in thickness and any slope required is to be obtained by marking the outer walls
lower than the inner ones by the necessary amounts.
11.1.8 Straight Edges and Spirit Levels
The Contractor shall provide and keep available wherever flooring work is proceeding,
straight edges of a length not less than 2.5 meters and with parallel sides, as well a 25 cms
spirit-level for the purpose of testing the trueness of the floor being laid.
Note: Specification given below for different type of flooring are in addition to the General
Specifications mentioned above.
11.2 White Glazed Tiles in Flooring, Treads of Steps, and Landings
11.2.1 Material
White glazed tiles shall confirm to the specifications given below. All other materials used
shall confirm to specifications given in the relevant sections or as decided by Engineer.
11.2.1.1 Glazed Tile (White, Indian make)
The tiles shall be of approved make and shall conform to IS: 777-1988. They shall be flat
and true to shape and free from cracks, crazing spots chipped edges and corners. The
glazing shall be of uniform shade.

130 of 194
 The tiles shall be of nominal sizes such as 150 mm x 150 mm and 100 mm x 100 m or as
specified. The thickness of the tiles shall be 5 mm, or 6 mm as specified. The tolerance on
facial dimension value shall be ± 1.0 mm and ± 0.5 mm on thickness.
The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The glaze shall be either glossy or matt as
specified. The underside of the tiles shall be completely free from glaze in order that the tile
may adhere properly to the base. The edges of the titles shall be preferably free from glaze,
however, any glaze if unavoidable, shall be permissible on any one edge of the tile.
11.2.1.2 Internal or External angle (Glazed)
The angles shall be of thickness not less than the tiles with which they are used. The size of
the angles shall be as specified in the description of the item. The stipulated size of angled
referred to the greatest width of the special measure in a straight line. The lengths of
specials shall be 15 cm, 10 cm or other standard size available conforming to the size of
tiles available. In other respects, the general specifications described in 11.2.1.1 above shall
be applicable.
11.2.2 Workmanship
11.2.2.1 Sub-grade
Sub-grade shall be of concrete or of R.C.C. slab.
11.2.2.2 Bedding
Bedding over which the tiles shall be laid shall be of 12 mm average thickness in cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand).
11.2.2.3 Laying
Sub-grade shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding shall be laid evenly over the
surface, tamped and corrected to desired levels and allowed to harden enough to offer a
rigid cushion to tiles and to enable the mason to place wooden planks across and squat on
it. Before laying the tiles grey cement slurry or honey like consistency at 3.3 Kg/square
meter shall be applied over the bedding. At a time in area to accommodate about twenty
tiles shall be applied with cement slurry. Tiles shall then be washed clean and fixed in the
grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped in line with adjoin tile. The joints shall
be as thin as possible in straight line or as per the pattern. The surface of the flooring shall
be checked with a straight edge about 2 m long so as to obtain a true surface with the
required slope.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their
edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tile fixed in the floor near the wall
shall enter plaster, skirting or dado to a minimum depth of 10 mm.
After laying the tiles, excess cement grout is cleaned.
11.2.2.4 Jointing and finishing
The joints shall be cleaned of grey cement grout with wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5
mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. White cement shall then be used for flush
pointing the joints. The floor shall be cured for seven days. The surface then be washed and
cleaned. The surface shall not sound hollow when tapped.
11.2.3 Measurements
White glazed tiles shall be measured in square meters correct to two places of decimal.
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to 1 cm between the exposed faces of
skirting or dado where the junction of flooring with skirting or dado is square.
11.2.4 Rate
11.2.4.1 General
11.2.4.1.1 The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
des cribbed above for completing the work as per specifications and as per schedule.
11.2.4.1.2 The through rates include the carriage of all materials upto a distance of 100 meters
on head load and 1 kilometer by mechanical transport. The rates of items involving
terrazzo/glazed tiles have been worked out on the basis of rates as at district
headquarters of Uttarakhand State. All other carriage shall be counted for separately
depending upon locations of site of the work. The through rates include all wastage

131 of 194
 and the labour rates include the charges on account of form work, tools and plants,
scaffolding, sundries and water charges etc.
11.2.4.1.3 The rates are applicable for laying of flooring upto floor two. For every subsequent
storey-height, an additional rate of 1% above through rates should be added.
11.2.4.1.4 The rate includes water charges, contractor‟s profit @10% and overhead charges
@5%. The rate does not include the cost of sub-grade if provided in specifications
unless otherwise specified. Dividing strips shall be paid separately as mentioned in
the latest applicable Uttarakhand PWD Schedule of Rates (2014-2015) of
Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work locations of Guptkashi,
Sonprayag, Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan], under Block 17-
Agastyamuni (for Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for Work
location of Jakholi).
11.2.4.1.4.1 The labour rates and through rates is applicable for glazed tiles of white shade and of
size 152 mm x 152 mm x 6 mm. In case, the tiles used are of size 150 mm x 75 mm x
6 mm or 108 mm x 108 mm x 6 mm the labour rates shall be increased by 50%. The
through rates shall be increased by 30%.
In case the coloured glazed tiles are used, the labour rates shall remain un-changed
but the through rates shall be increased by 15%. These rates are not applicable for
specially decorated or fluted tiles for which special rates shall be paid, if used.
The rate also includes the cost of bedding and cement slurry applied over it. An extra
rate as per schedule shall be paid for laying of white glazed tiles in treads of steps not
exceeding 30 cm in width.
11.3 White Glazed Tiles in Risers of Steps, Skirting and Dado
11.3.1 Material
Material shall be as specified in 11.2.1 above.
11.3.2 Workmanship
11.3.2.1 Preparation of surface
In case of brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm while
the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete wall, the surface shall be hauled and
roughened with wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned wetted thoroughly before
commencing the laying work.
11.3.2.2 Laying
The wall surface shall be covered with 12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement :
3 coarse sand) mix and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened when it sets
initially with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal lines 1.5 mm deep at 7.5 cm c/c both
ways. The back of tiles shall be buttered with grey cement slurry and edges with white
cement slurry and set in bedding mortar. The tiles shall be gently tamped in position one
after the other keeping the joints as thin as possible. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly
horizontal and the joints vertical or as per required pattern.
Risers of steps, skirting and dado shall rest on top of treads or flooring. Where full size tiles
cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and the edges be
smoothened.
11.3.2.3 Curing and finishing
The joints shall be cleaned and flush pointed with white cement. The surface shall be kept
wet for seven days. After curing the surface shall be washed clean. The surface shall not
sound hollow when tapped with a mallet.
11.3.3 Measurement
Risers to steps, skirting and dado shall be measured in square meters correct to two places
of decimal. Length and height shall be measured along the finished face of the skirting or
dado including curves where specials such as cover, internal and external angles and beads
are used. Length except in case of risers and skirting where height shall be measured
correct to 3 mm.
At places where full size are not used and cut (sawn) tiles are required, extra shall be paid
for the same confining the extra to the portion using cut tiles. In addition to payment for

132 of 194
 risers, skirting and dado specials such as covers, internal and external angles, beads and
cornices shall be measured separately and paid for running meters.
11.3.4 Rate
The rate shall be as per specification in 11.2.4 above. The rate also includes the cost of
cement plaster to be used as bedding and cement slurry used. Where tiles are to cut, an
extra rate as per schedule shall be paid.
11.4 Slate Tile Cladding on Vertical/Inclined Surfaces
11.4.1 Material
All material used shall comply with specifications given below for slate, and for cement
mortar etc., the specifications given in other relevant sections above shall apply.
11.4.1.1 Slate
11.4.1.1.1 General
The slate shall be flat properly squared to the specified size with firm sides and not
liable to fracture when holed. They shall be tough, hard, sonorous on being struck,
rough to the touch, free from flaws or cracks, non-absorbent and of uniform thickness.
The quarry from which the slates are obtained shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The slating nails shall be of copper or of non-rusting composition approved by the
Engineer.
11.4.1.1.2 Sizes and Pitches
The size of slates given below shall not be laid at pitches flatter than those
given against each other, nor shall the pitch be greatly in excess of that given or
undue strain is put upon the nails:
(1) 60 cm x 30 cm pitch 22 Degrees
(2) 50 cm x 25 cm pitch 27 Degrees
(3) 40 cm x 20 cm pitch 33 Degrees
11.4.1.1.3 Specific Gravity
The specific gravity of slate shall be 2.89.
11.4.1.1.4 Compressive Strength
The compressive strength of the slate shall be 770 to 2110 kg/sqcm.
11.4.1.1.5 Uses
The slates are used as roofing and flooring material. Harder varieties of slates are
used for dado work and steps of stairs.
11.4.1.1.5.1 All other specifications for workmanship shall be the same as specified in the section
11.3 above and as per nomenclature in the Work item including exceptions to be
followed in workmanship as mentioned below and as directed by the Engineer for the
desired pattern of slate roof work.
11.4.1.2 Double slate roofing
11.4.1.2.1 Laps
The laps, or the distance by which a state overlaps the next but one below it, shall in
no case be less than 75mm.
11.4.1.2.2 Placing
All slates shall butt close to each other, with the rough side uppermost. Every nail
shall be covered by the covering slate, except in the eaves course.
11.4.1.2.3 Ridge concrete
The top edge of the slates on each side of the ridge shall rest on the ridge plate, the
top of which shall be played to the roof slope. The slates shall be accurately cut form
a straight and close joint. On the apex formed by the edge of the slates, a roll not less
than 3 inches (7.5 cm) and made of 1:2:4 cement concrete shall be formed, with the
center coinciding with the apex formed by the slates.
11.4.1.2.4 Hips

133 of 194
 Hips shall be laid on the same manner as the ridge, unless it has been specified that
these should be concealed.
11.4.1.2.5 Concealed hips
Concealed hips will be covered by lead sheets which have been cut to the length of
the slate, bent over to straddle the hip batten, and fixed in position similarly to the
state. The lead will be covered completely by the upper slate which shall be
accurately cut to form a straight and close joint.
11.4.1.3 Single slate roofing
Single state roofing shall be laid in the same manner as double slate roofing excepting that
only head nailing shall be employed, center nailing being not feasible. The head side laps
shall be at least 7.5 cms and 3.8 cms respectively.
11.4.2 Measurements
All work shall be measured net as fixed without any allowance for laps except that opening
of area 0.40 sqm and under shall not be deducted. The portions of roof covered by ridge or
hip coverings shall be included in the roof measurements. The ridge or hip coverings shall
be measured in running meters and paid for separately.
11.4.3 Rate
The through rates for slate roofing include the cost of slates, nails, ridges, hips etc. along
with cement mortar, curing etc. The labour rates cover the labour charges for the above
operations.
Rates shall be as specified below, apart from as specified in section 11.3 above:
The rate includes the cost of all labour and materials involved in all operations for
completing the work as per specifications.
The labour rate through includes the carriage of material for 100 meters by head load and
one kilometer by mechanical transport. It also includes the cost of water, tools and plants,
scaffolding, cost of cement mortar, contractor‟s profit @10% and over-head charges @5%.
The rates also include the wastage and overlaps of slates.
11.5 Black Chamba Stone Tiles
11.5.1 Material
The material of Black Chamba Stone Tiles for flooring, treads of steps and landing, and its
dimensions and surface texture/finish shall be as specified in the Work item as approved
and directed by the Engineer.
11.5.2 All other specifications for workmanship, measurement, and rate shall be the same as
specified in the section 11.2 above and as per nomenclature in the Work item.

12 PLASTERING AND DISTEMPERING WORK

12.1 Materials
The cement mortar to be used shall be as specified in the Work item, and shall be as per the
material specifications given in section 8.2.2.5 above.

12.2 General Specifications

12.2.1 Scaffolding
For all exposed work double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports be provided.
The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which
scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
For all other work in buildings, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases, the inner
end of the horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in header course for
the purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding
shall, however not be allowed in pillars/columns less than one meter in width, or immediately
near the skew backs of arches. The holes left in masonry works for scaffolding purposes
shall be filled and made good before plastering.

134 of 194
 For ceiling plaster, stage scaffolding shall be provided. This shall be independent of walls.
Note: In case of special type of work, scaffolding shall be got approved from Engineer in
advance.
12.2.2 Tools
Tools shall be used as per IS: 1630-1984, Specifications for accessory tools for plaster work
and pointing work.
12.2.3 Preparation of Back Ground
The surface shall be cleaned off all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, and other
foreign matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surfaces shall be roughened by wire
brushing, if it is not hard; by hacking if it is hard. In case of concrete surface, if a chemical
retarder has been applied to the form work, the surface shall be roughened by wire brushing
and all the resulting dust and loose particles cleaned off and care shall be taken that none of
the retarders is left on the surface.
For the durability of the plaster, it is of the utmost important to obtain a satisfactory bond
between the back ground and the plaster coat and also ensure that the bond is maintained
subsequently. Before plastering, the joints of all old brick work or masonry and of all new
work in mud shall be raked out with a hook (nor a hammer or tesi) to a depth of 13 mm. New
brick work or masonry in lime, or cement mortar, if it is to be subsequently plastered, shall
have the joints raked out before the mortar has set. The earth and mortar dust obtained from
raking the joints shall be thoroughly washed off, and the work watered for 24 hours before
the plaster is applied.
Where plastering is to be done on an old backing, special care shall be taken in preparing
the same for a new coat of a plaster. The crumbled layers of backing shall be completely
removed and made good. If the backing contains soluble salts particularly sulphates, the
application of the plastering shall be done only after the efflorescence of the salts is
complete and same is thoroughly removed from surface.
For concrete surface, projecting burrs of mortar formed due to the gaps at joints in
shuttering shall be removed. The surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. In
addition concrete surfaces shall be pock marked with a pointed tool, at spacing of not more
than 5 cm centers, the pocks being made not less than 3 mm deep, this is to ensure a
proper key for the plaster. The surface shall be washed off and cleaned of all oil, grease
etc., and well wetted before the plaster is applied.
The backing shall be even in order to avoid variations in the thickness of plasters. Any
brickwork or masonry that projects beyond the general face of plaster shall be cut back.
All putlog holes shall be filled up in advance of the plastering, as the scaffolding is being
taken down.
12.2.4 Sequence of Operations
For external plaster the plastering operations shall be started from the top floor and carried
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations may be started wherever the
building frame and cladding work are ready and the temporary supports of the ceiling resting
on the wall or the ceiling have been removed.
The surfaces to be plastered shall first be prepared as described in Clause 12.2.3 above.
The first coat shall then be applied to ceilings. After the ceiling plaster is completed and
scaffolding for the same removed, the first coat shall be applied on walls. The first coat shall
be under coat in case of two or three coat plaster work.
After a suitable time interval as detailed under various types of plaster in subsequent paras
depending upon the type of mortar, the second coat shall be applied. Surface of the first
under coat shall be adjusted and screeds laid to serve as guides in bringing the work to an
even surface. After a further suitable time interval as detailed under various type of plaster in
subsequent paras, the finishing coat shall be applied first to the ceilings and then to the
walls.
Plastering of cornices, decorative features etc. shall be completed before the finishing coat
is applied.
Where corners and edges have to be rounded off, such rounding off shall be completed
along with the finishing coat to prevent any joint marks showing out later.

135 of 194
12.2.5 Finish
The plaster shall be laid to a true plain surface and tested frequently with a straight-edge
and plumb-bob or the spirit level as the case may be. The straight-edge shall not be less
than 3 meters in length. All horizontal lines and surfaces shall be tested with a level, and all
jambs and corners with a plumb-bob and a masons square as the work proceeds. All
mouldings shall be worked true to template and shall be neat, clean level, and parallel, or
truly plumb as the case may be.
12.2.6 Precaution against Discontinuity
To prevent cracking of plaster, caused by discontinuity of backing such as changing from
concrete to brickwork or changing from wall to ceiling, a neat cut through the plaster shall be
applied at the junction.
12.2.7 Cleanliness and Protection
Adequate protection shall be given to all existing work and fittings, which are liable to be
damaged during plastering by covering up with boards, dust sheets etc. as necessary. Care
shall be taken to avoid the splashing of mortar on to neighbouring finished surfaces; any
such splashes shall be cleaned off immediately. On completion, work affected by plastering
operations, shall be left clean.
12.2.8 Defects
Any cracks in the plaster, or parts which sound hollow when tapped, or are found to be soft
or otherwise defective after the plaster has dried, shall be cut out in rectangles or squares
and re-plastered by the Contractor at his own cost.
Note: Specifications given below for different items are in addition to the general
specifications described above.
12.3 Cement Plaster
12.3.1 Cement ceiling plaster
12.3.1.1 Scaffolding
This shall be as per Clause 12.2.1 above.
12.3.1.2 Preparation of surface
The surface shall be prepared as per Clause 12.2.3 above.
12.3.1.3 Mortars
Mortar of the specified mix shall be used.
12.3.1.4 Application
Ceiling plaster shall not be commenced until the slab above has been finished and centering
has been removed. In the case of ceilings of roof slabs, plaster shall not be commenced
until the terrace work has been completed. These precautions are necessary in order that
the ceiling plaster is not disturbed by the vibrations set up in the above operations.
To ensure even thickness and a true surface, gauges of plaster 15 cm x 15 cm shall be first
applied at not more than 1.5 m intervals in both directions to serve as guides for the
plastering. Surfaces of these gauges areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster
surface. The plaster shall then be applied in a uniform surface to a thickness slightly more
than the specified thickness and shall then be brought to true and even surface by working a
wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges. Finally the surface shall be finished true
with a trowel or with wooden float accordingly as a smooth of sandy granular texture is
required. Excess trowelling or overworking of the floats shall be avoided. The plastering and
finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the dry mortar.
12.3.1.5 Finish
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work proceeds with a
true straight edge not less than 2.5 m long with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and surfaces
shall be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the work
proceeds.
12.3.1.6 Thickness

136 of 194
 The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than 6 mm. The minimum thickness over
any portion of the surface shall not be less than 5 mm.
12.3.1.7 Curing
Curing shall be started as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged
when watered.
The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this period, it shall be
suitably protected from all damages at the Contractor‟s expense by such means as the
Engineer may approve. The dates on which the plastering is done shall be legibly marked
on the various sections plastered so that curing for the specified period thereafter can be
watched.
12.3.2 Cement plaster for slab bearing
12.3.2.1 Cement plaster shall be 6 mm thick of 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand) mix finished with a floating
coat of neat cement and thick coat of lime wash on top of walls for bearing of slabs.
12.3.2.2 Application
The plaster shall be applied over the cleaned and wetted surface of the wall. When the
plaster has been brought to a true surface with the wooden straight edge it shall be
uniformly treated over its entire area with a paste of neat cement and rubbed smooth, so
that the whole surface is covered with neat cement coating. The quantity of cement applied
for floating coat shall be 2.2 kg per sqm. Smooth finishing shall be completed with trowel
immediately and in no case later than half an hour of adding water to the plaster mix. The
rest of the specifications as described below shall apply.
One coat plaster work:
(a) Application
The plaster about 15 cm x 15 cm shall be first applied, horizontally and vertically, not
more than 2 meter intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surfaces of
these gauges areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The
mortar than shall be laid on the wall, between the gauges with trowel. The mortar shall
be applied in a uniform surface slightly more than the specified thickness. This shall be
beated with thapies to ensure through filling of joints, and then brought to a true
surface, by working a wooden straight edge reaching across the gauges with small
upward and sideways movements at a time. Finally the surfaces shall be finished off
true with a trowel or wooden float accordingly as a smooth or a sandy granular texture
is required. Excessive trowelling or overworking the float shall be avoided. During the
process, a solution of lime putty shall be applied on the surface to make the latter
workable. All corners, arrises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal
as the case may be, and shall be carefully finished, rounding or chamfering corners,
arrises, junctions, etc. shall be carried out with proper templates to the size required.
In suspending the work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left, cut clean to line
both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the edge of the old work shall be
scraped, cleaned wetted with lime putty before plaster is applied to the adjacent areas
to enable the two to properly join together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of
the day on the body of the wall and nearest than 15 cm to any corner or arrises. It shall
not be closed on the body of features such as plaster bands and cornices not at the
corners, or arrises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops
and copings as these invariably lead to leakages. No portion of the surface shall be left
out initially to be patched up later on.
(b) Curing
This shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster and shall be kept wet for a
period of 7 days. During this period it shall be protected from all damages. The dates of
plastering shall be legibly marked on various sections of the walls so that curing for the
specified period thereafter can be watched.
12.3.2.3 Lime wash
This shall be applied in a thick coat after curing the plaster for three days.
12.3.3 Cement plaster on walls etc.
12.3.3.1 Preparation of mortars for plastering

137 of 194
 This shall conform to the specification under section 8.2.2.5 above. The mortar of specified
proportions shall be used.
12.3.3.2 Application of plaster
This shall conform to the specifications under Clause 12.3.2.2 (a) above except that the
beating with thapies shall not be done on the cement plaster and no lime putty solution shall
be applied on the face while finishing.
Cement plaster shall be used within half an hour after addition of water. Any mortar or
plaster which is partially set shall be rejected and removed forth-with from the site at
Contractor‟s cost. In case of two or three coat plaster the under coat shall be left rough and
furrowed 2 mm deep with a scratching tool diagonally both ways to form key for finishing
coat. Thickness of each coat shall be as specified.
12.3.3.3 Curing
Each coat shall be kept damp continuously till the next coat is applied or for a minimum
period of 7 days. Moistening shall commence as soon as plaster is hardened sufficiently.
Soaking of walls shall be avoided and only as much water as can be readily absorbed shall
be used. Excessive evaporation on the sunny or windward sides of buildings in hot air dry
weather shall be prevented by handing mattings or gunny bags on the outside of the plaster
and keeping them wet.
12.4 Measurement
12.4.1 Ceiling Plaster
Ceiling plaster shall be measured under the following classifications.
(a) These shall be measured between the walls or partitions and the dimensions before
plastering shall be taken.
(b) Ceiling at a height greater than 5 m shall be so described and shall be measured
separately stating the height in stages of 1 meter or part thereof.
(c) Ceiling with projected shall be measured over beams and plastered side of beam shall
be measured added to plastering on ceiling.
(d) Spherical and groined ceiling shall each be measured separately.
(e) Soffits of stairs shall be measured as plastering on ceiling. Flowing soffits (viz. portion
under spiral stair case etc.) shall be measured separately.
(f) Ribs and mouldings on ceiling shall be measured as for cornices, deduction being
made from the plastering on ceiling in case the width/girth of the mouldings exceed 150
mm.
12.4.2 Cement Plaster
12.4.2.1 The description of each item, unless otherwise stated includes wherever necessary,
conveyance and delivery, handling, unloading, storing, fabrication, hoisting, all labour for
finishing to required shape and size, setting, fitting and fixing in position, straight cutting and
waste, return of packing and other incidental charges.
12.4.2.2 Preparation of back ground i.e. cleaning of masonry/concrete surface of all dust, loose
mortar drooping traces of algae, efflorescence and other foreign matter and roughing by
wire brushing or hacking, as may be required unless otherwise stated in included in the
items and shall not be measured and paid for separately.
12.4.2.3 Raking out of joints and trimming off the projections on brick/concrete surface before
plastering where necessary shall not be measured and paid for separately.
12.4.2.4 All plastering shall be measured in square meters unless otherwise specified. Length,
breadth or height shall be measured correct to 0.01 meters.
12.4.2.5 Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. grooves or open
joints in brick work, stone work etc. or space between laths. Thickness of plaster shall mean
the minimum thickness at any point on a surface. Dubbing out shall not be measured and
paid for in the case of new work nor for rough surface of old does brick/stone masonry work
where the face is in plumb as the rates for plastering include for the necessary dubbing to
such surfaces.

138 of 194
12.4.2.6 The measurement of wall plastering shall be taken between the walls or partition
(dimensions before plastering being taken) for length and from the top of floor or skirting to
ceiling for height. Depth of coves or cornices if any shall be deducted.
12.4.2.7 Plastering in isolated width or in widths not forming part of general plastering work (as in
bands, cornices, sunk panels etc.) shall be measured as below:
(a) 300 mm or below in width/girth in running meters.
(b) Width/girth above 300 mm in square meters.
12.4.2.8 Plastering at height greater than 10 meters above ground/datum level shall be measured
separately in stages of 5 meters height except interior plastering in case of building which
shall be measured for each storey.
12.4.2.9 A coefficient of 1.63 shall be adopted for the measurement of one side plastering on honey
comb work having 6 cm x 10 cm opening.
12.4.2.10 Soffits of stairs shall be measured as plastering on ceilings. Flowing soffits shall be
measured separately.
12.4.2.11 Sides of plasters, projections etc. shall be added to plaster on walls.
12.4.2.12 Mouldings, architraves, ceiling ribs, cornices and the like, on plasters and around
opening etc. shall be measured separately as specified in 12.4.2.7 above. Length
shall be measured in running meters at the center of girth. Girth shall be measured
along curve of moulding.
12.4.2.13 Moulded cornices and coves shall be measured in squared meters, the area being
arrived at by multiplying length by girth.
12.4.2.14 Flat or weathered top to cornices when exceeding 15 cm in width shall not be
included in the girth but measured with the general plaster work.
12.4.2.15 Deductions
For jambs, soffits, sills, etc., for openings not exceeding 0.5 square meter each in
area, for ends of joints, beams, posts, girders, steps, etc. not exceeding 0.5 square
meter in each area, deductions and additions shall be made in the following manner:
(a) No deductions shall be made for ends of joints, beams, posts, etc. and openings
not exceeding 0.5 sqm each and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs,
soffits, sills etc. of these openings nor for finish to plaster around ends of joints,
beams, posts etc.
(b) Deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 sqm but not exceeding 3 sqm each shall
be made as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits,
sills, etc. of these openings.
(1) When both faces of wall are plastered with same plaster, deduction shall be
made for one face only.
(2) When two faces of wall are plastered with different types of plasters or if one
face is plastered and the other pointed, deduction shall be made from the
plaster or pointing on the side of frame for door, window, etc. on which width
of reveals is less than that on the other side but no deduction shall be made
on the other side. Where widths of reveals on both faces of wall are equal,
deduction of 50% of area face shall be made from areas of plaster and/or
pointing as the case may be.
(3) When only one face is plastered and the other face is not, full deduction
shall be made from plaster if width of reveal on plastered side is less than
that on unplastered side, but if widths of reveal on both sides are equal or
width of reveal on unplastered side is more no deduction shall be made.
(4) For openings having door frames equal to or projecting beyond the
thickness of wall, full deduction for opening shall be made from each
plastered face of the wall.
(c) In case of openings of area above 3 sqm each, deduction shall be made for
opening but jambs, soffits and sills shall be measured.
(d) Different quantities of plastering referred to this para shall not include “Plastering
with terrazzo finish” as the method of measurement in this case is different. In

139 of 194
 such cases where the plaster on the other face consist of a plaster with terrazzo
finish. Method of addition and deductions for the ordinary plaster face shall be
regulated as if that face alone is plastered and the other is given an entirely
different type of non-comparable treatment.
Note: In calculating areas of openings the extra width of rebated reveals, if any, shall
be excluded.
12.4.2.16 Plastering on ceilings and walls shall be measured separately.
12.4.2.17 Circular work not exceeding 6 meters in radius shall be measured separately from
wall plaster.
12.4.2.18 Fair joints and cutting to edges shall not be measured separately.
12.5 Rate
The labour rate includes the cost of all materials and labour required for completing the work
as per specifications.
1) The labour rates and through rates include carriage up to 100 meters on head load and
one kilometer by mechanical transport.
2) The labour rates include the sundry items like sand, papers scrappers, soap and soda
etc., as also the water charge.
3) The labour rates also include the labour required for thoroughly mixing the mortar and
all sorts of scaffolding and ladders etc.
4) The specialty paints shall be the paints which are declared as such by Chief Engineer,
Uttarakhand Public Works Department.
All items shall be paid as per latest applicable Uttarakhand PWD Schedule of Rates (2014-
2015) of Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work locations of Guptkashi,
Sonprayag, Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan], under Block 17-
Agastyamuni (for Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for Work location of
Jakholi). The rate also includes contractor‟s profit @ 10% and overhead charges @ 5%.

12.6 Oil Bound Washable Distemper Work

12.6.1 Scaffolding
Whenever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible
no part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white or colour washed. A properly
secured and well tied suspended platform (JHOOLA) may be used for white washing and
colour washing / distempering. Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be
tied at top and bottom to prevent scratches to the walls and floors. For white washing or
colour washing/distempering of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected, where
necessary.
12.6.2 Preparation of surfaces
Specification as given below shall be applicable except that any unevenness shall be made
good by applying putty, made of Plaster of Paris mixed with water on the entire surface
including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry:
(a) Undecorated surfaces: The surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed free from dust, dirt,
grease, mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand-papered smooth. New
plaster surface shall be allowed to dry for at least 2 months, before applying distemper.
(b) Decorated surfaces: All loose pieces and scales shall be removed by sand-papering
and surface shall be cleaned of all grease, dust, etc. Where heavy scaling has taken
place, the entire surface shall be scraped by means of steel scrapers so as to remove
all accumulated distemper leaving clean surface.
(c) General: All necessary nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good
with Plaster of Paris mixed with dry distemper of colour to be used. The surface shall
then rubbed down again with a fine grade sand-paper and made smooth. A coat of the
distemper shall be applied over the patches. The surfaces shall be allowed to dry
thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.
(d) The surface affected by efflorescence, moulds, moss, fungi, algae, lichen etc. shall be
treated in accordance with IS: 2395 (Part 1)-1994 before applying white wash or colour
wash/distemper which is briefly explained hereunder.

140 of 194
 Local areas affected by efflorescence shall be cut out and re-plastered. In case the
area is not to be cut and re-plastered, then the treatment with metal foil to prevent the
absorption of water from exterior or the penetration of water into the interior shall be
done as under:
The area to be treated shall be cleaned of dust and allowed to dry prior to the
application by means of a thin coat of bitumen primer conforming IS: 3384-1986
(Specification of bitumen primer for use in water proofing and damp-proofing). Brown
type bitumen (Penetration 10 to 20) conforming to IS: 702-1988 (Specification for
o
industrial bitumen, revised), shall be hot applied by brush at a temperature of 115 C to
2
the surface at the rate of approximately 1.5 kg/m .
The following remedial measures shall however be adopted for the prevention of
efflorescence:
Sealing coats may not effectively hold back strong efflorescence. Dry brushing of the
growth as it appears is the only remedy. Efflorescent salts shall not be removed by
washing with water as it may carry some of the salts back into the pores. On re-drying,
efflorescence may be even worse than before if the salts were still present in the
structure. Efflorescence will continue as long as there is sufficient water in the structure
or plaster backings to carry the soluble salts forward and it is unless to attempt to seal
the moisture by the paint film on the surface. The treatment of an old wall with
hydrofuge silicone will frequently stop the efflorescence as the liquid blocks the
passage for movement of moisture. In the case of efflorescence due to the rising of salt
solutions through capillary action from sub-soil the only remedy is to provide bitumen or
metallic seals in the walls above the ground level so that an effective barrier to the
capillary action is created.
The growths of vegetation such as Moulds, Fungi, Algae, Lichens etc., shall be
removed and ammonia Cal copper solution applied to the surface.
A recommended composition and concentration of the ammonia Cal wash shall consist
of 7 g of copper carbonate dissolved in 80 ml liqueur ammonia and diluted to one litre
with water. Alternatively, 2.5 percent magnesium silicofluoride solution may be used.
This shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before painting. To prevent recurrence of mould
growth on repainted surfaces the following procedure shall be adopted:
a) Remove the source of dampness and dry out the walls;
b) Improve ventilation, if necessary;
c) Remove the infected paint or paper; and
d) Sterilize the surface by applying an antiseptic wash, such as 2 percent sodium
pentachlorophenate or any other proprietary material and allow to dry.
In case of decorated surfaces already dry distempered and required for applying oil
bound distempers, the distemper whether in good or bad condition shall be removed
completely by washing even to the last trace and allowed to dry completely and then
sand prepared smooth as per Clause 12.6.2(c) above.
12.6.3 Primer coat
The primer where used as on undecorated surfaces shall be alkali resistance primer or
distemper primer as specified in the item. These shall be of the same manufacturer as oil
bound distemper. 0.81 litre of distemper primer shall be used for an area of 10 sqm for each
coat.
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, alkali resistance primer shall be applied
before distempering the walls. But if the distempering is done after the wall is dried
completely, distemper primer shall be applied.
Primer shall be applied with a brush on the clean dry and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes
shall be given first and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire
operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible
leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours before, oil bound
distemper or paint is applied. However, oil bound distemper is not recommended to be
applied within six months of the completion of wall plaster. For decorated surfaces, no
primer is necessary.
12.6.4 Preparation of oil bound distemper

141 of 194
 The distemper shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed thinner in a manner
recommended by the manufacturer. Only sufficient quantity of distemper required for day‟s
work shall be prepared. 0.81 litre of distemper shall be used for area of 10 sqm.
For undecorated surfaces 1.5 kg of distemper shall be used for two coats for an area of 10
sqm. For decorated surfaces, 1 kg of distemper shall be used for one coat for an area of 10
sqm. For every additional coat, 1 kg of distemper shall be used for an area of 10 sqm.
12.6.5 Application of distemper coat
For undecorated surfaces, after primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall
be lightly sand-papered to make it smooth receiving the distemper, taking care not to rub out
the priming coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. Minimum two coats of
distemper shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed to immediately by
vertical which together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied after
a time interval of at least 24 hours between consecutive coats to permit of the proper drying
of the preceding coat. For decorated surfaces, the distemper shall be applied in one coat or
more over the prepared surface in the same manner as for undecorated surfaces.
The finished surface shall be even and uniform without patches, brush marks, distemper
drops etc.
Sufficient quantity of distemper shall be mixed to finish one room at a time. The application
of a coat in each room shall be finished in one operation and no work shall be started in any
room, which cannot be completed the same day.
15 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be used. After each day‟s work, brushes shall
be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes
which are dirty and cracked with distemper shall not be used on the work.
12.6.6 Protective measures
Surface of doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture, etc. and such other parts of the
building not to be white washed or colour washed/distempered shall be protected from being
splashed upon such surfaces. It shall be cleaned of whitewash or colour wash/distemper
splashed, if any by the Contractor at his own cost.
12.6.7 Measurements
The measurements shall be done as below.
12.6.7.1 Priming and alkali resistant treatments, scraping of surfaces, washing the surfaces spoiled
by smoke soot, removal of oil and grease spots, treatment for infection with efflorescence,
moulds, moss, fungi, algae and lichen, and patch repairs to plaster above 0.10 sqm
wherever done, shall be measured separately.
12.6.7.2 Work on walls, ceilings, and/or sloping roofs shall each be measured separately.
12.6.7.3 Work on decorated surfaces shall be measured separately.
12.6.7.4 All work shall be measured net in the decimal system as in places, subject to the following
limits unless otherwise stated hereinafter.
(a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m.
(b) Areas in individual items shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sqm.
12.6.7.5 All work unless and otherwise stated shall be measured in square meters.
12.6.7.6 Deductions
For jambs, soffits, sills, etc.: For openings n5ot exceeding 0.5 sqm each in area; for ends of
joints, beams, posts, girders, etc. not exceeding 0.5 sqm in area and for opening exceeding
0.5 sqm and not exceeding 3 sqm each in area. Deductions and additions shall be made in
the following manner:
No deductions shall be made for ends of joists, beams, posts, etc., and openings not
exceeding 0.5 sqm each and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills etc.
of these openings nor for finish around ends of joists, beams, posts etc.
Deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 sqm but not exceeding 3 sqm each, shall be made
as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these openings.
(a) When both the faces of the wall are provided with the same finish, deduction shall be
made for one face only.

142 of 194
 (b) When each face of wall is provided with a different finish, deduction be made for that
side of frame for door, window etc. on which width of reveal is less than that of the
other side but no deduction shall be made on the other sides; where widths of reveals
on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of opening on each face shall be
made from area of finish.
(c) When only one face of the wall is treated and the other face is not treated, full
deduction shall be made if the width of the reveal on the treated side is less than that
on the untreated side, but if the width of the reveal is equal or more than that on the
untreated side, neither deductions nor addition be made for reveals jambs, soffits, sill,
etc.
12.6.7.7 In case of openings of areas exceeding 3 sqm each deduction shall be made for openings,
but jambs, soffits and sills shall be measured.
12.6.7.8 No deductions shall be made for attachment such as casings, conduits, pipes, electric wiring
and the like.
12.6.7.9 Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and not girthed. The quantities so
measured shall be increased by the following percentages and the resultant shall be
included with the general areas.
(a) Corrugated steel sheets 14%
(b) Corrugated asbestos cement sheets 20%
(c) Semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets 10%
(d) Nainital pattern roofs (Plain sheeting with rolls) 10%
(e) Nainital pattern roofs with corrugated sheets 25%
12.6.7.10 Cornices and other wall features, when they are not picked out in a different
finish/colour, shall be girthed and included in the general area.
All items shall include removing nails, making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not
exceeding 0.1 sqm each with material similar in composition to the surface to be
prepared.
12.6.8 Rate
The labour rate includes the cost of all materials and labour required for completing the work
as per specifications.
1) The labor rates and through rates include carriage up to 100 meters on head load and
one kilometer by mechanical transport.
2) The labour rates include the sundry items like sand, papers scrappers, soap and soda
etc. as also the water charge.
3) The labour rates also include the labour required for thoroughly mixing the mortar and
all sorts of scaffolding and ladders etc.
4) The specialty paints shall be the paints which are declared as such by Chief Engineer,
Uttarakhand Public Works Department.
All items shall be paid as per Uttarakhand PWD Schedule of Rates (2014-2015) of
Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work locations of Guptkashi, Sonprayag,
Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan], under Block 17-Agastyamuni (for
Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for Work location of Jakholi) as latest
applicable. The rate also includes contractor‟s profit @ 10% and overhead charges @ 5%.

13 FITTINGS FOR DOORS

13.1 General
Fitting shall be of iron, brass, aluminium or as specified. These shall be well made,
reasonably smooth, and free from sharp and corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes
shall be counter sunk to suit the head of specified wood screws. These shall be of the
following type according to the material used.

143 of 194
 (a) Iron Fittings: These shall be black enamelled or copper oxidised (black finish) or as
specified.
(b) Brass Fittings: These shall be finished bright chromium plated or oxidised or as
specified.
(c) Aluminium Fittings: These shall be anodised.
The fittings generally used for different type of doors and windows are indicated in the table.
The fittings to be actually provided in a particulars work shall however determined.by be the
Engineer.
Screws used for fittings shall be of the same metal, and finished as the fittings. However,
Chromium plated brass screws shall be used for fixing aluminium fittings. These shall be of
the size as indicated in respective Figures.
Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws shall be
driven home with screw driver and not hammered in, Recesses shall be cut to the exact size
and depth for the countersinking or hinges.
13.1.1 Butt Hinges
These shall be of the following types according to the material used, and as specified:
(a) Mild Steel butt hinges (Medium)
(b) Cast brass butt hinges light/ordinary or heavy.
(c) Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges.

13.1.1.1 Mild steel butt hinges (medium) [refer Fig. 9.5A, CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009]
13.1.1.1.1 These shall be medium type manufactured from M.S. sheet. These shall be well
made and shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. All hinges shall be cut
clean, and square and all sharp edges and corners shall be removed. These shall
conform to IS: 1341-1992.
Hinge pin shall be made of mild steel wire. It shall fit inside the knuckles firmly and
riveted head shall be well formed so as not to allow any play or shake, and shall allow
easy movement of the hinge, but shall not cause looseness.
Knuckles:
The number of knuckles in the hinges of different sizes shall be as indicated in Fig.
9.5A (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009). The size of knuckles shall be straight and
at right angle to the flap. The movement of the hinges shall be free and easy and
working shall not have any play or shake.
Screw holes:
The screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk. These shall be suitable for counter
sunk head wood screws and of the specified size for different types and sizes of
hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is counter sunk it shall be able
to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of the wood screws.
13.1.1.1.2 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
The number of butt hinges to be selected from a lot shall depend on the size of lot
and shall be in accordance with table below.
Butt hinges for testing shall be taken at random from at least 10 percent of the
package subject to a minimum of three equal number of hinges being selected from
each package. All butt hinges selected from the lot shall be checked for dimensional
and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be checked.
A lot shall be considered conforming to the requirements of this specification, if the
number of defective hinges along those tested does not exceed the corresponding
number given in table below.
Lot size Sample size Permissible No. of
defective hinges
Up to 200 15 0

144 of 194
 Lot size Sample size Permissible No. of
defective hinges
201 to 300 20 1
301 to 500 30 2
501 to 800 40 2
801 and above 55 3
Note: Any hinge which fails to satisfy the requirements of any one or more of the
characteristics shall be considered as defective hinge.
13.1.2 Door Bolts
13.1.2.1 Sliding Door Bolts (Aldrops) [refer Fig. 9.7, CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009]
13.1.2.1.1 These shall be of mind steel, cast brass, aluminum or as specified, and shall be
capable of smooth sliding action.
13.1.2.1.2 M.S. Sliding Door Bolts
These shall be made of M.S. sheets and M.S. rods and shall conform to IS: 281-
2009. M.S. Sliding door bolts shall be copper oxidised (black finish) or as specified.
13.1.2.1.3 Cast Brass Sliding Door Bolts
These shall be made from rolled brass, and shall conform to IS: 2681-1993. The hasp
shall be of cast brass and secured to the bolt as shown in Fig. 9.7 (CPWD
Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009). Alternatively, the hasps and the bolt may be cast in one
piece. The fixing and staple bolts shall be cast with 6 mm studs bolts shall be finished
to shape and have thread ends and provided with round wormers and nuts of square
or hexagon type. All components shall be finished smooth and polished before
assembly. Cast brass sliding bolts shall be finished bright or chromium plated or
oxidised or as specified.
13.1.2.1.4 Aluminium Sliding Door Bolts
These shall be made of aluminum alloy, and shall conform to IS: 2681-1993.
Aluminum sliding door bolts shall be anodised. All screw holes shall be counter sunk
to suit the counter sunk head of wood screws of specified sizes. All edges and
corners shall be finished smooth. In case of single leaf door, when iron socket plate
or a brass or aluminum fixing bolts ( or slinging door bolts ) cannot be fixed, hole of
suitable size shall be drilled in the door frame and an iron or brass plate cut to shape
shall be fixed at the face of the hole. The leading dimensions of the sliding door bolts
are illustrated in Fig. 9.7 (CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009).
13.1.2.1.5 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
It shall be same as specified in section 13.1.1.1.2 above.
13.1.2.2 Tower Bolts (refer Fig. 9.8, CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009)
13.1.2.2.1 Tower bolts shall be well made and shall be free from defects. The bolts shall be
finished to the correct shape and shall have a smooth action. All tower bolts made
with sheets 1.2 mm thickness and above shall have counter sunk screw holes to suit
counter sunk head wood screws. All sharp edges and corners shall be removed and
finished smooth.
The height of top of tower bolt when the door window etc. is in closed position from
the floor level shall be 1.90 meters.
13.1.2.2.2 Tower bolts shall be of the following types:
(a) Aluminium barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of
aluminium alloy. The knob shall be properly screwed to the bolt and riveted at the
back.
(b) Brass tower bolts with cast brass barrel and rolled or cast brass bolt

or

145 of 194
 Brass tower bolts with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn
brass bolt.
The knobs of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed with knob, steel
spring and ball shall be provided between the bolt and the barrel.
(c) Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt.

or
Mild steel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolts. The plates and
straps after assembly shall be firmly riveted or spot welded. The rivet head shall
be properly formed and the rivet back shall be flush with the plate. These shall be
made of one piece.
13.1.2.2.3 Unless otherwise specified bolt shall have finish as given under:
(a) Mild steel tower bolts (types 1 and 2). Bolts bright finished or plated as specified
and barrel socket stove enameled black.
(b) Brass tower bolts (types 3 to 5) bolts and barrel polished or plated as specified.
(c) Aluminium alloy tower bolts (type 6) bolts and barrel anodised. The anodic film
may be either transparent or dyed as specified. The quality of anodised finished
shall not be less than grade AC 10 of IS: 1868-1996.
13.1.2.2.4 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
It shall be same as specified in section 13.1.1.1.2 above.
13.1.3 Door Handles (refer Fig. 9.12, CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009)
13.1.3.1 The door handles be well made free from defects. These shall be finished correct to shape
and dimensions. All edges and corners shall be removed and finished smooth so as to
facilitate easy handling. Cast handles shall be free from casting defects. Where the grip
portion of the handle is joined with the piece by mechanical means, the arrangements shall
be such that the assembled handle shall have adequate strength comparable to that of
integrally cast type handles.
13.1.3.2 Door handles shall be of the following types according to the material used.
(a) Cast Aluminium Handles
These shall be of aluminium of specified size, and of shape and pattern as approved by
the Engineer. The size of the handle shall be determined by the inside grip of the
handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size, and window handles of 75 mm unless
otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25 mm long wood screws of designation
No. 6. Aluminium handles, shall be anodized and the anodic consisting shall not be less
than grade AC 15 of IS: 1868-1996 or as specified.
(b) Cast Brass Handles
These shall be cast brass of specified size and the shape and pattern as approved by
the Engineer. These shall conform to IS: 208-1996. The size of the handle shall be
determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and
window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25
mm long wood screws of designation No. 6. Brass handles shall be finished bright or
chromium plated or oxidised or as specified.
(c) Mild Steel Handles
These shall be of mild steel sheet, pressed into oval section. These shall conform to
Indian Standard specifications for door handles IS: 208-1996. The size of the handles
will be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm
size and window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be
fixed with 25 mm long wood screws of designation No. 6. Iron handles shall be copper
oxidised (black finish) or as specified.
13.1.3.3 Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
It shall be same as specified in section 13.1.1.1.2 above.
13.1.4 Floor Door Stopper (refer Fig. 9.13, CPWD Specifications, Vol. 1, 2009)

146 of 194
 This shall be made of cast brass of overall size as specified and shall have a rubber
cushion. The shape and pattern of stopper shall be approved by the Engineer. It shall be of
brass finished bright, chromium plated or oxidised or as specified. The size of floor stopper
shall be determined by the length of its place. It shall be well made and shall have four
counter sunk holes for fixing the door stoppers to the floor by means of wood screws. The
body or housing of the door stopper shall be cast in one piece and it shall be fixed to the
cover plate by means of brass or mild steel screws and cover plates shall be of casting or of
sheet metal. The spring shall be fixed firmly to the pin. Tongue which would be pressed
while closing or opening of the door shall be connected to the lower part by means of copper
pin. On the extreme end a rubber piece shall be attached to absorb shocks. All parts of the
door stopper shall be of good workmanship and finish, burrs and sharp edges removed. It
shall be free from surface and casting defects. Aluminium stopper shall be anodized and
anodic film shall not be less than grade AC 10 of IS: 1868-1996. The rubber for the floor
door stopper shall meet the following requirements.
Requirements for Rubber
Particulars Requirements Testing Procedure
Relative density (Max.) 1.3 IS: 3400 (Part 9)-2004
Hardness 60 + 5 IS: 3400 (Part 2)-2004
Change in initial hardness ageing +5 IS: 3400 (Part 2)-2004
o o
for 24 hours at 100 + 1 C

These shall be of cast brass, finished bright, chromium plated or as specified. Aluminium
stopper shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall not be less than grade AC 10 of IS:
1868-1996. The size and pattern of the door stopper shall be approved by the Engineer. The
size shall be determined by its length.
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity:
It shall be same as specified in section 13.1.1.1.2 above.
13.2 Fittings
All fittings are subject to the approval of the Executive Engineer and where so directed by
him, the Contractor shall deposit in his office one sample of each fitting to be used in the
work. Brass and other special fittings shall ordinarily be arranged departmentally and issued
to the Contractor for fixing, or as specified. The fittings shall be provided as per Schedules
given below. The fitting shall conform to the specifications laid down in section 13.1 above.
13.3 Screws
Screws shall be used of such diameter as to fill completely the holes and cups in the fitting
which they secure, and are to be oiled before being inserted. Unless the head can be
counter-sunk flush with the fitting, round-headed screws shall be used. Brass fitting shall be
secured with brass screws.
1) Door of room adjoining the verandah corridor, lobby or hall shall be considered as
external door.
2) Where the height of door leaf exceeds 2.15 meters above floor level one extra hinge
shall be provided for every additional height or 0.5 meter or part thereof and the length
of top door bolts shall be increased by the height of the leaf above 2.15 meters from
floor level.
3) Single leaf door shutters of more than 80 cm width shall be provided with one extra
hinge.
4) Where the height of window shutters exceeds 1.20 meters one extra hinge shall be
provided, and the length of top door bolts shall be increased by the height of the leaf
above 2.15 meters from the floor level.
5) Fan-light shutters of more than 0.80 m width shall be provided with one extra hinge.
6) In double leaf shutters of doors and window, two door bolts shall be fixed to the first
shutter and one to the closing shutter at the top in case of windows, windows with

147 of 194
 double shutters, two bolts shall be fixed to closing shutter and one to the first shutter at
top.
7) For centrally hung and bottom hung C.S. windows and fan lights a bamboo pole with
hook for opening ventilators shall be provided for each residence or set of 4 rooms in
case of office building.
8) In case of single leaf inter-communicating door shutter from bath and W.C. to a
bedroom, one 250 mm one 150 mm tower bolts shall be replaced with one door latch
250 mm size.
9) For shutter exceeding 40 mm thickness heavy type M.S. Butt hinges of 125 x 90 x 4mm
shall be used.
10) Window shutters with steel frames shall be provided with six hinges in case of double
leaf shutters and three hinges in case of single leaf shutters, irrespective of height and
width of shutters.
13.4 Frame Fixing in Position and Hold-fasts
The frames shall be fixed only after acceptance by the Engineer. The method of fixing as
indicated in the drawing or otherwise directed by the Engineer shall be followed. In case of
door frames without sills, the vertical members shall be buried in floor for the full thickness of
the floor.
Where doors are not provided with sills, the door frame shall be temporarily braced at the sill
level so as to prevent warping or distortion of frame during construction. Frames shall also
be suitably protected from damage during construction.
Chowkhats shall be secured to the brick work or masonry by hold-fasts which shall be build
into the wall with 1:4 cement sand mortar. Each hold-fast shall be fixed to the chowkhats
with three 5 cms iron screws. Where the Chowkhat is fixed at the extreme edges of the
jambs, the hold-fasts shall be forked or bent as directed by the Engineer. The number of
hold-fasts to each Chowkhat shall be as indicated in the Figure/Drawing.
Hold-fasts used for fixing doors and windows frame shall be made of 40 x 3mm flat iron and
40 cm long. It shall have a hole on one end for fixing to frame with 10 mm dia bolt, at the
other end. The flat iron shall be split and bent at right angles in the opposite direction. The
hold-fast shall be tightly fixed to the frame by means of bolts, the bolt hole in frame being
plugged suitably and finished neat. The hold fast shall be embedded into masonry by
concrete block as described in the item of work.
13.5 Measurements
13.5.1 Hold-fasts
Hold fasts shall be counted in numbers and paid accordingly.
13.5.2 Fittings
Fittings shall be counted in numbers as specified in drawing.
13.5.3 General
The rate includes all the material and labour required for completing the work as per
specification mentioned above and as specified for each item in the latest applicable. The
through rates as applicable in PWD SOR of Uttarakhand for respective Block of each Work
location include carriage up to 1 km by mechanical transport and head load upto 100
meters. The contractor‟s profit @ 10% and overhead charges @ 5% are including the rates.
The labour rate includes the cost of tools and scaffolding whenever required.
13.5.4 Fittings
The rates shall be as specified in 13.6.1 above.

14 PAINTING WORK
14.1 Materials
All materials used shall conform to the specifications given below:
14.1.1 Painting Brushes
The brushes used for painting work shall conform to the following Indian standards:

148 of 194
 I.S. No. Subject
384-2002 Brushes, Paints and Varnishes, Flat – Specification
486-1983 Specification for Brushes, Sash Tool, for Paints and Varnishes
487-1997 Brushes, Paint and Varnish - (i) Oval, Ferrule Bound; and (ii) Round,
Ferrule Bound
The fiat brushes for paints and varnishes shall be of the following sizes: 12 mm, 25 mm, 38
mm, 50 mm, 63 mm, 75mm and 100 mm.
Refer section 14.2.2.9 below for supporting work specifications for brushes.
14.1.2 Oils, Paints and Primers etc.
Oils, paints, primers etc. shall be used of approved brand and manufacture, as directed by
the Engineer. The relevant specifications are given below. For details of other painting
materials and specifications, provisions in section 13.23 of Chapter 13, CPWD
Specifications (Vol. 2), 2009 as followed by UTTARAKHAND PWD.
14.1.2.1 Oils
14.1.2.1.1 Linseed Oil (Raw)
Linseed oil shall be as per IS: 75-1973. Raw linseed oil shall be lightly viscous but
clear and of yellowish colour with light brown tinge. Its gravity at a temperature of 30°
C shall be between 0.923 and 0.928. The oil shall be mellow and sweet to the taste
with very little smell. The oil shall be of sufficiently matured quality. Oil, turbid or thick,
with acid and bitter taste and rancid colour and which remains sticky for a
considerable time shall be rejected. The oil shall conform in all respects to IS: 75-
1973. The oil shall be of approved brand and manufacture.
14.1.2.1.2 Linseed Oil (Double boiled)
Linseed oil (double boiled) shall be as per IS: 77-1976. This covers two types namely
type I boiled and type II Pale boiled. The material is used in paint industry and in
other allied applications, and also as foundry core oil.
14.1.2.1.3 Turpentine Oil
Turpentine oil shall conform to IS: 533-2007. It is generally used as a solvent for
paints and pigments.
14.1.2.2 Paints
14.1.2.2.1 General
Paint is a mixture of solids and liquids and is used to cover surfaces for decorative
and preservative purposes. The solids are the pigments or base, and the liquids the
medium or vehicle to enable the solid particles to be applied to the surface. The
functions of the solids are to provide body or substance, to give colour and obscuring
power to the film of paint, and to protect it from too rapid decomposition. The
functions of the liquids are to hold the solid particles In suspension and to allow the
materials to be spread evenly over a surface. They also help to bind the particles
together and to give cohesion and gloss to the painted surface Coloured pigments
provide the requisite tints to the paint, and are often known as strainers. They may be
natural earth pigments, such as iron oxides or chemically manufactured colours, such
as chrome yellow and Prussian blue. These pigments are sometimes used in
combination with a white pigment called the base, which gives the main bulk and
weathering properties to the paint.
14.1.2.2.2 Enamel Paint (White)
Enamel paint (conforming to IS: 2933-1975) of approved brand and manufacture and
of the required colour shall be used. For the end coat the paint of same quality but of
shade to suit the top coat shall be used.
14.1.2.2.3 Synthetic Enamel in all Shades except White
Synthetic Enamel paint (conforming to IS: 2932-2003) of approved brand and
manufacture and of the required colour shall be used for the top coat and an

149 of 194
 undercoat of shade to match the top coat as recommended by the manufacturer shall
be used.
14.1.2.2.4 Red Lead Paint
This shall be conforming to IS: 57-1989.
14.1.2.3 Pigment
Pigments shall be of non-organic origin and of approved manufacture and suitable for
mixing with cement. Aniline base colour or other organic dyes shall not be used as they are
likely to fade. The use or pigments shall be resorted to only when ready-made Portland
cement inspired colour is not available. The Contractor shall use coloured Portland cement
in lieu of mixing cement with pigments without extra cost. General guide to the selection of
mineral pigments to obtain various colour effects is given below:

Commercial names of colours for use

S. No. Colour desired
with cement
1 Grey, black Black iron oxide, manganese black
2 Brownish red to dull brick red Red oxide of iron
3 Bright red to vermillion Mineral turkey red
4 Red sandstone to purplish red Indian red
5 Brown to reddish brown Metallic brown (oxide)
6 Buff colonial tin and yellow Yellow ochre yellow oxide of iron
7 Green Chromium oxide
8 Blue Ultramarine blue
9 Cream Yellow oxide of iron
14.1.2.4 Primers
14.1.2.4.1 Cement Primer
Cement primer coat is used as a base coat on wall finish of cement, lime or lime
cement plaster or on asbestos cement surfaces before oil emulsion distemper paints
are applied at them. Cement primer is composed of a medium and pigment which are
resistant to the alkalis present in the cement, lime or lime cement in wall finish and
provides a barrier for the protection of subsequent coats of oil emulsion distemper
paints. It shall be applied by brushing and not by spraying. The primer shall be
avoided particularly on absorbent surfaces.
14.1.2.4.2 Metal Primer
Metal primer is used in painting system mainly followed for metal surfaces for the
protection of steel works both under marine and inland out-doors conditions.
14.1.2.4.3 Primer for Expansion Joints
Primer for expansion joints shall be of best quality and subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
14.1.2.4.4 Zinc Oxide Chrome / Red Oxide / Red Lead Primer
It shall conform to relevant I.S. Specifications. It is used on aluminum and steel and
galvanised steel work.
14.1.2.4.5 Miscellaneous
14.1.2.4.5.1 Putty for Steel Work
This shall be of approved brand and manufacture and shall conform to relevant I.S.
Specifications.
14.1.2.4.5.2 Plaster of Paris
This is a white power material used for finishing works not liable to heavy load. This
shall conform to IS: 2333-1992. The material is often used for decoration purposes.
14.1.2.4.5.3 Mordant Solution
This shall be composed of:

150 of 194
 Soft water 64 parts
Copper chloride 1 part
Copper nitrate 1 part by weight
Ammonium Chloride 1 part
Hydrochloric acid 1 part
14.1.2.4.5.4 Coal Tar Paint
Coal tar paint of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. It shall conform to
IS: 290-1961. The specifications cover two types, namely, Type-A quick drying and
Type-B slow drying. The material is generally used as a protective paint for iron, steel
and timber.
14.1.2.4.5.5 Kerosene Oil
This shall conform to IS: 1459-1974. Kerosene oil is used as solvent for paints and
pigments.

14.1.2.4.5.6 Spirit
This shall conform to IS: 324:1959 specifications for ordinary denatured spirit. It is
generally used as a solvent and vehicle in paint industry, and as fuel also.
14.1.2.4.5.7 Shellac
This shall conform to IS: 16-2008.
14.1.2.4.5.8 Creosote Oil
It shall confirm to IS: 218-1983. This is used as general purpose wood preservatives
and mainly in the treatment of railway sleepers, telegraph and telephone poles.
14.1.2.4.5.9 Bees Wax
This is used as a polish.
14.1.2.4.5.10 Patent knotting
This is a liquid product used on wood work over knots. This shall be of approved
brand and manufacture.
14.2 General Workmanship
14.2.1 General
14.2.1.1 Painting shall not be started until the Engineer has inspected the items of work to be
painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence the
painting work.
14.2.1.2 The materials for the execution of painting work shall be obtained direct from approved
manufacturers and brought to the site in maker‟s drums, kegs, etc. with seals unbroken. All
paints shall not be inferior to relevant Indian Standards as mentioned in specifications.
14.2.1.3 All materials not in actual use shall be kept properly protected. Lids of containers shall be
kept closed and surface of paint in open or partially open containers is covered with a thin
layer of turpentine to prevent formation of skin. Materials which have become stale or fat
due to improper and long storage shall not be used. The paint shall be stirred thoroughly in
its container before pouring into small containers. While applying also the paint shall be
continuously stirred in the smaller container. No left over paint shall be put back into stock
tins. When not in use, the containers shall be kept properly closed.
14.2.1.4 If for any reason, thinning is necessary, in case of ready mixed paint, the brand of thinner
recommended by manufacturer shall be used.
14.2.1.5 Painting except the priming coat shall generally be taken in hand after all other builder‟s
work is practically finished. The rooms shall be thoroughly swept out and the entire building
cleaned up at least one day in advance of the paint work being started.
14.2.1.6 The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt, scales,
smoke and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. No painting on
exterior or other exposed parts of the work shall be carried out in wet, humid or otherwise
unfavourable weather and all the surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before painting work is
started.

151 of 194
14.2.1.7 Brushes used for painting shall comply with the Indian Standard Specifications.
The brushes used shall be of the approved type and of a size suitable for the work in hand.
For general wood work, including doors, sashes etc., a (7.5 to 10 cm) brush for larger areas
and a (5 cm) for the rails would be considered suitable. Alternatively, ground brush and No.
1 sash tool respectively are sometimes preferred. For flat wall paint, flat brushes from (10 to
15 cm) width are also used.
14.2.1.8 Brushes shall be rubbed out at the close of the work and kept immersed in a mixture of
linseed oil and white spirit, when not in use. Before being used again, the oil and spirit shall
be rubbed out. If not required, for some time or when required to be used with another
colour, the brushes shall be cleaned out with turpentine and then washed with soapy water.
A brush in which paint has dried, is ruined and shall on no account be used. Now brushes
may contain dressing of extraneous matter and shall be well washed with soapy water
before use.
14.2.1.9 Only skilled painters shall be employed for paint work, and the labourers required to help
shall not exceed the number of the skilled workmen.
14.2.1.10 Each coat of paint shall differ slightly in tint from the preceding one, so as to make
each coat readily distinguishable. The last coat being of the tint required for the
finished work. Every coat shall be perfectly dried and shall be got approved from the
Assistant Engineer before applying.
14.2.1.11 The main requirement of priming coat is that it should adhere firmly to the unpainted
surface and also provide a suitable ground to receive and hold the next coat. It is
most important that the priming paint should be of the correct type for the surface to
be painted and that it should be supplied in a proper manner. Special care shall be
paid to places where decay or corrosion is likely to occur, such as joints in wood or
metal and end grain in wood. Hurried priming should be avoided particularly on
absorbent surfaces. Any primed work that has been allowed to deteriorate through
exposure for a long period; it shall be removed with pumice stone or other suitable
abrasive. The priming coat shall be applied again.
14.2.1.12 Stepping and filling shall be done after priming. The material required for this purpose
shall conform to Indian Standards specifications. Stepping is used to fill holes and
cracks, while the function of the filler is to level up slight irregularities of surface. Filler
shall be applied with a break knife and shall be subsequently rubbed down to a level
surface with abrasive paper, pumice stone or other suitable abrasive.
14.2.1.13 The functions of the paint used for undercoating are to obscure the primed surface, to
provide a fresh surface of uniform texture and of a colour approaching that of a
finishing coat, and to build up a layer of paint sufficient in type and thickness to
protect the material painted according to the conditions of exposure.
The number of undercoats required in each case will depend upon the type of finish
desired and on the conditions of exposure. For most works, a minimum of one
undercoat is needed while for works requiring a high class gloss finish of required to
underage a severe exposure, a large number of undercoats may be needed.
14.2.1.14 The finishing coat in a paint system is intended to provide the particular colour and
degree of texture required. In external work, the finishing coat also serves to protect
the main body of the paint beneath and it should therefore, be renewed when
necessary before undercoat becomes seriously damaged by the weather.
14.2.1.15 Care shall be taken while painting to avoid damage to furniture, floors etc., and to
maintain general tidiness. The Contractor shall remove with turpentine or any other
approved method all stains, smears, splashing and dropping of every kind from floors
glazing, furniture and from similar situations.
14.2.1.16 Since some of the paints are poisonous, painters should never fail to wash their
hands after painting. Precautions may also be taken that workmen do not smear
themselves with paints unavoidably. Where it is necessary to rub down with sand
paper, only water proof paper shall be used and the work kept wet. Too much
pressure not be used in rubbing. Slush formed in rubbing shall be frequently washed
off with plenty of water.
14.2.2 Application of paints

152 of 194
14.2.2.1 Brushing of paints
The brushing operations are to be adjusted to the spreading capacity advised by the
manufacturer of the particular paint. The painting shall be applied evenly and smoothly by
means of crossing and laying off, the later in the direction of the grain of wood. The crossing
and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the
first time over and then brushing alternately in opposite directions two or three times and
then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to the same. In this process, no
brush marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing and
laying off will constitute one coat.
During painting, every time after the paint has been worked out of the brush bristles or after
the brush has been unleaded, the bristles of the brush which are down together due to the
high surface tension of the small quantities of paint left in between the bristles, shall be
opened up by striking the brush against a portion of the painted surface with the end of the
bristles held at right angles to the surface. So that bristles thereafter will collect the correct
amount of paint when dipped again into the pain container.
14.2.2.2 By spraying
Where so stipulated, the painting shall be done with spray. Spray machine used may be (a)
high pressure (small air aperture) type, or (b) a low pressure (large air gap) type, depending
on the nature and location of work to be carried out. Skilled and experienced workmen shall
be employed for this class of work. Paints used shall be brought to the requisite consistency
by adding a suitable thinner.
Spraying should be done only when dry condition prevails. During spraying the spray gun
shall be held perpendicular to the surface to be coated and shall be passed over the surface
in a uniform sweeping motion. Different air pressures and fan adjustment shall be tried so as
to obtain the best application with the minimum wastage of paint. The air pressure shall not
be kept too high as otherwise the paint will clog up and will be wasted.
Spots that are inaccessible to the spray pattern shall be touched up by brush after spraying.
At the end of the job, the spray guns shall be cleaned thoroughly so as to be free from dirt.
Incorrect adjustments shall be set right, as otherwise they will result in variable spray
patterns, runs, sags and uneven coats.
14.2.2.3 Each coat shall be allowed to dry completely and lightly rubbed with very fine grade of sand
paper and loose particles brushed off before next is applied. Each coat shall very slightly in
shape and shall be got approved from the Engineer before next coat is started.
14.2.2.3.1 Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine
pumice stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is applied.
14.2.2.4 No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint puddles in the corner of panels of
mouldings etc. shall be left on the work.
14.2.2.5 In painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes shall be taken to see that no
paint stains etc., are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in similar hidden
locations shall not be left out in painting.
14.2.2.6 In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets,
overlaps etc.
14.2.2.7 The additional specifications for primer and other coats of paints shall be as according to the
detailed specifications under the respective headings.
14.2.2.8 Brushes and containers
After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned off of paint and linseed oil by rinsing
with turpentine. After cleaning, the brushes are wrapped in heavy paper or water proof
paper for storage. If it is to be used the next day, it shall be hung in a thinner or linseed oil in
a container. On no account, shall brushes be made to stand on the bristles. A brush in which
paint has dried up is ruined and shall on no account be used for painting work. The
containers when not in use, shall be kept closed and free from air so that paint does not
thicken and also shall be kept guarded from dust. When the paint has been used, the
containers shall be washed with turpentine and wiped dry with soft clean cloth, before they
can be used again.

153 of 194
 In addition, the containers of paints have expiry date marked by the manufacturers, which
should be highlighted so as to facilitate use of paint within due period.
14.3 Concrete/Masonry/Plastered Surfaces
14.3.1 General
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards:
IS No. Subject
2395 (Part 1)-1994 Painting of Concrete, Masonry and Plaster Surfaces - Code of
Practice: Part 1 - Operations and Workmanship
2395 (Part 2)-1994 Painting of Concrete, Masonry and Plaster Surfaces - Code of
Practice: Part 2 – Schedules
14.3.2 Preparation of surface
The surface to be painted shall be allowed to dry for at least three months. Any existing
fungus or mold growth shall be completely removed. All major cracks or defects in the
plaster shall be cut out and made good. Before primer is applied holes and undulations shall
be filled up with Plaster of Paris and rubbed smooth.
New Surfaces: Before painting, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed to remove all dirt
and remains of loose and powered material.
In case of new brick-work the surface shall be cleaned of dirt by washing with water.
Any glazed area shall be roughened. Wire brushes shall be avoided in cleaning operations
as these shall lead to difficulties from deposited particles of iron causing iron stains.
If before painting any portion of the wall shows sign of dampness, the causes shall be
investigated and the damp surface shall be properly treated.
14.3.3 Application of primers and paints
After preparation of the surface, the priming coat shall be applied immediately. The
specification of paints shall conform to para 14.1.2 and 14.2.2 above.
The primers and paints used shall be of the following type.
1) Ready mixed, priming paint/red lead/red oxide/zinc oxide chrome.
2) Enamel paint.
3) Ready-mixed paint.
4) Aluminium paint.
5) Bituminous paint (Black Anti-Corrosive).
6) Ready mixed bituminous paint anti-corrosive.
7) Ready mixed acid resisting paint.
8) Coal tar black paint.
9) Black Japan paint.
10) Superior Ready-mixed for G.I. sheets.
14.4 Measurements
14.4.1 All work shall be measured net in the decimal system as executed subject to the following
limits, unless otherwise stated here-in-after:
(a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 meter.
(b) Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 sq.mt.
14.4.1.1.1 No deduction shall be made for openings not exceeding 0.5 sqm each, and no
addition shall be made for painting to beading mouldings, edges, jambs, soffits, sills
etc. of such openings.
14.4.1.1.2 In case of fabricated structural steel and iron work, priming coat of paint shall be
included with fabrication. Subsequent coat of paint shall be measured separately on
the basis of the weight of steel work and iron work or in square meters be. In case of
the trusses if measured in sqm compound girders, stanchions, lattice girders and
similar work actual areas shall be measured in sqm and no extra shall be paid for
painting on bolts, heads, nuts, washers etc. If rivet heads, bolt heads (with or without
washers), nuts (with or without washers and including projecting portion of shank)

154 of 194
 and painted out in a tint different from that of adjacent work these shall be
enumerated and measured separately.
Note: No addition shall be made to the weight calculated for the purpose of
measurement of steel and iron work for the paint applied either in shop or at site.
14.4.1.1.3 Painting up to 10 cms in width or in girth and not in conjunction with similar painted
work shall be measured in running meters and shall include cutting to line where so
required.
14.4.2 Shall articles up to 0.1 sqm of painted surfaces, where not in conjunction with similar painted
work shall be enumerated.
14.4.3 Different surface shall be grouped into one general item areas of uneven surfaces being
converted into equivalent plain areas in accordance with the table below:
Equivalent plain areas of uneven surfaces
S. Description of work How measured Multiplying Factor
No.
(i) Panelled or framed and Measured flat (not girthed) 1.33 (for each side).
braced or ledged and battened including CHOWKHAT or frame.
or ledged, battened and Edges, chocks, cleats etc., shall be
braced Joinery. included in the item.
(ii) Flush Joinery. Measured flat (not girthed) 1.20 (for each).
including CHOWKHAT or frame.
Edges, chocks, cleats etc. shall be
deemed to be included in the item.
(iii) Fully glazed or gauged joinery. Measured flat (not girthed) 0.80 (for each side).
including CHOWKHAT or frame.
Edges, chocks, cleats etc., shall be
deemed to be included in the item.
(iv) Partly paneled and partly Measured flat (not girthed) 1 (for each side).
glazed or gauged joinery. including CHOWKHAT or frame.
Edges, chocks, cleats etc., shall be
deemed to be included in the item.
(v) Fully venetianed or louvered Measured flat (not girthed) 1.80 (for each side).
joinery. including CHOWKHAT or frame.
Edges, chocks, cleats etc., shall be
deemed be included in the item.
(vi) Weather boarding. Measured flat (not gathered) 1.20 (for each side).
supporting frame work shall not be
measured separately.
(vii) Wood shingle roofing. Measured flat (not-girthed). 1.10 (for each side).
(viii) Boarding with cover fillets and Measured flat (not-girthed). 1.05 (for each side).
match boarding.
(ix) Tile and slate battening. Measured flat overall; no deduction 0.80 (for painting all
shall be made for open spaces. over).
(x) Trellis (or JAFFRI) work one Measured flat over all; no deduction 1 (for painting over).
way or two way. shall be made for open spaces,
supporting members shall not be
measured separately.
(xi) Guard bars, balustrades, Measured flat overall, no deduction 1 (for painting all
gates, gratings, grills, shall be made for open spaces, over).
expanded metal and railings. supporting members shall not be
measured separately.
(xii) Gates and open palisade Measured flat overall; no deduction 1 (for painting all
fencing including standards, shall be made for open spaces, over).
braces, rails, stays, etc. supporting members shall not be

155 of 194
 S. Description of work How measured Multiplying Factor
No.
measured separately (see note).
(xiii) Carved or enriched work. Measured flat. 2 (for each side).
(xiv) Steel roller shutters. Measured flat for opening overall; 1.10 (for each side).
jamb guides, bottom rails and
locking arrangement etc. shall be
included in the item. (Top cover
shall be measured separately).
(xv) Plain sheet steel doors and Measured flat (not girthed) 1.10 (for each).
windows. including frame.
(xvi) Fully glazed or gauged steel Measured flat (not girthed) 0.50 (for each).
doors and windows. including frame edges etc.
(xvii) Partly paneled and partly -do- 0.80 (for each).
glazed or gauged steel doors.
(xviii) Collapsible gate. Measured flat (size of opening). No 1.50 (for painting all
separately measurements shall be over).
taken for the top and bottom guide
rails, rollers, fittings etc.
Note: For painting open palisade fencing and gates etc., the height shall be measured from
the bottom of the lowest rail, if the palisades do not go below it (or from the lower end of the
palisades, if they project below the lowest rail), upto the top of rails or palisades whichever
are higher, but not up to the top of standards when the latter are higher than the top rails or
the palisades.
14.4.4 Where doors, window etc. are of composite types other than those included in above table,
the different portion shall be measured separately with their appropriate coefficients, the
center line of the common rail being taken as the dividing line between the two portions.
Measurement of painting of doors, windows, collapsible gates, rolling shutters etc. as given
in table above shall be deemed to include painting if required all iron fittings in the same
shade different shade for which no extra measurement shall be taken.
Measurement of painting of doors, windows, collapsible gates, rolling shutters etc. as given
in table above shall be deemed to include painting if required all iron fittings in the same
shade or different shade for which no extra measurement shall be taken.
When the two faces of door, window etc. are to be treated with different specified finishes
measurable under separate items, the edge of frames and measurement of this will be
deemed to be included in the measurement of the face treated with that finish.
In the case where shutters are fixed on both faces of the frames, the measurement for the
door frame and shutter on one face shall be taken in the manner already described, while
the additional shutter on the other face will be measured for the shutter area excluding the
frame.
Where shutters are provided with clearance exceeding 15 cm at top or/and bottom such
openings shall be deducted from the overall measurements and relevant coefficients shall
be applied to obtain the area payable.
Width of moulded work of all other kinds, as in hand rails, cornices, architraves shall be
measured by girth.
14.4.5 Treatment of dampness to be measured and paid separately for plastered surfaces.
14.4.6 Removal of fungus/mold growth and repairs to major cracks and defect in plaster shall be
measured and paid for separately.
14.4.6.1 Scraping of the surface and application of suitable sealer shall be measured and paid for
separately.
14.5 Rate
Rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all operations described in
workmanship.

156 of 194
 1) The through rates include the carriage of all materials for 100 meters on head load and
1 kilometer by mechanical transport. All other additional carriage shall be accounted for
separately.
2) The through rates include the cost of materials, wastages, sand papers and brushes
required for completion of any item. The labour rates include the cost of brushes, sand
papers, scaffolding etc. and other appurtenant sundries.
3) The specification of paints especially paints and other goods shall be as notified by the
Chief Engineer, Uttarakhand P.W.D. from time to time.
All items shall be paid as per latest applicable Uttarakhand PWD Schedule of Rates (2014-
2015) of Rudraprayag District under Block 16-Ukhimath [for Work locations of Guptkashi,
Sonprayag, Rampur (Sonprayag), Gaurikund, and Triyuginarayan], under Block 17-
Agastyamuni (for Work location of Tilwara), and under Block 18-Jakholi (for Work location of
Jakholi).

C. Other relevant Specifications are as follows:

1. EXTERIOR PAINTING ON WALL

1.1 Material
The paint shall be (Weather proof exterior grade emulsion of approved design/Textured
exterior paint/Acrylic smooth exterior paint/Premium acrylic smooth exterior paint) as
specified or of approved brand and manufacture.
This paint shall be brought to the site of work by the Contractor in its original containers in
sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to suffice
for the whole work or at least a fortnight‟s work. The materials shall be kept in the joint
custody of the Contractor and the Engineer. The empty containers shall not be removed
from the site of work till the relevant item of work has been completed and permission
obtained from the Engineer.
1.2 Preparation of Surface
For new work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned off all mortar dropping, dirt dust,
algae, fungus or mold, grease and other foreign matter of brushing and washing, pitting in
plaster shall make good, surface imperfections such as cracks, holes etc. should be
repaired using white cement. The prepared surface shall have received the approval of the
Engineer after inspection before painting is commenced.
1.3 Application
Base coat of water proofing cement paint:
1.3.1 All specifications in respect of base coat of water proofing Cement Paint shall be as
described below.

1.3.1.1 Material
The Cement Paint shall be (conforming to IS: 5410) of approved brand and manufacture.
The other paint work conditions when brought to site shall be as per specifications given in
second para in 2.1 above.
1.3.1.2 Preparation of Surface
For New Work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar dropping, dirt dust,
algae, grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. Pitting in plaster shall be
made good and a coat of water proof Cement Paint shall be applied over patches after
wetting them thoroughly.
1.3.1.3 Preparation of Mix
Cement Paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up within an hour of its
mixing as otherwise the mixture will set and thicken, affecting flow and finish. Cement Paint
shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of cement
Paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall
be taken to add the Cement Paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second
stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to

157 of 194
 obtain a liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the manufacturer‟s
instructions shall be followed meticulously.
The lids of Cement Paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use, as by exposure
to atmosphere the Cement Paint rapidly becomes air set due to its hygroscopic qualities.
In case of Cement Paint brought in gunny bags, once the bag is opened, the contents
should be consumed in full on the day of its opening. If the same is not likely to be
consumed in full, the balance quantity should be transferred and preserved in an airtight
container to avoid its exposure to atmosphere.
1.3.1.4 Application
1.3.1.4.1 The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or spraying
machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be
applied on the surface which is on the shady side of the building so that the direct heat of
the sun on the surface is avoided. The method of application of cement Paint shall be as per
manufacturer‟s specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day‟s work.
1.3.1.4.2 The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours.
Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat shall
not be wetted.
1.3.1.4.3 For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coats of water proof cement
Paint as found necessary to get a uniform shade.
1.3.1.4.4 For old work, the treatment shall be with one or more coats as found necessary to get a
uniform shade.
1.3.1.5 Precaution
Water proof cement Paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with white wash,
colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, Paints etc. It shall not be applied on
gypsums, wood and metal surfaces.
If water proofing cement is required to be applied on existing surface, previously treated with
white wash, colour wash etc., the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrapping off all
the white wash, colour wash etc. completely. Thereafter, a coat of cement primer shall be
applied followed by two or more coat of water proof cement.
1.3.1.6 The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and rate
shall be as described below. The coefficient for Cement Paint on RCC Jalli shall be the
same as provided for painting trellis for Jaffri work one-way or two-way i.e. 2 (for painting all
over) measured flat overall, no deduction shall be made for open spaces, supporting
members shall not be measured separately.

1.3.1.6.1 Scaffolding
1.3.1.6.1.1 Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected on double supports tied
together by horizontal pieces, over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No ballies,
bamboos or planks shall rest on or touch the surface which is being white
washed/painted.
1.3.1.6.1.2 For all exposed brick work or tile work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical
supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong, tied together
with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.
Note: In case of special type of brick work, scaffolding shall be got approved from the
Engineer in advance.
1.3.1.6.1.3 Where ladders are used, pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid
damage or scratches to walls.
1.3.1.6.1.4 For white washing/painting the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
1.3.1.6.2 Protective Measures
Doors, windows, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other parts of the building not to be
white washed/painted, shall be protected from being splashed upon. Splashings and
droppings, if any shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost and the surfaces
cleaned. Damages if any to furniture or fittings and fixtures shall be recoverable from the
Contractor.

158 of 194
1.3.1.6.3 Measurements
1.3.1.6.3.1 Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm. and area shall be calculated
in sqm correct to two places of decimals.
1.3.1.6.3.2 Measurements for Jambs, Soffits and Fills etc. for openings shall be as described
below.
Deductions in measurements, for opening etc. will be regulated as follows:
(a) No deduction will be made for openings or ends of joists, beams, posts, girders,
steps etc. upto 0.5 sqm in area and no additions shall be made either, for the
jambs, soffits and sills of such openings. The above procedure will apply to both
faces of wall.
(b) Deduction for opening exceeding 0.5 sqm but not exceeding 3 sqm each shall be
made for reveals, jambs, soffits sills, sills, etc. of these openings.
(i) When both faces of walls are plastered with same plaster, deductions shall
be made for one face only.
(ii) When two faces of walls are plastered with different types of plaster or if one
face is plastered and other is pointed or one face is plastered and other is
unplastered, deduction shall be made from the plaster or pointing on the
side of the frame for the doors, windows etc. on which width of reveals is
less than that on the other side but no deduction shall be made on the other
side.
Where width of reveals on both faces of wall is equal, deduction of 50% of
area of opening on each face shall be made from area of plaster and/or
pointing as the case may be.
(iii) For opening having door frame equal to or projecting beyond thickness of
wall, full deduction for opening shall be made from each plastered face of
wall.
(c) For opening exceeding 3 sqm in area, deduction will be made in the
measurements for the full opening of the wall treatment on both faces, while at
the same time, jambs, sills and soffits will be measured for payment.
In measuring jambs, sills and soffits, deduction shall not be made for the area in
contact with the frame of doors, windows etc.
1.3.1.6.3.3 Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so measured shall
be increased by the following percentages to allow for the girthed area:
Corrugated non-asbestos cement sheet 20%
Semi corrugated non-asbestos cement sheet 10%
1.3.1.6.3.4 Cornices and other such wall or ceiling features, shall be measured along the girth
and included in the measurements.
1.3.1.6.3.5 The number of coats of each treatment shall be stated. The item shall include
removing nails, making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 50 sqcm each
with material similar in composition to the surface to be prepared.
1.3.1.6.3.6 Work on old treated surfaces shall be measured separately and so described.
1.3.1.6.4 Rate
The rate shall include all material and labour involved in all the operations described above.
1.3.1.7 Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its
container, when applying also the paint shall be continuously stirred in the smaller
containers so that its consistency is kept uniform. Dilution ratio of paint with potable water
can be altered taking into consideration the nature of surface climate and as per
recommended dilution given by manufacturer. In all cases, the manufacturer‟s instructions &
directions of the Engineer shall be followed meticulously.
The lids of paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to
atmosphere the paint may thicken and also be kept safe from dust.

159 of 194
1.3.1.8 Paint shall be applied with a brush on the cleaned and smooth surface. Horizontal strokes
shall be given, First and vertical strokes shall be applied immediately afterwards. This entire
operation will constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as uniformly as possible
leaving no brush marks.
1.4 The specifications in respect of scaffolding, protective measures, measurements and rate
shall be as described in para 2.3.1.6 above.
6. DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION
6.1 Scope
This work shall consist of removing, as hereinafter set forth, existing buildings, roofs, ceiling,
flooring and paving, concrete and brick roofs and suspended floors, walls and columns,
reinforced concrete and brick work, partitions, wood work, steel and iron work, doors and
windows, pipes and sewer lines, posts or struts, fencing wire mesh, glazing, culverts,
bridges, pavements, kerbs and other structures like guard-rails, utility services, catch basins,
inlets, etc., which are in place but interfere with the new construction or are not suitable to
remain in place, and of salvaging and disposing of the resulting materials and back filling the
resulting trenches and pits.

Existing culverts, bridges, pavements and other structures which are within the highway and
which are designated for removal, shall be removed up to the limits and extent specified in
the Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer.

Dismantling and removal operations shall be carried out with such equipment and in such a
manner as to leave undisturbed, adjacent pavement, structures and any other work to be left
in place.

Note: All operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure which might
endanger new construction shall be completed prior to the start of new work.

Applicable Codes
IS: 1200-1974 Method of Measurements of Building and Civil Engineering Works.
(Part: XVIII) Demolition and Dismantling (Reaffirmed 1992) (3rd Revision).
IS: 4130-1991 Demolition of Buildings - Code of Safety (2nd Revision).

6.2 Terminology

The term „Dismantling‟ implies carefully separating the parts without damage and removing.
This may consist of dismantling one or more parts of the structure as specified or shown on
the Drawings.

The term „Demolition‟ implies breaking up. This shall consist of demolishing whole or part of
work including all relevant items as specified or shown on the Drawings.

6.3 Buildings

6.3.1 Precautions

All materials obtained from dismantling or demolition shall be the property of the Employer
unless otherwise specified and shall be kept in safe custody until they are handed over to
the Engineer.
The demolition shall always be well planned before hand and shall generally be done in
reverse order of the one in which the structure was constructed. The operations shall be got
approved from the Engineer before starting the work.

160 of 194
 Due care shall be taken to maintain the safety measures prescribed in IS: 4130.

Necessary propping, shoring and or under pinning shall be provided to ensure the safety of
the adjoining work or property before dismantling and demolishing is taken up and the work
shall be carried out in such a way that no damage is caused to the adjoining work or
property. Wherever specified, temporary enclosures or partitions shall also be provided, as
directed by the Engineer.

Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep down the dust nuisance to the minimum.

Dismantling shall be done in a systemic manner. All materials which are likely to be
damaged by dropping from a height or by demolishing roofs, masonry etc. shall be carefully
removed first. The dismantled articles shall be removed manually or otherwise, lowered to
the ground (and not thrown) and then properly stacked as directed by the Engineer.

Where existing fixing is done by nails, screws, bolts, rivets, etc., dismantling shall be done
by taking out the fixing with proper tools and not by tearing or ripping off.

Any serviceable material, obtained during dismantling or demolition, shall be separated out
and stacked properly as directed by the Engineer within a lead of 50 m. All unserviceable
materials rubbish etc. shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain / disconnect existing services, whether temporary or

permanent, where required by the Engineer.

6.3.2 Measurements
All work shall be measured net in the decimal system, as fixed in its place, subject to the
following limits, unless otherwise stated hereinafter:
1) Dimensions shall be measured correct to a cm.
2) Areas shall be worked out in sq mt correct to two places of decimal.
3) Cubical contents shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 cum.

4) Parts of work required to be dismantled and those required to be demolished shall be

measured separately.
5)
6) Measurements of all works except hidden work shall be taken before demolition or
dismantling and no allowance for increase in bulk shall be allowed.
7)
8) Specifications for deduction for voids, openings etc. shall be on the same basis as that
adopted for new construction of the work.
9)
10) Work executed in the following conditions shall be measured separately:
11) Work in or under water and/or liquid mud; and
12) Work in or under foul position.

6.3.3 Rates
The rate shall include the cost of all labour involved and tools used in demolishing and
dismantling including scaffolding. The rate shall also include the charges for separating out
and stacking the serviceable material properly and disposing off unserviceable material
within a distance of 50 m.
The rate shall also include for temporary shoring for the safety of portions not required to be
pulled down, or of adjoining property, and providing temporary enclosures or partitions,
where considered necessary.

6.3.4 Roofs
Roof coverings generally including battens boarding, mats, bamboo jaffari or other
subsidiary supports shall be measured in sq mt except lead sheet roof covering, which shall
be measured in quintals (Clause 15.2.3 of CPWD Specifications, Vol. 2, 2009 under Chapter

161 of 194
 15.0, Dismantling and Demolishing) and stone slab roof covering which shall be measured
in cum.

Ridges, hips and valleys shall be girthed and included with the roof area. Corrugated or
semi corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat and not girthed.

Mud phuska on roofs shall be measured in cum.

Lead sheets in roofs shall be measured in quintals and hips, valleys, flashings, lining to
gutter etc. Shall be included in this weight.

R.B. or R.C.C. roofs shall be measured as specified in Clause 15.3.11 of CPWD

Specifications, Vol. 2, 2009 under Chapter 15.0, Dismantling and Demolishing.

Supporting members, such as rafters, purlins, beams joists, trusses etc. where of wood shall
be measured in cum and steel or iron sections in quintals.

6.3.5 Ceiling
The stripping of ceilings shall be measured in sqm.

Dismantling of supporting joists, beams, etc. shall be measured in cum or in quintals as

specified in Clause 15.3.6 (vi) of CPWD Specifications, Vol. 2, 2009 under Chapter 15.0,
Dismantling and Demolishing.

Height above floor levels if it exceeds 3.5 m shall paid for separately.

6.3.6 Flooring and Paving

Dismantling of floors (except concrete and brick floors) shall be measured in sqm. Supports
such as joints, beams etc. if any shall be measured as per Clause 15.3.6 (vi) of CPWD
Specifications, Vol. 2, 2009 under Chapter 15.0, Dismantling and Demolishing. Concrete
and bricks paving shall be measured as per Clause 15.3.9 of CPWD Specifications, Vol. 2,
2009 under Chapter 15.0, Dismantling and Demolishing.

6.3.7 Concrete and Brick Roofs and Suspended Floors

Demolition of floors and roofs of concrete or brick shall be measured in cum. Beams
cantilevers or other subsidiary supports of similar materials shall be included in the item. In
measuring thickness of roofs provided with water proofing treatments with bitumen, felts, the
thickness of water proofing treatment shall be ignored.

6.3.8 Walls and Piers

Taking down walls and independent piers or columns of brick, stone or concrete shall be
measured, in cum. All copings, corbels, cornices and other projections shall be included with
the wall measurements.

In measuring thickness of plastered walls, the thickness of plaster shall be ignored.

Ashlar face stones, dressed stone work, precast concrete articles, etc. if required to be
taken down intact shall be so stated, and measured separately in cum.

Cleaning bricks stacking for measurements including all extra handling and removal and
disposing off the rubbish as stated shall be enumerated in thousand of cleaned bricks.

Cleaning stone obtained from demolished / dismantling stone masonry of any description
including ashlar facing dressed stone work, stone slabs or flagging and precast concrete
blocks including all extra handling and disposing of the rubbish as stated shall be measured
in cum of cleaned stone.

Honey comb works or cavity walls of bricks stone or concrete shall be measured as solid.

162 of 194
6.3.9 Reinforced Concrete and Brick Work
Reinforced concrete structures and reinforced brick roof and walls shall be measured in cum
and if reinforcement is required to be salvaged, it shall be so stated.

Where reinforcement is required to be separated, scraped and cleaned, the work shall be
measured separately in quintal of salvaged steel.

6.3.10 Partitions, Trellis Work, etc.

Partitions or light walls of lath and plaster, trellis work, expanded metal, thin concrete or
terracotta slabs and other similar materials including frame work if any shall be measured in
sqm stating the overall thickness.

6.3.11 Wood Work

All wood work including karries average 40 sq cm or over in section, shall be measured in
cum, while that under 40 sq cm in section, in running meters. Ballies shall be measured in
running meters.

Boarding including wooden chajjas and sun shades along with supports shall be measured
in square m in its plane.

6.3.12 Steel and Iron Work

All steel and iron work shall be measured in quintals. The weight shall be computed from
standard tables unless the actual weight can readily be determined.

Riveted work, where rivets are required to be cut, shall be measured separately.

Marking of structural steel required to be re-erected shall be measured separately.

In framed steel items, the weight or any covering material or filling such as iron sheets and
expanded metal shall be included in the weight of the main article unless such covering is
not ordered to be taken out separately.

6.3.13 Doors and Windows

Dismantling of doors, windows, clerestory windows, ventilators etc. (wood or metal) whether
done separately or along with removal of wall by making recess in the wall shall be
enumerated. Those exceeding 3 sqm each in area shall be measured separately. The item
shall include removal of Chowkhats, architraves, hold fasts and other attachments.

If only shutters are to be taken out it shall be measured separately.

6.3.14 Pipes and Sewer Lines

Water pipe lines including rain water pipes with clamps and specials, sewer lines (salt
glazed ware or concrete) etc. shall be described by their diameter and length measured in
running m inclusive of joints.

If the joints, special and fittings etc. Are required to be separated, it shall be so stated and
enumerated.

Pucca drains shall be measured under relevant items.

Value cistern, public fountain platform, fire hydrants, etc. shall be enumerated.

Manholes and inspection chambers shall be enumerated stating the size and depth of
manhole/inspection chamber. They shall be classified into different groups depending upon
the depth, in unit of half and one m depth. The depth of the manhole shall be the distance
between the top of manhole cover and invert level of the drain.

163 of 194
 Ventilating shafts, gully traps, flushing cisterns and other appurtenant items of work shall be
enumerated.

6.3.15 Posts or Struts

Posts or struts (wood, steel or RCC) section including taking out embedded portion shall be
measure running m.

6.3.16 Fencing Wire Mesh

Wire mesh fencing of any type with frame shall be measured in square m.

6.3.17 Glazing
Taking out any portion of serviceable glass except polished plate, from old sashes,
skylights, etc. (any thickness, weight or size) raking out old putty, etc. shall be measured in
square m.

Irregular or circular panes shall be measured as rectangle or square enveloping the same.
The width and height being measured correct to the nearest 0.5 cm.
8. INTERLOCKING GRASS CONCRETE PAVER BLOCKS FOR PARKING SURFACE
8.1 Use factory made heavy duty vibro-compacted precast cement concrete interlocking paver
blocks 80 mm deep for surface parking lots with grass laying space in-built/space created
(soil pocket) when joined (known as grass concrete paver blocks) laid over an eco-friendly
bedding & crust base, i.e. an amended crust of graded crushed or washed aggregate course
laid in 3-layers (refer drawing sections, as applicable):
8.1.1 First layer from top being the bedding course 2.0 inches (50 mm) thick beneath the paving
surface blocks, consisting of coarse sand material which is also used as filler material for
filling joints of such interlocking blocks as the joints act as drainage voids. Use a sand
material to fill the joint spaces to provide adequate vertical block interlock. Once the blocks
after having been laid over the screeded uncompacted sand, the paving surface may be
nominally compacted. If course sand filler material is used the gradation for this material
shall be 100% passing the No. 16 sieve and 10% passing the No. 200 sieve. As an
alternative to coarse sand about up to 5 mm size if not available, graded pea gravel size
crushed or washed stones can also be used containing normally up to 3/8 inch size gravel
i.e. 9.5 mm in size to maximum 1/2 inch size gravel i.e. 12.5 mm). The specification for sieve
passing percentages of grading such sand / pea gravel bedding course is as follows:
Sieve Size 1/2 inch 3/8 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 16
12.50 mm 9.50 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm 1.16 mm
% Passing 100 85 to 100 10 to 30 0 to 10 0 to 5
8.1.2 The paving surface blocks and bedding layer are placed over an open-graded crushed or
washed stone base properly rolled/compacted in separate layers (containing two layers of
base and sub-base courses) with no infiltration to the soil subgrade. The sub-surface
drainage of such amended soil layers with no infiltration assumed is directed to an outlet
along and below the lowest level edge of sub-base via perforated PVC drain pipes about 4
inches in diameter with the outfall pipe sloped to storm water drain/sewer or stream.
The second layer i.e. the base layer is normally of 6 inches thickness or more as required
consisting of gravel/stone size maximum up to 1-1/2 inches i.e. 37.5 mm. The specification
for sieve passing percentages of grading such a base layer is as follows:
Sieve Size 1-1/2 inches 1 inch 1/2 inch No. 4 No. 8
37.5 mm 25.00 mm 12.50 mm 4.75 mm 2.36 mm
% Passing 100 95 to 100 25 to 60 0 to 10 0 to 5
The third layer i.e. the sub-base layer is normally of 9 inches thickness or more as required
consisting of stone size maximum up to 3 inches i.e. 75 mm. The specification for sieve
passing percentages of grading such a sub-base layer is as follows:
Sieve Size 3 inches 2-1/2 inches 2 inches 1-1/2 inches 3/4 inch

164 of 194
 75 mm 63 mm 50 mm 37.5 mm 19 mm
% Passing 100 90 to 100 35 to 70 0 to 15 0 to 5
8.1.3 These base and sub-base layers are rolled/compacted to minimum 90% Proctor density (of
maximum dry density).
8.1.4 The natural soil subgrade should be compacted to at least 95% of maximum dry density.
The cross-slope of the sub-base / natural soil subgrade would conform to the finish grade of
the parking surface and sloped to drain, and be at least 1% more than the abutting road
surface camber (i.e. about 3% minimum or more for storm water drainage slope).
8.1.5 As required 6 inches high (minimum 1 ft embedded in crust) & 6 inches wide kerb edges or
edge restraints is provided on top of parking surface to support the paving surface blocks.
As required, trenches shall first be made along the edge of the parking surface to receive
the precast kerb stones / cast-in-situ kerb edges of cement concrete of specified grade
complete with shuttering, concreting, curing etc. and as directed by the Engineer. The bed of
the trenches shall be compacted manually with steel rammers to a firm and even surface
and then the kerb blocks shall be set in cement mortar of specified proportion. The joints of
kerb blocks with or without grooves shall be staggered and shall be not more than 10 mm
(thickness of joints except at sharp curve shall not be more than 5 mm). Wherever specified
all joints shall be filled with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and pointed with
cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 fine sand) which shall be cured for 7 days. The necessary
drainage openings or cut-outs of specified sizes shall be made through the kerb as per
drawings or as directed by the Engineer for overflow drainage connection to storm water
drain/sewer or stream. For finishing, berms and edges shall be restored and all surplus
earth including rubbish etc. disposed off as directed by the Engineer. Nothing extra shall be
paid for this. Kerb/edge restraints shall be installed before paving begins so that the finished
elevation for the bedding sand course can be set from the edge.
8.1.6 Edge pavers can be cut with a saw or block cutter to fit against the kerb restraint. When the
gap between the pavers and the kerb edge exceeds 3/8 inch, it is recommended that the
space shall be fitted with a cut paver.
8.1.7 The bedding sand shall be screeded down using the kerb/edge restraint as a guide. The
bedding sand shall remain uncompacted until after the pavers are installed. No one shall
walk on the bedding sand after it has been screeded and before the pavers are installed.
The bedding sand shall be kept covered after delivering to the job site to assure uniform
moisture content throughout the job.
8.1.8 Paving shall start at one point only in order that a uniform appearance is maintained
throughout the surface. Pavers can be installed by hand or mechanically, depending on the
type of paver and project requirements, directly over the uncompacted bedding sand.
Compact the pavers to level using a mechanical plate vibrator. Vibration compaction shall
not begin until a minimum of 20 square meters of pavers are laid. Vibrate two-times over. Do
not vibrate within 1 meter of an unrestrained edge. Sweep the sand filler material to fill the
joints and recompact with the vibrator to complete the interlock.
8.1.9 All paver blocks shall be sound and free from defects that would interfere with the proper
placing of the block or impair the strength or performance of the construction. The paver
block shall be constructed of cement concrete of M-30 grade and shall be high quality block
specifically manufactured for the construction of paved surfaces and be of approved brand
and manufacturer of repute and of approved quality. Pavers should have less than 5% water
absorption by weight. Minimum strength of cement concrete as prescribed by manufacturer
and as per direction of Engineer for the grade specified to be tested as per method
mentioned in specification of subhead cement concrete of CPWD Specifications (Vol. 1),
2009.
8.2 Grass Work in Paver Blocks under Arboriculture and Gardening Specifications
8.2.1 General
8.2.1.1 The Arboriculture and Gardening operations shall be started on ground previously levelled
and dressed to required formation levels and slopes.
8.2.1.2 For Arboriculture and Gardening works, the soil shall be free from kankar, moorum, brick
bats, building rubbish etc.

165 of 194
8.2.1.3 In cases where unsuitable soil is met with, it shall be either removed or replaced or it shall
be covered over to a thickness decided by the Engineer with good earth brought from
approved sites.
8.2.1.4 In the course of excavation or trenching during Arboriculture and Gardening operations, any
structures foundations etc. met with shall not be dismantled without pre-measurement, and
prior to the written permission of the Engineer.
8.2.2 Supplying and Stacking Good Earth
8.2.2.1 Good Earth
The soil shall be agricultural soil of loamy texture, free from kankar, moorum, shingle, rocks,
stone, brick bats, building rubbish and any other foreign matter. The earth shall be free froth
clods or lumps of sizes bigger than 75 mm in any direction. It shall have pH value ranging
between 6 to 8.5.
8.2.2.2 The material shall be stacked at site in stacks of size 2 m x 2 m x 0.25 m.
8.2.2.3 Measurements
Length, breadth and height of stacks shall be measured correct to a cm. The volume of the
stacks shall be reduced by 20% for voids before payment, unless otherwise specified.
8.2.2.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of excavating the earth, breaking of clods, stacking at places,
syndicated royalty if payable and carriage upto 100 metres on head load and 1 km by
mechanical transport.
8.2.3 Supplying and Stacking Sludge
8.2.3.1 Sludge
It shall be obtained from a approved sewage disposal works.
8.2.3.2 It shall be transported to the site in lorries with efficient arrangements to prevent spilling
enroute. It shall be stacked at site in stacks of size 2 m x 2 m x 0.25 m.
8.2.3.3 Measurements
Length, breadth and depth of stacks be measured correct to a cm. The volume of the stacks
shall be reduced by 8% for looseness in stacking, to arrive at the net quantity for payment.
8.2.3.4 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in the operations
described above including carriage to site upto one km by mechanical transport and 100
metres on head load. The rate shall also include royalty if payable.
8.2.4 Supplying and Stacking Dump Manure
8.2.4.1 Dump Manure
Dump manure shall be of well decayed organic or vegetable matter obtained in the dry state
from the municipal dump or other similar source approved by the Engineer. The manure
shall be free from earth, stone, brick bats or other extraneous stuff.
Manure sieved through sieve of I.S. designation 16 mm is generally used for mixing with the
excavated soil to be refilled in trenches for shrubbery, rose and vegetable garden and trees
and lawns while that sieved through sieve of I.S. designation 4.75 mm is used for forming
lawns for Tennis Courts, sports, etc.
8.2.4.2 Manure shall be supplied at site well screened through sieve of I.S. designation 16 mm or
4.75 mm as specified and directed by the Engineer. The screened manure shall be stacked
at site in stacks of not less than 50 cm height and of volume not less than 3 cum.
8.2.4.3 Measurements
Length, breadth and height of stacks shall be measured correct to a cm. The volume of the
stacks shall be reduced by 8% for looseness in stacking, to arrive at the net quantity for
payment.
8.2.4.4 Rate
The rate shall include the costs of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above; inclusive of carriage upto one km by mechanical transport and 100 metres
on head load. The rate shall also include royalty if payable.

166 of 194
8.2.5 Spreading Sludge/Dump Manure and/or Good Earth
8.2.5.1 Good earth, sludge, and/or dump manure shall be removed from stacks by head load and
spread evenly over the fine dressed surface to the thickness ordered by the Engineer. It
shall be spread with a twisting motion to avoid segregation and to ensure that spreading is
uniform over the entire area.
8.2.5.2 Measurements
The quantity of good earth, sludge and/or manure spread shall be determined by the
differences in the volume of good earth, sludge or manure in stacks before and after
spreading duly reduced for looseness in stacking by 20% of good earth and 8% of sludge or
manure.
8.2.5.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour etc. involved in all the operations described
above, but does not include the cost of the good earth sludge or manure which shall be paid
for separately unless, specifically described in the item. The rate shall also include carriage
within a lead of 20 metres and lift upto 1.5 metres, unless otherwise specified in Work item.
8.2.6 Mixing of Good Earth and Sludge or Manure
8.2.6.1 The stacked earth shall before mixing, be broken down to particles of sizes not exceeding 6
mm in any direction. Good earth shall be thoroughly mixed with sludge or manure in
specified proportion as described in the item or as directed by the Engineer. The mixing
shall be spread as described in 8.2.5.1 above to the thickness ordered by the Engineer.
8.2.6.2 Measurements
The quantity of good earth and sludge or manure mixed shall be determined by the
difference in the volume of good earth, sludge or manure in stack, before and after
spreading duly accounted for voids and looseness in stacks.
8.2.6.3 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above, but does not include the cost of good earth, sludge or manure which shall
be paid for separately, unless otherwise described in the item.
8.2.7 Grassing
8.2.7.1 Grass
Grass shall be fresh grass as specified or as directed by the Engineer, free from weed and
rank vegetation but having „Rhizomes‟ with sufficient nodes and shall be approved by the
Engineer, before planting.
8.2.7.2 The area from where the grass roots are to be obtained shall be specified by the Engineer at
the time of the execution of the work.
8.2.7.3 The soil shall be suitably moistened and then the operation of planting grass shall be
commenced. The grass shall be dibbled at 15 cm, 7.5 cm, 5 cm apart in any direction or
other spacing as described in the item. Dead grass and weeds shall not be planted. The
Contractor shall be responsible for watering and maintenance of levels and the lawn for 30
days or till the grass forms a thick lawn free from weeds and fit for mowing, whichever is
later or till the Work is completed if so specified for the Work. Generally planting in either
direction at 15 cm, spacing is done in the case of large open spaces, at 7.5 cm, spacing in
residential lawns and at 5 cm spacing for Tennis Courts and sport ground lawns.
8.2.7.4 Precautions
During the maintenance period, any irregularities arising in ground levels due to watering or
due to trampling by labour or due to cattle straying thereon, shall be constantly made up to
the proper levels with earth as available or brought from outside as necessary. Constant
watch shall be maintained to ensure that dead patches are replanted and weeds are
removed.
8.2.7.5 Measurements
Length and breadth of the lawn grassed shall be measured correct to a cm, and the area
shall be calculated in square metre correct to two places of decimal

167 of 194
8.2.7.6 Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above, excluding, supply of requisite quantity of good earth if so needed for
properly maintaining the levels of the lawns. The cost for grass shall be paid separately,
unless specified otherwise.
8.2.8 The above mentioned good earth/sludge or manure mixture as base for grassing work and
laying of grass is to be undertaken in the hollow portions of the grass paver blocks. The
coverage of the grass paver block surface area has to be watered well-enough to ensure the
satisfactory condition of grassing work is maintained until the Work is completed.
8.3 Measurements
The overall item of grass paver blocks surface area is to be measured in square meters,
correct to two places of decimal.
8.4 Rate
The rate includes the cost of the material, labour, tools etc. required in all the operations
described above to complete the Work item of grass paver block surface as specified and as
directed by the Engineer.
o
8.5 Kerb edge blocks (6 inches wide) when used as wheel guards in the 90 parking bays (2.5
m x 6.0 m) shall be installed as 4 inches high on top of the parking surface with their outer
face at a distance of 0.90 m from the end of parking bay, and the size of such kerb blocks
preferably being 0.6 m in length (minimum 0.5 m) placed suitably as two blocks per parking
bay with lateral wheel base considered as 1.5 m c/c. This item is to be measured in cubic
meters correct up to two places of decimal.
G.I. CHAIN-LINK FABRIC FENCING
10.1 Materials
G.I. Chain-link Fabric Fencing of required width in mesh size 50 mm x 50 mm or 25 x 25 mm
or specified otherwise of approved brand and made of specified dia G.I. wire PVC coated of
specified thickness/or not coated as specified in Work item and drawing, of required colour
or shade to be used.
10.1.1 Fixing
G.I. chain-link fabric shall be stretched and fixed in specified width and height, strengthening
with 2 mm diameter G.I. wire at the top & bottom of the fence length or with MS Single Angle
horizontal & vertical welded frame (40 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm weighing 3.0 kg/m) holding the
chain-link fabric using welded MS Flat (20 mm x 5 mm weighing 0.8 kg/m) along edges/mid-
partition as required or specified in the work item/drawing, and fixed with clamps, nuts, bolts
& washers as required shall be done so that the fence is well secured over supporting
posts/columns placed at specified intervals in MS Double Angle columns (50mm x 50mm x
6mm MS angle with weight as 9.0 kg/m joined together to make square box-shaped
supporting column) or MS Square Tubular Section (50 mm) as specified, grouted well in CC
1:2:4 Mix (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 aggregates of 20 mm & below size) over base CC 1:2:4 Mix
(1 cement: 2 sand: 4 aggregates of 40 mm & below size) in the ground or in CC 1:2:4 Mix (1
cement: 2 sand: 4 aggregates of 20 mm & below size) within the supporting wall/boundary
wall pocket as specified, including painting of priming coat and two coats of enamel paint (in
specified colour) on metal surfaces, with necessary entrance & exit gates along the fence
etc. complete as specified in the Work item, drawings, and as directed by the Engineer.
10.1.2 Measurements
The length and width shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be calculated in
square metre, correct to two places of decimal.
10.2. Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described as above to complete the chain-link fabric fencing work and including the
necessary number of gates of required size (measured in square meter) with required
number of openable gate panels constructed using the same fabrication materials as of
chain-link fencing work/or as specified, and fixed to the MS Double Angle Square Box-
shaped columns or MS Square Tubular Section columns or Masonry pillars/posts with the
required box hinge & bolt-pin fastening arrangement or sliding arrangement over MS

168 of 194
 Channel Section as specified, holding latches and bolting/locking socket arrangements etc.
provided complete as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

11 CERAMIC TILES & VITRIFIED TILES FOR FLOORING, SKIRTING & DADO ON WALLS /
EXPOSED WALL TILES WORK
11.1 Material
Ceramic/Vitrified/Exposed Wall tiles for different types of tile work uses shall confirm to the
specifications given below. All other materials used shall confirm to specifications given in
the relevant sections or as decided by Engineer.
a) Vitrified Tiles (For flooring including skirting in Rooms/Corridors/Halls)
Technical Specification for Normal Floor Tiles
Requirements as per Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
<0.08% Group B1a E < 0.5% Group B1a
A) Dimension & Surface Quality
i) Length & Width + 0.1% + 0.6%
ii) Thickness + 4.0% + 5.0%
iii) Straightness of side + 0.1% + 0.5% EN 98 / IS
iv) Rectangularity + 0.1% + 0.6% 13630 Part 1 /
ISO 10545-2
v) Surface Flatness - -
a) Center curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%
b) Edge curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%
c) Corner warpage (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%
Min. 95% of tiles will
Min. 95% of tiles will be
vi) Surface Quality be free from visible
free from visible defects
defects
B) Physical Properties
EN 99 / IS
Avg. < 5%, Individual
i) Water Absorption Avg. < 0.08% 13630 Part 2 /
0.6% Max.
ISO 10545-3
2 Avg. 47, Individual 44 Avg. 35, Individual 32
ii) Modulus of Rupture [N/mm ] EN 100 / IS
Min. Min.
13630 Part 6 /
iii) Breaking Strength in N 1500 Min. 1300 ISO 10545-4

EN 155 / IS
iv) Moisture Expansion in mm/m N.A. Test Method Available 13630 Part 3 /
ISO 10545-10
EN 101 / IS
v) Scratch Hardness of surface (Mohs) 6 Min. N.A.
13630 Part 13
EN 154 / IS
vi) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of
100 Max. Max. 175 13630 Part 11 /
unglazed tiles
ISO 10545-7
EN 154 / IS
vii) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of Report Abrasion Class &
N.A. 13630 Part 11 /
glazed tiles (Class I to V) Cycle Passed
ISO 10545-7
EN 103 / IS
viii) Coefficient of linear thermal expansion -6 -1
0 6 x 10 K Max. Test Method Available 13630 Part 4 /
from ambient temperature to 100 C
ISO 10545-8
EN 104 / IS
ix) Thermal Shock Resistance 10 cycle Min. Test Method Available
13630 Part 5
EN 104 / IS
x) Crazing Resistance N.A. Required 13630 Part 9 /
ISO 10545-9

169 of 194
 Requirements as per Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
<0.08% Group B1a E < 0.5% Group B1a
EN 202 / IS
xi) Frost Resistance Required Required 13630 Part 10 /
ISO 10545-12
EN 99 / IS
xii) Bulk Density 2.2 Min. N.A.
13630 Part 2
IS 13630 Part
xiii) Impact Resistance Required Test Method Available
14
C) Chemical Resistance (Gazed Tiles)
i) Stain Resistance Not Mentioned Test Method Available
ii) Resistance to household chemicals Required Min. Class UB IS 13630 Part 8
/ ISO 10545-13
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis (with & ISO 10545-14
exception of hydrofluoric & its Required if agreed Test Method Available
compounds)

EN = European Standard, IS = Indian Standard (as of Bureau of Indian Standards), ISO = International Standard
Organization

b) Ceramic Tiles (For flooring in Toilets)

Technical Specification for Toilet Floor Tiles
Requirements as per Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
3 < E < 6 Group BII 3 < E < 6 Group B IIa

Un
A) Dimension & Surface Quality Rectified
Rectified

i) Length & Width + 0.4% + 0.1% + 0.6%

ii) Thickness + 5.0% + 5.0%

iii) Straightness of side + 0.3% + 0.1% + 0.5%

EN 98 / IS
iv) Rectangularity + 0.3% + 0.1% + 0.6% 13630 Part 1 /
ISO 10545-2
v) Surface Flatness - -

a) Center curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.5% + 0.5%

b) Edge curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.5% + 0.5%

c) Corner warpage (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.5% + 0.5%

Min. 95% of tiles will

Min. 95% of tiles will be
vi) Surface Quality be free from visible
free from visible defects
defects

B) Physical Properties

3% < E < 6%, EN 99 / IS

Avg. 3% < E < 6%,
i) Water Absorption 13630 Part 2 /
Individual Max. 6.2% Individual Max. 6.5% ISO 10545-3

2 Avg. 30, Individual 28 Avg. 22, Individual 20

ii) Modulus of Rupture [N/mm ] EN 100 / IS
Min. Min.
13630 Part 6 /
iii) Breaking Strength in N 1000 Min. Not less than 1000 ISO 10545-4

170 of 194
 Requirements as per Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
3 < E < 6 Group BII 3 < E < 6 Group B IIa
EN 155 / IS
iv) Moisture Expansion in mm/m N.A. N.A. 13630 Part 3 /
ISO 10545-10
Min. 7 (Commercial), EN 101 / IS
v) Scratch Hardness of surface (Mohs) N.A.
Min. 5 (Home) 13630 Part 13
EN 154 / IS
vi) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of
N.A. N.A. 13630 Part 11 /
unglazed tiles
ISO 10545-7
Commercial
EN 154 / IS
vii) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of Application Min. IV, Report Abrasion Class &
13630 Part 11 /
glazed tiles (Class I to V) Home Application Min. Cycle Passed
ISO 10545-7
II,
EN 103 / IS
viii) Coefficient of linear thermal expansion -6 -1
0 9 x 10 K Max. Test Method Available 13630 Part 4 /
from ambient temperature to 100 C
ISO 10545-8
EN 104 / IS
ix) Thermal Shock Resistance 10 cycle Min. Test Method Available
13630 Part 5
EN 104 / IS
x) Crazing Resistance 4 cycle @ 7.5 bar Min. Required 13630 Part 9 /
ISO 10545-9
EN 202 / IS
xi) Frost Resistance Required if agreed Test Method Available 13630 Part 10 /
ISO 10545-12
EN 99 / IS
xii) Bulk Density N.A. N.A.
13630 Part 2
IS 13630 Part
xiii) Impact Resistance N.A. Test Method Available
14
C) Chemical Resistance (Glazed Tiles)
i) Stain Resistance Min. Class-1 Min. Class-3
ii) Resistance to household chemicals Min. Class-AA Min. Class UB IS 13630 Part 8
/ ISO 10545-13
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis (with & ISO 10545-14
Manufacturer to state
exception of hydrofluoric & its Required if agreed
Classification
compounds)

EN = European Standard, IS = Indian Standard (as of Bureau of Indian Standards), ISO = International
Standard Organization

c) Ceramic Tiles (For skirting & dado in Toilets/Kitchen Walls)

Technical Specification for Wall Tiles (Digital & Non-Digital/Ceramic Glazed Tiles)
(Group B III, IS 15622) (Group B III, ISO 13006)

Technical Characteristics Requirements as per Requirements as per Test Method

IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006
Table-9 E > 10 E > 10 Group B III

A) Dimension & Surface Quality (a) (b)

i) Length & Width ± 0.2% ± 0.1% ± 0.6%/-0.3%

EN98 / IS 13630
ii) Thickness ± 4.0% ± 10.0%
Part 1 / ISO
iii) Straightness of side ± 0.15% ± 0.30% 10545-2

iv) Rectangularity ± 0.15% ± 0.50%

171 of 194
 (Group B III, IS 15622) (Group B III, ISO 13006)

Technical Characteristics Requirements as per Requirements as per Test Method

IS 15622:2006 ISO 13006
Table-9 E > 10 E > 10 Group B III

v) Surface Flatness - -

a) Center curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) ± 0.22% ± 0.5%/-0.3%

b) Edge curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) ± 0.22% ± 0.5%/-0.3%

c) Corner warpage (%) (Max. Deviation) ± 0.22% ± 0.5%

Min. 95% of tiles will be Min. 95% of tiles will be

vi) Surface Quality
free from visible defects free from visible defects

B) Physical Properties

E ≥ 10% when it exceeds

E ≥ 10% when it
20% this shall be EN99 / IS 13630
exceeds 20% this shall
i) Water Absorption indicated by the Part 2 / ISO
be indicated by the
manufacturer, Individual 10545-3
manufacturer
Minimum value 9%

Average Min. 12 for Average Min. 12 for

2 thickness < 7.5mm, thickness < 7.5mm,
ii) Modulus of Rupture [N/mm ]
Average Min. 15 for Average Min. 15 for
thickness > 7.5mm thickness > 7.5mm EN100 / IS
13630 Part 6 /
Min. 200 for thickness < Min. 200 for thickness < ISO 10545-4
7.5mm, 7.5mm,
iii) Breaking Strength in N
500 for thickness > 600 for thickness >
7.5mm 7.5mm

EN155 / IS
iv) Moisture Expansion in mm/m 0.04 Test Method Available 13630 Part 3 /
ISO 10545-10

EN101 / IS
v) Scratch Hardness of surface (Mohs) Min. 3 NA
13630 Part 13

EN103 / IS
vi) Coefficient of linear thermal expansion -6 -1
0 9 x 10 K max Test Method Available 13630 Part 4 /
from ambient temperature to 100 c
ISO 10545-8

EN104 / IS
vii) Thermal Shock Resistance 10 cycle min Test Method Available 13630 Part 5 /
ISO 10545-9

EN105 / IS
viii) Crazing Resistance 4 cycle @ 7.5 bar min Required 13630 Part 9 /
ISO 10545-11

C) Chemical Resistance (glazed Tiles)

i) Stain Resistance Min Class-1 Min Class-3

ii) Resistance to household chemicals Min Class-AA Min GB IS 13630 Part 8

/ ISO 10545-13
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis (with
& ISO 10545-14
exception of hydrofluoric & its Required if agreed Test Method Available
compounds)

EN = European Standard, IS = Indian Standard (as of Bureau of Indian Standards), ISO = International Standard
Organization

172 of 194
 d) Exposed Wall Tiles (For exterior wall cladding purposes)
Technical Specification for Polished Glazed Vitrified Tiles
Requirements as per IS Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
0.08 < E < 3 Group B1b 0.5 < E < 6 Group B1b

A) Dimension & Surface Quality

i) Length & Width + 0.1% + 0.6%

ii) Thickness + 4.0% + 5.0%

iii) Straightness of side + 0.1% + 0.5% EN 98 / IS

13630 Part 1 /
iv) Rectangularity + 0.1% + 0.6%
ISO 10545-2
v) Surface Flatness - -

a) Center curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%

b) Edge curvature (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%

c) Corner warpage (%) (Max. Deviation) + 0.2% + 0.5%

Min. 95% of tiles will be Min. 95% of tiles will be

vi) Surface Quality
free from visible defects free from visible defects

B) Physical Properties

0.5% < E < 3%, EN 99 / IS

Avg. < 3%, Individual 3.3
i) Water Absorption 13630 Part 2 /
Max. Individual 3.3 Max. ISO 10545-3
2 Avg. 38, Individual 35 Avg. 30, Individual 7
ii) Modulus of Rupture [N/mm ] EN 100 / IS
Min. Min.
13630 Part 6 /
iii) Breaking Strength in N 1200 1100 ISO 10545-4

EN 155 / IS
iv) Moisture Expansion in mm/m 0.02 Test Method Available 13630 Part 3 /
ISO 10545-10
Min. 6 (Commercial), EN 101 / IS
v) Scratch Hardness of surface (Mohs) N.A.
Min. 5 (Home) 13630 Part 13
EN 154 / IS
vi) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of
N.A. N.A. 13630 Part 11 /
unglazed tiles
ISO 10545-7
Commercial Application EN 154 / IS
vii) Resistance to Deep Abrasion of Min. III, Report Abrasion Class
13630 Part 11 /
glazed tiles (Class I to V) & Cycle Passed
Home Application Min. II, ISO 10545-7
viii) Coefficient of linear thermal EN 103 / IS
-6 -1
expansion from ambient temperature to 6 x 10 K Max. Test Method Available 13630 Part 4 /
0
100 C ISO 10545-8
EN 104 / IS
ix) Thermal Shock Resistance 10 cycle Min. Test Method Available
13630 Part 5
EN 104 / IS
x) Crazing Resistance 4 cycle @ 7.5 bar Min. Required 13630 Part 9 /
ISO 10545-9
EN 202 / IS
xi) Frost Resistance Required Required 13630 Part 10 /
ISO 10545-12

173 of 194
 Requirements as per IS Requirements as per
Technical Characteristics 15622:2006 ISO 13006 Test Method
0.08 < E < 3 Group B1b 0.5 < E < 6 Group B1b

EN 99 / IS
xii) Bulk Density N.A. N.A.
13630 Part 2
IS 13630 Part
xiii) Impact Resistance Test Method Available N.A.
14
C) Chemical Resistance (Glazed Tiles)
i) Stain Resistance Min. Class-1 Min. Class-3
ii) Resistance to household chemicals Min. Class-AA Min. Class GB IS 13630 Part 8
/ ISO 10545-13
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis (with & ISO 10545-14
Manufacturer to state
exception of hydrofluoric & its Required if agreed
Classification
compounds)

EN = European Standard, IS = Indian Standard (as of Bureau of Indian Standards), ISO = International Standard
Organization

11.2 Workmanship
11.2.1 Sub-grade
Sub-grade shall be of floor concrete or of R.C.C. slab or of masonry walls.
11.2.2 Bedding
Bedding layer over which the tiles shall be laid shall be of 20 mm average thickness in
cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) in case of floors. For use on R.C.C. slab or
masonry walls, tiles would be laid on bedding layer of 12 mm average thickness in cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand).
11.2.3 Laying
Sub-grade shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. The bedding shall be laid evenly over the
surface, tamped and corrected to desired levels and allowed to harden enough to offer a
rigid cushion to tiles and to enable the mason to place wooden planks across and squat on
it. Before laying the tiles grey cement slurry or honey like consistency at 3.3 Kg/square
meter shall be applied over the bedding. At a time in area to accommodate about twenty
tiles shall be applied with cement slurry. Tiles shall then be washed clean and fixed in the
grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped in line with adjoin tile. The joints shall
be as thin as possible in straight line or as per the pattern. The surface of the flooring shall
be checked with a straight edge about 2 m long so as to obtain a true surface with the
required slope.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their
edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tile fixed in the floor near the wall
shall enter plaster, skirting or dado to a minimum depth of 10 mm.
After laying the tiles, excess cement grout is cleaned.
11.2.4 Jointing and finishing
The joints shall be cleaned of grey cement grout with wire brush or trowel to a depth of 5
mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. White cement shall then be used for flush
pointing the joints. The floor shall be cured for seven days. The surface then be washed and
cleaned. The surface shall not sound hollow when tapped.
11.3 Measurements
Ceramic/Vitrified tiles shall be measured in square meters correct to two places of decimal.
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to 1 cm between the exposed faces of
skirting or dado where the junction of flooring with skirting or dado is square.
11.4 Rate

174 of 194
 The rate calculation shall be as per specification under “B. Technical Specifications for Civil
Works, Clause 11.2.4 Rate” mentioned earlier. The rate also includes the cost of cement
plaster to be used as bedding layer and cement slurry used.

LAMINATED FLOOR COVERING (WOOD FINISH)

12.1 Material
Laminated floor covering (wood finish) of 8 mm thickness shall confirm to the specifications
given below. All other materials used shall confirm to specifications given in the relevant
sections or as decided by Engineer.
Class 21 22 23 31 32 33 Test
Method
Service Category Domestic Commercial EN 685
Level of Use Light / Normal / Heavy Light / Normal / Heavy
Moderate General Moderate General
Abrasion AC 1 AC 2 AC 3 AC 4 AC 5 EN 13329
Resistance IP ≥ 900 IP ≥ 1.500 IP ≥ 2.000 IP ≥ 4.000 IP ≥ 6.000 Annex E
Impact resistance IC 1 IC 2 IC 3 EN 13329
Newton/mm drop Annex F
height EN 438
Small ball ≥10 N / ≥800 mm ≥15N/≥1000mm ≥20N/≥1200mm 2.11/2.12
Big ball ≥8 N / ≥1000 mm ≥12N/≥1400mm ≥15N/≥1600mm

Resistance to EN 438
staining 2.15
Group 1 + 2 Level 4 Level 5
Level 3 Level 4
Group 3
Resistance to - Level 4 EN 438
cigarette burns 2.18
Effect of furniture - No visible damage when tested with test-object Type O EN 424
leg
Effect of a castor - No visible change or damage EN 425
chair

Thickness swelling ≤ 20 % ≤ 18 % EN 13329

Annex G
Note: The above characteristics are minimum specification values to the new European Standard for laminate
floor coverings.
AC = Abrasion Classes, EN = European Standard, IC = Impact Classes, IP = Initial Point

Characteristics Class Test Method

Class 31 32 33 EN 13329
Abrasion AC 3 AC 4 AC 5 EN 13329
Formaldehyde Emission E1 E1 E1 EN 717
Light fastness Level 6 Level 6 Level 6 EN 438 - 2
Flame resistance Cfl Cfl Cfl EN ISO 11925 - 2
Castor chairs Type W Type W Type W DIN 68131
Installation on subfloor Yes Yes Yes Only hot water systems
heating systems EN 12664

175 of 194
DIN = Deutsches Institut für Normung (German Institute for Standardization), EN = European Standard
Tolerances/Requirements according to EN 13329 laminate floor coverings – Specification,
Classification and Test Methods – Table-1 General Requirements, are as below:
Flatness length Concave ∪ < 0.50 %
Flatness width Concave ∪ < 0.15 %
Flatness length Convex ∩ < 1.00 %
Flatness width Convex ∩ < 0.20 %
Straightness of edge (Banana form) Length < 0.30 mm / m
Squareness Width < 0.20mm
Height difference between elements Length/Width average ≤ 0.1 mm, single value ≤ 0.15 mm acceptable

12.2 Workmanship
12.2.1 Sub-grade
Sub-grade shall be of floor concrete or of R.C.C. slab or of plastered masonry walls.
12.2.2 Laying & Finishing
Sub-grade shall be thoroughly cleaned, mopped and dried, and leveled using a foam
surface. Where full size wooden laminate planks cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn)
to the required size and if required their edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true
joints. Floor laminate planks fixed in the floor near the wall shall enter skirting strip to a
minimum depth of 8 mm. The laminate planks shall be fitted with secure tongue & groove
connections/joints (on longitudinal sides of the strips) that create floor that is both tight and
flexible, as required. Skirting strips (with bevelled top edge) as directed by the Engineer
shall be fixed. Where required, adhesives shall be applied thoroughly on the base of the
laminate planks/skirting strips to cover the complete surface.
After laying the laminate planks/skirting strips, any excess adhesives from joints / edges is
cleaned.
12.3 Measurements
Laminated floor covering (wood finish) shall be measured in square meters correct to two
places of decimal. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to 1 cm between the
exposed faces of skirting or dado where the junction of flooring with skirting or dado is
square. The skirting strips shall be measured in running meter correct to two places of
decimal
12.4 Rate
The rate is inclusive of all material costs i.e. laminate flooring planks and skirting strips
(wood finish), foam layer, adhesives, transportation/cartage, wastages, charges for all tools
& equipments utilized in fitting laminate floor covering (wood finish), etc., the cost of labour,
and overheads & profits. The laminate floor covering (wood finish) rate is paid on per square
meter basis of wooden laminated flooring as fitted, and the laminated wood finish skirting
strips as fitted to be paid on running meter basis.

SPECIFICATION/RECOMMENDED MAKE/BRAND

1- All work shall be carried out as per detailed Uttarakhand PWD & CPWD specifications.
2- Action where no specification is given

In the case of any class of work for which there is no specification in the Contract, such
work shall be carried out in accordance with the detailed CPWD/ PWD specifications &
in the event of there being no detailed specifications for the same, work shall be carried

176 of 194
 out in all respects in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge and
good engineering practices.
4- The recommended make for the Civil, Electrical, Electronics and Furnishing items are
as follows:-
(a) Civil:-
SI. No. Name of the Item Recommended Makes/Brand
1 Cement ACC or eq.make
2 TMT Bar Fe 500 SAIL/RINL or eq.make
3 Paint & Varnish Asian or eq.make
4 Sanitary fittings
i. PVC Nahani trap Supreme or eq.make
ii. Soil/waste pipe, collar, plain bend, Supreme or eq.make
door bend, plain tee, door tee
iii. GI pipe Jindal Hisar or eq.make
iv. PVC water storage tank Sintex or eq.make
v. CP bath fitting Jaquar or eq.make
vi. Sanitary Vitreous China Ware Jaquar or eq.make
vii. Looking mirror beveled edge Modi guard or eq. make
5. Furniture Godrej or eq.make
6. Kitchen Equipment(SS Sheet) Jindal or eq.make

177 of 194
SECTION – V
CHECK LIST

178 of 194
 SECTION-V
CHECK LIST

Note: The check list shall be duly filled in and submitted with the offer.

S Document Yes No
No
1 Have you purchased the original Tender/Bid Documents
2 If downloaded from web site, enclosed the cost of tender
document as per the Bid document)
3 Have you submitted an Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
4 Have you submitted valid latest Income tax clearance
certificate & photocopy of PAN.
5 All the pages of Tender Documents have been signed by the
authorized person under seal of the firm
6 Have you quoted in the prescribed proforma
7 Have you quoted the entire bid price in Indian Rupees
8 Have you quoted the rates in both words and figures
9 Have you kept your offer valid for 90 days
10 Have you enclosed experience certificate.
11 Have you enclosed the registration certificate in D or above
class category in any Government, Semi Government
Department (Building Works).
12 Have you enclosed the EPF registration certificate
13 Have you enclosed the audited balance sheet of last 3 years.
14 Have you enclosed the photocopy of GST No.

Signature and Seal of the Tenderer

********

179 of 194
SECTION – VI
PERFORMA

180 of 194
 PERFORMA - 1

BIDDER DETAILS

Tender No........................................... Due date of opening..............................

(i) Name of the firm

(ii) Address of firm with Telephone No(s), Fax No(s)

(iii) Name and address of the Banker.

(iv) A copy of valid VAT/ Sales Tax Clearance Certificate /GST

(v) A copy of PAN / TAN

(vi) Last 3 years Audited balance sheet and profit & loss account certified
by the Statutory Auditor.

Signature
(Name/Designation)

*******

181 of 194
 PERFORMA - 2
(sheet 1 of 3)

LETTER OF SUBMISSION OF TENDER

(To be typed by Contractor on his letter head)

From :

To :

Name of the work: --------------------------------------------------

Ref : Tender No.-----------------------------------------------------

Dear Sirs,

1 Having examined the Drawings, Conditions of Contract, Specifications,

incorporated in the tender document for the execution of the above named
works, and having visited and examined the site of the said works, I/We the
undersigned, offer to execute, complete and maintain the whole of the said
works in conformity with the said drawings, conditions of contract,
specifications, Bill of Quantities etc. for the sum as indicated in the Bill of
Quantities or such other sum as may be ascertained in accordance with the
said conditions.

2 Should this tender be accepted I/we undertake to commence the work within
07 (Seven) days of issue of the Letter of Acceptance for the work and
further undertake to complete and deliver the whole of the works
comprised in the contract latest by ------------- in all respects..

3 I/We agree to abide by this tender for a period of 90 days from the date of
opening of the bid/or such extended period as may be mutually agreed as
prescribed in the Instruction to Bidders and it shall remain binding upon us
and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period.

182 of 194
 PERFORMA - 2
(sheet 2 of 3)

4. A sum of Rs......………. towards earnest money in the form of.....……….. in

terms of clause 7.0 of the Instructions to bidders, is enclosed herewith.

5. Unless and until an agreement is prepared and executed, this tender together
with your written acceptance thereof, shall constitute a binding Contract
between us.

6. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any tender you
may receive.

7. We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for
us or on our behalf will engage in bribery.

We undertake that, in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in

executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud
and corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988”.

Commissions and gratuities paid or to be paid by us to agents relating to this

Proposal and Contract execution, if we are awarded the Contract, are listed
below2:
Name and Address of Agent/s Amount Purpose of Commission/ Gratuity
We understand you are not bound to accept any Proposal you receive.

8. Name of the partners of the firm authorised to sign (A photocopy of registered

partnership deed is enclosed herewith.)

-----------------------------------------

----------------------------------------
or
Name of person having power of attorney to sign the contract (Certified
true copy of the Power of Attorney should be attached)

8. Correspondence address of Contractor:-

(The bidder should write his address and other details below at which the
correspondence shall be made regarding this tender. In case of any change in
the address provided below contractor has to inform GMVNL immediately).

a) Correspondence Address : _________________________

_________________________

_________________________

183 of 194
 PERFORMA - 2
(sheet 3 of 3)

b) Telephone No (alongwith
STD Code) : __________________________

c) Fax: __________________________

d) Name of Contact Person : __________________________

All the correspondence shall be made by Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd at
the above provided address/phone/Fax numbers only.

Yours faithfully,

SIGNATURE(S) OF THE BIDDER(S)

Permanent address..............

Local address ..............

Note: The Bidder is to fill up the blanks in the above form before signing and
submitting the tender.

*********

184 of 194
 PERFORMA- 3
(sheet 1/2)
(Refer Clause 8.0 of Conditions of Contract)

FORMAT TOWARDS PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE(RECOVABLE)

Bank Guarantee No____________________

Date_________________

To,
__________________________________________________(Name of Client)

Against contract vide Letter of Acceptance No__________________

dated__________ covering supply of _______________________ (hereinafter
called the said „contract‟) entered into between General Manager (C) for Garhwal
Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd, 74/1, Rajpur Road, Dehradun (Uttrakhand) and
___________________ (hereinafter called the „Contractor‟), this is to certify that at
the request of the Contractor we, ___________________ Bank Ltd., are holding in
trust in favour of the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd an
amount of Rs ________________( write the sum here in figures as well as words) to
indemnify and keep indemnified the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas
Nigam Ltd against any loss or damage that may be caused or likely to be caused to
or suffered by the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd by
reason of any breach by the contractor of any of the terms and conditions of the said
contract and/or the performance thereof.

We agree that the decision of the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas
Nigam Ltd, whether any breach of any of the terms and conditions of the said
contract and/or in the performance thereof has been committed by the contractor
and the amount of loss or damage that has been caused or suffered by General
Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd shall be final and binding on us
and the amount of the said loss or damage shall be paid by us forth with on demand
and without demur to the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd.

We_____________________ Bank., further agree that the guarantee herein

contained shall remain in full force and effect during the period that would be taken
for satisfactory performance and fulfillment in all respects of the said contract by the
contractor i.e. till______________(the date up to 12 months after the date of
completion of the work ) hereinafter called the „said date‟ and that if any claim
accrues or arises against us, ___________________Bank., by virtue of this
guarantee before the said date, the same shall be enforceable against us,
_________________ Bank., notwithstanding the fact that the same is enforced
within six months after the said date. Payment under this letter of guarantee shall be
made promptly upon our receipt of notice to that effect from the General Manager
(C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd.

185 of 194
 PERFORMA- 3
(sheet2/2)

It is fully understood that this guarantee is effective from the date of the said contract
and that we, _______________ Bank, undertake not to revoke this guarantee during
its currency without the consent in writing of the General Manager (C) for Garhwal
Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd.

We, ___________________Bank, further agree that the General Manager (C) for
Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd shall have the fullest liberty, without affecting in
any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the
said contract or to extend time of performance by the contractor from time to time or
to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers exercisable by the
General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd (against the said
Contractor and to forbear or enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to the
said contract and we, ____________ Bank Ltd., shall not be released from our
liability under this guarantee by reason of any such variation or extension being
granted to the said Contractor or for any forbearance and or omission on the part of
the General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltd or any indulgence by
General Manager (C) for Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam Ltdto the said Contractor or
by any other matter or thing what-so-ever, which, under the law relating to sureties,
would, but for this provision have the effect of so releasing us from our liability under
this guarantee.

We___________________ Bank., further agree that the guarantee herein contained

shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of the said Contractor.

Date__________________
Signature_____________________
Place__________________
Name_______________________

(Designation)

Witness _______________________
_______________________

(Bank‟s Common Seal)

*******

186 of 194
 APPROACH ROAD

BHANDAAR

LVL.-2
DHARMSHALA

5.60
2.10 7.60 3.30

2.70
2.70 7.00

1.50
4.50 1.50 LVL.-1

12.11
8.10

8.10
11.30 10.90 8.53

23.04
0.70
20.00

ENTRANCE
GATE
11.10
6.87

5.10
20.20

EXISTING MAHASU
DEVTA MANDIR

5.94
11.00

6.60

CULTURAL

5.40
MANCH

SEATING

DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS

NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 SITE PLAN MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 187 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 B
0.75 1.20 2.70 1.20

2.00
0.50
0.75

5.10
B'
PLAN
DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 ENTRANCE GATE PLAN MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 188 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 0.50
0.9
0

0.15 0.50
0.50

1.20 0.80 1.10 0.80 1.20

2.00
0.30

5.10 SECTION BB'

EXISTING FRONT
ELEVATION
DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 ENTRANCE GATE MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
ELEVATION & SECTION DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 189 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 0.90 1.10 0.90 Roof projection

Plank Stone cladding

PLAN- STONE CLADDING

DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS

NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 ENTRANCE GATE MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
PLAN-STONE CLADDING DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 190 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 A Entrance Gate Boundary Wall
0.30

0.45
0.70
2.55

0.70
0.30

0.70
0.30
0.30

0.23
0.23
0.45

0.45

0.45
1.45
A'
12.11 5.10 6.54

PLAN

Cut Slate Roofing

0.23x 0.23
Wooden deodar
pillars

12.11 6.12

Seating 1 Seating 2
0.35x0.35x0.35 FRONT
Concrete pedestal (1:2:4)
ELEVATION
DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 SEATING MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
PLAN & ELEVATION DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 191 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 Slate
0.05th. planks deodar/chir

1.20
Rafter/ purlin
0.07x 0.10
Jhalar Brick wall
0.45

0.70 0.70 0.70

3.00

Existing wall

2.34
0.45
0.45
0.45
2.10
0.50

3.20

SECTION AA'
DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 SEATING MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
SECTION DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
0135-2608694,9410522156
04-06-2019 CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam *Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 192 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 Deodar
Slate Roofing wood
planks
Deodar 0.05 th.
wooden joist
(0.10X0.07)

Deodar
wood
Stone Cladding
Jhalar

PROPOSED FRONT
ELEVATION
DRAWING PROJECT: SITE ARCHITECTS/ STRUCTURAL CONSULTANTS
NUMBER: DRAWING TITLE: PROPOSED RENOVATION AND K.C.KURIYAL & ASSOCIATES SIGNATURE
BEAUTIFICATION OF MAHASU DEVTA
AR-1 ENTRANCE GATE MANDIR CAMPUS, AT VILLAGE BHANKOLI,
PROPOSED FRONT DISTRICT : UTTARKASHI *Head Office:Mahima Nand Kuriyal Bhawan, Barahaat,Uttarkashi(Uttarakhand)
Ph/Fax:01374-222281 , 8979996006
DATE: *Branch Office:8-Sneh Kunj,Sahastrdhara Road,NearIT Park,Dehradun.
04-06-2019
ELEVATION CLIENTS : Garhwal Mandal Vikas Nigam 0135-2608694,9410522156
*Associate Offices:Aakriti, 4-Purukul Road,Near Mussoorie Diversion,Dehradun.
NOTE:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN METERS 193 of 194
E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
 1
16'-72" [5.067]

V V V V

W.C. W.C. W.C. W.C.

1.05X1.52 1.05X1.52 1.05X1.52 1.05X1.52
D2 D2 D2 D2
18'-10" [5.744]

18'-10" [5.744]
HE TOILET SHE TOILET
2.24X2.42 2.24X2.42

D1 D1

VERANDAH
1.22 M. WIDE

GROUND FLOOR PLAN

PROPOSED TOILET BLOCK PLAN AT DRAWN BY J.E. A.E. G.M.(C.)

BHANKOLI,
DISTRICT:- UTTARKASHI (U.K.)
GARHWAL MANDAL VIKAS NIGAM
DEHRADUN
DATE:- 20-06-2018 LOCATION:- D/MAPS/DEHRADUN /TOILET
S.K. SINGH
COVD. AREA=27.87 SQM.

194 of 194